2017 Mitsubishi Mirage g4 97705

Mirage G4
/ 2017 OWNER’S MANUAL

Mirage G4
2017 / OWNER’S MANUAL
© Copyright 2016 Mitsubishi Motors North America, Inc

BK0236100US.book 1 ページ２０１６年２月１日　月曜日　午前１０時１５分
Table of contents
Overview 1
Quick index 2
General information 3
Seat and restraint systems 4
Features and controls 5
Driving safety 6
Comfort controls 7
For emergencies 8
Vehicle care and maintenance 9
Customer assistance/Reporting Safety Defects 10
Specifications 11
Alphabetical index 12
Instruments and controls
1 Instruments and controls

N00100202704
Instrument cluster P.5-64
Hazard warning flasher switch P.5-82
Wiper and washer switch P.5-82

Combination headlights and dimmer switch P.5-79
Turn-signal lever P.5-81
Front fog light switch (if so equipped) P.5-82
Cruise control switches

(if so equipped) P.5-54
Engine switch (if so equipped) P.5-13

Ignition switch (if so equipped)
P.5-37
Active stability control (ASC) OFF switch
P.5-53
Electric remote-controlled outside rearview Supplemental restraint system (SRS)-air-
mirror switch P.5-36 bag (for driver)
P.4-21, 4-27
Horn switch P.5-85
Steering wheel height adjustment Steering wheel remote control switches (if so equipped)
P.5-33 P.5-87, 7-40
Fuse box P.9-22 Supplemental restraint system-driver’s knee airbag

P.4-21, 4-28
1-1 Overview
Instruments and controls
1
Center vents P.7-2 Heater (if so equipped) P.7-4
Supplemental restraint system (SRS)-air- Manual air conditioning (if so
bag (for front passenger) P.4-21, 4-27 equipped) P.7-7
Audio (if so equipped) P.7-19
Clock (if so equipped) P.7-26 Electric rear window defogger switch
P.5-84
Automatic air conditioning (if so

Side vents P.7-2 equipped) P.7-12
Engine hood release lever Glove compartment

P.9-4 P.5-117
Cup holder (for the front
seat) P.5-117 12 V power outlets
P.5-110 Electric rear window defogger switch
P.5-84
Key slot (if so equipped)
Fuel tank filler door release lever Gearshift lever P.5-20
P.3-3 (if so equipped) P.5-40
Selector lever
Parking brake lever P.5-32
Cup holder (for the rear seat)

P.5-117
Overview 1-2
Interior
1 Interior
N00100302428
Power window lock switch P.5-30
Bottle holders P.5-118

Sun visors P.5-109
Power door lock switch (if so Vanity mirror P.5-109 Dome light P.5-116, 9-28
equipped) P.5-25 Card holder P.5-109
Inside rearview mirror P.5-34
Assist grips
P.5-119
USB input terminal (if so
Power window switch P.5-29
equipped)
P.5-105
Seat belts P.4-7
Heated seats switches

Supplemental restraint system (SRS)- (if so equipped) P.4-4
curtain airbags P.4-21, 4-32
Head restraints P.4-5
Manual window control

(if so equipped) P.5-29 Front seats P.4-2
Supplemental restraint system
Tether anchorages for child restraint (SRS)-side airbag (for front seat)
system P.4-16 P.4-21, 4-32
Jack P.8-5
Armrest P.4-5 Cup holder (for the rear seat)
Rear seat P.4-5
P.5-117
1-3 Overview
Luggage area
Luggage area 1
N00100501553
Trunk room light P.9-28
Tools P.8-5
Spare tire P.8-7
Overview 1-4
Outside
1 Outside
N00100602649
Windshield wipers P.5-82

Power window P.5-29
Outside rearview mirrors P.5-36
Fuel tank filler P.3-3
Engine hood P.9-4
F.A.S.T.-key (Free-hand Advanced

Security Transmitter) (if so equipped)
P.5-9
Keyless entry system (if so equipped)
Front fog lights (if so equipped) P.5-6
P.5-82, 9-27, 9-29 Side turn signal lights Locking and unlocking P.5-24
(if so equipped)
P.5-81, 9-27
Front turn signal lights/Parking lights Front side- marker lights
P.5-81, 9-27, 9-29 P.5-79, 9-27, 9-29
Headlights/Daytime running lights (if so equipped)
P.5-79, 9-27, 9-28
1-5 Overview
Outside
Tire pressure monitoring system

High-mounted stop light Antenna P.7-44 Changing tires P.8-6
P.9-27 Size of tires and wheels P.11-5
Tire inflation pressure P.9-15
Tire rotation P.9-17
Tire chains P.9-18
Rear-view camera
Trunk lid P.5-27
Rear side- marker lights P.5-79, 9-27, 9-30

License plate lights
Tail and stop lights P.5-79, 9-27, 9-30
P.5-79, 9-27, 9-31
Rear turn signal lights
P.5-81, 9-27, 9-30
Back-up light P.9-27, 9-30
Overview 1-6
If this warning light comes on or flashes while you’re driving...

2
N00200702250
NOTE
 These warning lights will come on for a few seconds for a bulb check when the ignition switch is first turned to “ON” or the operation mode is put in ON.
Warning lights Do this Ref. Page
 Park your vehicle in a safe place and stop the engine.

Contact your Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facility of your choice for assis- P. 5-78
tance.
Charging system warning light

Contact your Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facility of your choice for assis- P. 5-14
tance.
(Illuminates and intermittent sounds)
 Park your vehicle in a safe place and stop the engine, then check the engine oil
level.
If the light comes on while the engine oil level is normal, have the system checked P. 5-78
at an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facility of your choice as soon
Oil pressure warning light as possible.
Quick index 2-1


 If this light comes on while driving, check to see that the parking brake is fully
2 released.
 If this light stays on after releasing the parking brake, immediately stop and check
or the brake fluid level. P. 5-76
 If the brake fluid level is correct, there may be a system malfunction. Avoid hard
Brake warning light braking and high speed, and contact an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a
repair facility of your choice for assistance.
 Park your vehicle in a safe place.

Idle the engine until the selector lever position indicator stops flashing.
Selector lever position indicator in the P. 5-45
If the indicator does not go off, have the system checked at an authorized
instrument cluster flashes rapidly
Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facility of your choice as soon as possible.
(once per second)
 Although your vehicle will usually be drivable and not need towing, have the
or engine system checked at an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facility
of your choice as soon as possible. If the vehicle is not drivable, contact emergency
P. 5-77
roadside assistance at 1-888-648-7820 (for vehicles sold in U.S.A.) or 1-888-576-
Engine malfunction indicator 4878 (for vehicles sold in Canada), an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer, or local
(“SERVICE ENGINE SOON” or towing company for assistance.
“Check engine light”)
 If this light comes on while the engine is running, it may become harder to turn the
steering wheel. Have your vehicle inspected at an authorized Mitsubishi Motors P. 5-51
dealer or a repair facility of your choice as soon as possible.
Electric power steering system (EPS)
warning light
2-2 Quick index


 When this light comes on, the anti-lock braking system is not functioning and only
the ordinary braking system is functioning. 2
Test the system as described on page 5-50. P. 5-50
 If the light does not go out after the test, or if it comes on again, we recommend that
Anti-lock braking system warning you have the system checked at an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair
light facility of your choice as soon as possible.
 Immediately have the airbag and the pre-tensioner seat belt system checked at an
P. 4-27
authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer.
SRS warning light
 Have your continuously variable transmission (CVT) checked at an authorized

Selector lever position indicator in the P. 5-45
Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facility of your choice as soon as possible.
instrument cluster flashes slowly
(every 2 seconds)
Restart the engine and check whether the indicator goes out.
and  If the indicator does not go out, or if it comes on again, have your vehicle inspected
P. 5-54
by an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facility of your choice as soon
as possible.
ASC indicator and ASC OFF indicator  When this indicator comes on, the active stability control is not functioning.
Quick index 2-3


2 Restart the engine and check whether the indicator goes out.
 If the indicator does not go out, or if it comes on again, have your vehicle inspected
by an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facility of your choice as soon P. 5-49
as possible.
ASC indicator  When this indicator comes on, the hill start assist is not functioning.
Start off carefully on a steep uphill slope.
 If the warning light comes on, you should stop and adjust the tires to the proper
inflation pressure as soon as possible.
(See “Tire inflation pressures” on page 9-15.)
Once adjustments have been made, the warning light will go off after a few minutes
of driving. P. 5-58
 If the warning light blinks for approximately 1 minute and then remains continu-
Tire pressure monitoring system warn- ously illuminated, the system is not operating properly. If the system returns to nor-
ing light (if so equipped) mal, the warning light will go off. If the warning light does not go off, have the
vehicle inspected at an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer.
2-4 Quick index

If this problem occurs...

2
N00200901978
Problem Do this Ref. Page

Unable to turn the key.
(except for vehicles equipped
with the F.A.S.T.-key)
From “ACC” to “OFF”
Vehicles with continuously variable transmission (CVT):
P. 5-37
Check the position of the selector lever.
The key cannot be removed unless the selector lever is set to the “P” (PARK) position.
The engine does not start when

the engine switch is pressed.
(for vehicles equipped with the Make sure the F.A.S.T.-key is in the vehicle.
F.A.S.T.-key) Vehicles with manual transaxle:
Press and hold the clutch pedal all the way down, and then press the engine switch while
depressing the brake pedal. P. 5-16
Vehicles with continuously variable transmission (CVT):
Make sure the selector lever is in the “P” (PARK) position, and then press the engine switch
while depressing the brake pedal.
The F.A.S.T.-key does not oper-

Use the emergency key to lock and unlock the door.
ate.
Insert the F.A.S.T.-key into the key slot of the floor console, and then start the engine or P. 5-18, 5-19
(for vehicles equipped with the
change the operation mode.
F.A.S.T.-key)
Quick index 2-5


Cannot shift the selector lever
2 from the “P” (PARK) position. Shift the selector lever while pressing the brake pedal.
P. 5-42
(for vehicles with continuously Check that the ignition switch or the operation mode is in ON.
variable transmission (CVT))
The windows are fogged up.
Vehicles equipped with the heater without air conditioning function or the manual air
conditioning:
1. Set the mode selection dial to the “ ” or “ ” position. P. 7-6, 7-10,
2. Turn on the blower. 7-14
Vehicles equipped with the automatic air conditioning:
Push the defogger switch to change the “ ” mode.
The engine does not start.

The lights do not come on.
P. 8-2,
The lights are dim. Have the battery checked. Recharge or replace as needed.
9-10
The horn does not honk.
The horn sound is weak.
The high coolant temperature
warning light is illuminated.
The engine is overheated.

P. 8-4
Carefully stop the vehicle in a safe place.
Steam comes out of the engine

compartment.
2-6 Quick index


The vehicle is stuck in sand,
mud or snow
Rock your vehicle back and forth to free it. P. 8-13 2
WARNING
 When attempting to rock your vehicle out of a stuck position, be sure that no one is near the vehicle. The rocking motion may cause the vehicle to
suddenly lurch forward or backward, possibly injuring bystanders.
 Avoid revving the engine or spinning the wheels. Prolonged efforts to free a stuck vehicle may result in overheating and transaxle failure.
If the vehicle remains stuck after several rocking attempts, have a towing service pull the vehicle out.

The brakes are not functioning
properly after crossing a puddle Dry out the brakes by driving slowly while lightly pressing the brake pedal. P. 6-5
or stream.
The continuously variable trans-
mission (CVT) makes no shift
change when accelerating. The There may be a problem in the CVT.
initial movement of the vehicle Have the vehicle inspected by an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facility of P. 5-45
is slow when the vehicle starts your choice.
moving.
(for vehicles with CVT)
A tire is punctured.
1. Park the vehicle in a safe place where the surface is flat and level.
P. 8-6
2. Replace the flat tire with the compact spare tire.
Quick index 2-7

General information
3
Fuel selection ...................................................................................3-2
Filling the fuel tank ..........................................................................3-3
Modifications to and racing of your vehicle ....................................3-5
Genuine Mitsubishi Motors parts ....................................................3-6
California Perchlorate Materials Requirements ...............................3-7
Fuel selection
oline to minimize fuel-injector clogging and
Fuel selection minimize intake-valve deposits. Detergent
Methanol
N00301000912
gasoline helps keep your engine in tune and
Your vehicle is designed to use unleaded gas- your emission-control system working prop- Do not operate your vehicle on gasoline con-
3 oline only. It is equipped with a fuel tank erly. taining methanol (wood alcohol). Using this
filler pipe specifically designed to accept only type of alcohol could adversely affect the
a small diameter unleaded gasoline dispens- vehicle’s performance and damage critical
ing nozzle.
Octane requirement parts of the vehicle’s fuel system.
Your vehicle is designed to operate on

WARNING unleaded gasoline having a minimum octane
Reformulated gasoline
 Gasoline is highly flammable and explo-
number of 87 [(MON+RON)/2] or 91 RON.
sive. You could be burned, seriously Many areas of the country require the use of
injured or killed when handling it. When-
cleaner burning fuel referred to as “Reformu-
ever you refuel your vehicle, stop the Oxygenated gasoline lated Gasoline”.
engine and keep flames, sparks, and
smoking materials away from the vehicle. Reformulated gasoline contains oxygenates
Always handle fuel in well-ventilated out- Gasoline sold at some service stations con- and is specially blended to reduce vehicle
door areas. tains oxygenates such as ethanol, although emissions and improve air quality.
the oxygenates may not be identified by those Mitsubishi Motors Corporation strongly sup-
names. Oxygenates are required in some ports the use of reformulated gasoline. Prop-
CAUTION areas of the country. Such fuel can be used in erly blended reformulated gasoline has no
 Using leaded gasoline in your vehicle will your vehicle. adverse effect on vehicle performance or the
damage the engine, catalytic converter, and durability of the engine and fuel system.
the oxygen sensors. Also, using leaded gaso- Ethanol (Gasohol)
line is illegal, and will void your warranty
coverage of the engine, catalytic converter,
MMT (methylcyclopentadienyl
and oxygen sensors. A mixture of up to 10 % ethanol (grain alco- manganese tricarbonyl)
hol) and 90 % unleaded gasoline may be used
in your vehicle, provided the octane number MMT is a manganese-containing metallic
Gasoline detergent additives is at least as high as that recommended for additive that is blended into some gasolines
unleaded gasoline. to increase the octane number. Mitsubishi
In the United States, fuel suppliers are Motors Corporation recommends using gaso-
required by law to add detergents to their gas- lines without MMT.
3-2 General information

Filling the fuel tank

Use of gasolines blended with MMT may
adversely affect performance, and cause the
NOTE WARNING
 Poor-quality gasoline can cause problems  Gasoline is highly flammable and explo-
malfunction indicator on your instrument
such as hard starting, stalling during idling, sive. You could be burned, seriously
panel to come on. If this happens, contact an
abnormal engine noise, and poor accelera- injured or killed when handling it. When
authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a tion. If you experience any of these prob- refueling your vehicle, always turn the 3
repair facility of your choice for assistance. lems, try using a different brand of gasoline. engine off and keep away from flames,
If the engine malfunction indicator (“SER- sparks, and smoking materials. Always
VICE ENGINE SOON” or “Check engine handle fuel in well-ventilated outdoor
Sulfur in gasoline light”) flashes, have the vehicle inspected as areas.
soon as possible by the nearest authorized  Before removing the fuel tank filler cap,
Your vehicle may have been designed to sat- Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facility be sure to get rid of your body’s static
isfy California’s low-emission regulations of your choice. electricity by touching a metal part of the
based on clean-burning low-sulfur gasoline.  Repeatedly driving short distances at low car or fuel pump. Any static electricity on
Gasoline sold in parts of the country other speeds can cause deposits to form in the fuel your body could create a spark that
than California is allowed to have a higher system and engine, resulting in hard starting ignites fuel vapor.
sulfur content. Using such gasoline could and poor acceleration. If these problems  Perform the whole refueling process
occur, you are advised to add a detergent (opening the fuel tank filler door, remov-
adversely affect the vehicle’s catalytic con-
additive to the gasoline when you refuel the ing the fuel tank filler cap, etc.) by your-
verter and cause the engine malfunction indi-
vehicle. The additive will remove the depos- self; do not let any other person near the
cator (“SERVICE ENGINE SOON” or its, thereby returning the engine to a normal fuel tank filler. If you allowed a person to
“Check engine light”) to come on. Illumina- condition. Be sure to use a Mitsubishi help you and that person was carrying
tion of this indicator while using high-sulfur Motors Genuine cleaning additive. Using an static electricity, fuel vapor could be
gasoline does not necessarily mean the vehi- unsuitable additive could make an engine ignited.
cle’s emission-control system is malfunction- malfunction. For details, please contact the  Do not move away from the fuel tank filler
ing. Your authorized Mitsubishi Motors nearest authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer. until refueling is finished. If you moved
dealer may suggest using a different, lower- away and did something else (for example,
sulfur brand of unleaded gasoline to deter- sitting on a seat) part-way through the
mine if the problem is fuel-related. Filling the fuel tank refueling process, you could pick up a
fresh charge of static electricity.
N00301101981
 Be careful not to inhale fuel vapor. Fuel
contains toxic substances.
WARNING
 Keep the doors and windows closed while
 When handling fuel, comply with the
refueling the vehicle. If they were open,
safety regulations displayed by garages
fuel vapor could get into the cabin.
and filling stations.
General information 3-3

Filling the fuel tank
Fuel tank capacity WARNING

 Since the fuel system may be under pres-
9.2 gal (35 L) sure, remove the fuel tank filler cap
slowly. This relieves any pressure or vac-
3 uum that might have built up in the fuel
Refueling tank. If the fuel tank filler cap is venting
vapor or if you hear a hissing sound, wait
1. Before filling with fuel, stop the engine. until the sound stops before removing the
2. The fuel tank filler is located on the rear fuel tank filler cap. Otherwise, fuel may
driver side of your vehicle. spray out, injuring you or others.
The fuel tank filler door can be opened
1- Remove
from inside the vehicle with the fuel tank 5. To fill with fuel correctly depends mainly
2- Close
filler door release lever located at the left on correct handling of the fuel filler noz-
side of the driver’s seat. zle. Do not tilt the nozzle. Insert the noz-
4. While filling with fuel, hang the fuel tank zle in the fuel tank filler port as far as it
filler cap cord on the hook located on the goes.
inside surface of the fuel tank filler door.
CAUTION
 Your vehicle can only be operated using
unleaded gasoline. Serious engine and cata-
lytic converter damage will result if leaded
gasoline is filled into these vehicles, and
consequently, this must never be attempted.
6. When the nozzle stops automatically, do

3. Open the fuel tank filler pipe by slowly not add more fuel.
turning the fuel tank filler cap counter-
clockwise.

Modifications to and racing of your vehicle

VEHICLE ARE NOT COVERED
CAUTION NOTE UNDER WARRANTY.
 To avoid fuel spillage and overfilling, do not  If the fuel tank filler cap is not tight while
“top-off” the fuel tank. Spilled fuel could driving, the engine malfunction indicator Examples of modifications to your vehicle
discolor, stain, or crack the vehicle’s paint- (“SERVICE ENGINE SOON” or “Check
work. If fuel spills on the paintwork, wipe it engine light”) may come on when the
that can cause damage or performance prob- 3
lems include the following:
off with a soft cloth. onboard diagnostic (OBD) system performs
a self check.
 Failure to use Mitsubishi Motors genuine
Always tighten the fuel tank filler cap until
7. To close, turn the fuel tank filler cap parts
you hear at least 3 clicks.
slowly clockwise until you hear clicking The indicator will go off after several driving  Failure to use required fuel and fluids
sounds, then gently push the fuel tank cycles. If the indicator does not go off, con-  Failure to use proper size tires and wheels
filler door closed. tact your authorized Mitsubishi Motors  Modification of the fuel, intake, exhaust,
dealer or a repair facility of your choice as emission, suspension, engine, drive train
WARNING soon as possible. or electrical wiring systems
 Make sure the fuel tank filler cap is  Modification of any onboard com-
securely closed. If the fuel tank filler cap puter/control module, including repro-
were loose, fuel could leak, resulting in a
fire.
Modifications to and racing gramming, or replacing/adding chips to
any onboard computer/control module
of your vehicle
N00301600194
Review the Warranty and Maintenance Man-
CAUTION This vehicle should not be modified with ual for further details regarding warranty cov-
 If you need to replace the fuel tank filler cap, non-Mitsubishi Motors genuine parts. erage.
use only the fuel tank filler cap specified for Mitsubishi Motors designs and manufactures
your model vehicle. high quality vehicles with an emphasis on
Installation of accessories
safety and durability. Modifications using
N00301700212
non-Mitsubishi Motors genuine parts may
affect the performance, safety and/or durabil- CAUTION
ity of your vehicle, and may violate applica-  Before any electrical or electronic accesso-
ble state and/or federal regulations. ries are installed, consult an authorized
Mitsubishi Motors dealer.
DAMAGE OR PERFORMANCE PROB-
LEMS RESULTING FROM MODIFICA-
TIONS TO OR RACING OF YOUR

Genuine Mitsubishi Motors parts

 The installation of accessories, optional accessory which may involve modification of
parts, etc., should only be performed
WARNING the electrical or fuel systems.
 While driving, do not use a cellular phone
within the limits prescribed by law, and in
in a way that hinders safe driving. Any-
accordance with the guidelines and warn- CAUTION
thing, including cellular phone usage, that
3 ings contained within the documents distracts you from the safe operation of  Please consult an authorized Mitsubishi
accompanying this vehicle. your vehicle increases your risk of an acci- Motors dealer concerning any such acces-
Only Mitsubishi Motors approved acces- dent. sory fitment or modification.
sories should be fitted to your vehicle. Refer to and follow all state and local laws If the wires interfere with the vehicle body or
 Improper installation of electrical parts in your area regarding cellular phone improper installation methods are used (pro-
could cause a fire. Refer to the “Modifica- usage while driving. tective fuses not included, etc.), electronic
tion/alterations to the electrical or fuel devices may be adversely affected, resulting
systems” section within this owner’s man- in a fire, vehicle damage, or other accident.
ual. Important point!
 Using a cellular phone or radio set inside
the vehicle without an external antenna Due to the large number of accessory and Genuine Mitsubishi Motors
may cause electrical system interference, replacement parts provided by different man- parts
which could lead to unsafe vehicle opera- ufacturers in the market, it is not always pos- N00301400219
tion. sible for an authorized Mitsubishi Motors
 Tires and wheels which do not meet spec- Mitsubishi Motors Genuine Parts are
dealer to check whether the attachment or
ifications must not be used. designed and manufactured to meet high stan-
installation of a non-Mitsubishi Motors genu-
Refer to the “Specifications” section for dards of performance, and are recommended
ine parts affects the driving safety of your
information regarding wheel and tire for all of your maintenance needs. Also avail-
Mitsubishi-vehicle.
sizes. able from your Mitsubishi Motors dealer are
a wide variety of accessories to personalize
Modification/alterations to the your new vehicle. Each Mitsubishi Motors
electrical or fuel systems vehicle has a selection of Mitsubishi Motors
N00301800183
authorized accessories to choose from to tai-
lor your new vehicle to your own personal
Mitsubishi Motors manufactures high quality
preference. Your Mitsubishi Motors dealer’s
vehicles with an emphasis on safety. It is
Parts Manager has information on various
important to consult an authorized Mitsubishi
audio systems, protection items, as well as
Motors dealer before installation of any
interior and exterior accessories available for
your specific model.
California Perchlorate Materials Requirements
California Perchlorate
Materials Requirements
N00300100017
Certain components of this vehicle, such as 3

airbag modules, seat belt pretensioners, and
button cell batteries, may contain perchlorate
materials.
Special handling may apply. For additional
information, see www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardous-
waste/perchlorate.

Seat and restraint systems
Seats .................................................................................................4-2 4
Seats and restraint systems ..............................................................4-2
Front seats ........................................................................................4-2
Rear seat ...........................................................................................4-5
Head restraints .................................................................................4-5
Seat belts ..........................................................................................4-7
Seat belt use during pregnancy ......................................................4-12
Seat belt pre-tensioner and force limiter systems ..........................4-12
Child restraint systems ...................................................................4-13
Maintenance and inspection of seat belts ......................................4-21
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) - airbag .............................4-21
Seats
Seats Seats and restraint systems WARNING

N00408401577 N00401601235  Do not place objects under the seats. This
could prevent the seat from locking
Your vehicle has seat belts and other safety
securely, and it could lead to an accident.
features that help protect you and your pas- It may also cause damage to the seat or
sengers in an accident. other parts.
4 Seat belts are the most important safety
device. When worn properly, seat belts can
reduce the chance of serious injury or death
in various types of crashes. For added protec-
Front seats
N00401800403
tion during a severe frontal collision, your
vehicle has a Supplemental Restraint System Position the driver’s seat as far back as possi-
(SRS) with airbags for the driver and passen- ble while maintaining a position that still
gers. The seats, head restraints, and door enables you to fully apply the pedals, easily
locks also are safety equipment, which must control the steering wheel and safely operate
be used correctly. the vehicle.
1 - Front seats
Always check the following before you drive:
 To adjust the seat forward or backward 
Page 4-3  That everyone in your vehicle is properly
 To adjust the seatbacks  Page 4-3 wearing their seat belt.
 To adjust the seat height (Driver’s seat  That infants and small children are prop-
only, if so equipped)  Page 4-4 erly secured in an appropriate child
 Heated seats (if so equipped)  Page 4-4 restraint system in the rear seat.
 That all doors are fully closed and locked.
2 - Rear seat  That seatbacks are upright, with head
restraints properly adjusted.
 Armrest  Page 4-5
Safety equipment cannot prevent injury or
death in all motor vehicle accidents. How- WARNING
ever, you can help reduce the risk of injury or  Do not attempt to adjust the seat while
death by following the instructions in this driving. This can cause loss of vehicle con-
manual. trol and result in an accident.
4-2 Seat and restraint systems

Front seats
WARNING CAUTION To adjust the seatbacks

 After adjusting the seat, make sure that  When sliding or reclining the seat rearward, N00402000369
seat is securely locked into position. pay careful attention to the rear seat passen- To adjust the seatback, lean forward slightly,
 To reduce the risk to the driver of serious gers.
gently pull the seatback lock lever up, then
injury or death during deployment of the
lean backward to a comfortable position and
driver’s airbag, always properly wear the
seat belt and adjust the driver’s seat as far
To adjust the seat forward or release the lever. The seatback will lock in 4
back as possible while maintaining a posi- backward place.
tion that still enables you to fully apply the N00401900316
pedals, easily control the steering wheel,
Pull the seat adjusting lever up and slide the
and safely operate the vehicle.
seat forward or backward to the desired posi-
 To reduce the risk to the front passenger
of serious injury or death during deploy-
tion. Release the adjusting lever to lock the
ment of the passenger’s airbag, always seat in place.
properly wear the seat belt and adjust the
front passenger’s seat as far back as possi-
ble.
 Always place children 12 years old and
under in the rear seat and use appropriate
child restraint systems.
CAUTION
CAUTION  The reclining mechanism used in the seat-
 Make sure that the seat is adjusted by an back is spring loaded, and will cause the
adult. If it is adjusted by a child, an unex- seatback to return quickly to the vertical
pected accident might occur. position when the lock lever is operated.
 Do not place a cushion or the like between When pulling the lever, sit close to the seat-
your back and the seatback while driving. WARNING back or hold the seatback with your hand to
The effectiveness of the head restraints will  To make sure that the seat is securely control its return motion.
be reduced in the event of an accident. locked, try to move it forward or back-
 When sliding the seats, be careful not to ward without using the adjusting lever.
catch your hand or leg.
Seat and restraint systems 4-3

Front seats
WARNING
 To reduce the risk of serious injury or
death in the event of an accident or sud-
den stop, all seatbacks should be kept in
the upright position while the vehicle is in
motion.
4 Seat belt performance during an accident
can be adversely affected if the seatbacks
are reclined. The more a seatback is
reclined, the more likely seat belt perfor-
mance will be adversely affected. If the
seat belt is not properly positioned against 1- To move the seat cushion up 1 (HI) - Heater high (for quick heating)
the body during an accident, there is 2- To move the seat cushion down 2- Heater off
increased risk you will slide under the belt 3 (LO) - Heater low (to keep the seat
and receive serious injury or death. warm)
Heated seats (if so equipped)
N00435601418
To adjust the seat height WARNING
The heated seats can be operated by pushing
(Driver’s seat only, if so the switch when the ignition switch or the
 Persons who are unable to feel tempera-
ture change or skin pain due to age, ill-
equipped) operation mode is in ON. The indicator light ness, injury, medication, alcohol use,
N00402100243 (A) will illuminate while the heater is on. fatigue or other physical conditions or
To adjust the seat height, turn the dial as who have sensitive skin may suffer burns
shown in the illustration. when using the heated seat even at low
temperatures. To reduce the risk of burns,
people with such conditions must use care
when using the heated seat.

Rear seat
CAUTION Rear seat Head restraints

 Switch off the heated seats when not in use. N00402501257 N00404301637
Operate the heaters at the “HI” position for
Padded head restraints for the seats can
quick heating. After the seat has become
warm, set the heater switch to the “LO” posi-
Arm rest reduce the risk of a whiplash injury if your
tion to keep it warm. Slight variations in the N00403001334 vehicle is hit from the rear.
seat temperature may be felt while using the To use the arm rest, tilt the arm rest down for The head restraints are equipped in the illus- 4
heated seats. This is caused by the operation use as shown. trated position.
of the heater’s internal thermostat and does The arm rest includes a cup holder. (Refer to To maximize the effectiveness of your head
not indicate a malfunction. “Cup holder” on page 5-117. restraint, adjust the front seatback to the
 Do not place heavy objects on the seat or upright position and the head restraint to the
stick pins, needles, or other pointed objects proper position. Sit back against the seatback
into the seat. with your head close to the head restraint.
 Do not place a blanket, cushion, or other
insulating material on the seat while using
the heater; doing so can cause the heater ele-
ment to overheat.
 When cleaning the seat, do not use benzine,
kerosene, gasoline, alcohol, or other organic
solvents; doing so can cause damage not
only to the surface of the seat, but also to the
heater.
 If water or any other liquid is spilled on the
seat, allow it to dry thoroughly before
attempting to use the heater. Turn the heater
NOTE
off immediately if it appears to be malfunc-  Never sit on an arm rest.
tioning during use. Doing so could damage the arm rest.

Head restraints
WARNING Adjustment of the head To remove

 Driving without the head restraints in restraint height (front seats)
place can cause you and your passengers Press the lock knob (A) in the direction
serious injury or death in an accident. To shown by the arrows. Then pull the head
reduce the risk of injury in an accident, To reduce the risk of injury in an accident, restraint up and out of the seatback.
always make sure the head restraints are adjust the head restraint height so that the
4 installed and properly positioned when center of the restraint is at your ear level
the seat is occupied. when seated. Any person too tall for the
 In order to minimize the risk of a neck restraint to reach their ear level when seated
injury due to a rear impact, the front seat- should raise the restraint to the highest locked
back must be adjusted to the upright posi- position.
tion and the head restraint to the proper
position before vehicle operation. The  To raise the restraint, pull it straight up.
driver should never adjust the seat while  To lower the restraint, push down on it
the vehicle is in motion. while pressing the lock knob (A) in the
 Never place a cushion or similar device on direction shown by the arrow.
the seatback. This can adversely affect
 After adjusting the height, push down on
head restraint performance by increasing
the distance between your head and the
the restraint to make sure it is locked in
restraint. position. WARNING
 To help minimize the risk of neck injury in
the event of an accident, the head
restraints must be properly installed and
positioned to proper height before vehicle
operation.

Seat belts
To install CAUTION WARNING

 The shape and size of the head restraint dif-  To help reduce the risk of injury or death
First check that the head restraint is facing in fers according to the seat. Always use the in an accident, seat belts and child
the right direction as shown in the previous correct head restraint provided for the seat restraint systems must always be used.
illustration, and then insert it into the seat- and do not install the head restraint in the Refer to “Child restraint systems” on page
back. Push the head restraint down while wrong direction. 4-13 for additional information.
pressing the lock knob (A) until the restraint  Never use one seat belt for more than one
4
locks into place. person.
 Never carry more people in your vehicle
than there are seat belts.
CAUTION  Always adjust the seat belt for a snug fit.
 Check that the lock knob (A) is extended out  Always place the shoulder belt over your
as shown in the illustration. Then pull the shoulder and across your chest. Never put
head restraint up to make sure that it is it behind you or under your arm.
locked in place and will not come out of the
 Always wear the lap belt as low as possible
seatback.
across your hips, not around your waist.
 Never modify or alter the seat belts in
your vehicle.
 To reduce the risk to the driver of serious
Seat belts driver’s airbag, always properly wear the
seat belt and adjust the driver’s seat as far
N00406001481
back as possible while maintaining a posi-
Seat belts are installed in your vehicle to help
tion that still enables you to fully apply the
reduce the risk of injury to the driver and pas- pedals, easily control the steering wheel,
senger in the event of an accident. Always and safely operate the vehicle.
use the provided seat belts.
Carefully review the following information
for proper seat belt usage.

Seat belts
1. Occupants should always sit back in their
WARNING WARNING seats with their backs against the upright
 To reduce the risk to a front seat passen-  In the event of an accident, all seat belt
seatback. To reduce the risk of serious
ger of serious injury or death from a assemblies, including retractors and
deploying airbag, make sure the passenger attachment hardware, should be inspected
always wears the seat belt properly, by an authorized Mitsubishi Motors airbag, adjust the driver’s seat as far back
remains seated all the way back and dealer to determine whether replacement as possible while maintaining a position
4 upright in their seat, and moves the seat as is necessary. that still enables you to fully apply the
far back as possible. Refer to “Supplemen- pedals, easily control the steering wheel,
tal Restraint System (SRS) - airbag” on and safely operate the vehicle. The front
page 4-21 for additional information. Seat belt instructions passenger seat should also be moved as
N00406200460
 Never hold an infant or child in your arms far back as possible. Refer to “Supple-
or on your lap when riding in this vehicle All seats are equipped with a seat belt which mental Restraint System (SRS) - airbag”
even when you are wearing your seat belt. uses one combined lap-and-shoulder belt with on page 4-21. Also refer to “To adjust the
Never place any part of the seat belt you an emergency locking retractor. seat forward or backward” on page 4-3.
are wearing around an infant or child.
Failure to follow these simple instructions This system is designed to provide both com-
creates a risk of serious injury or death to fort and safety. It permits full extension and
your child in the event of an accident or
automatic retraction of the belts during nor-
sudden stop.
mal vehicle operation. A sensing device
 Children 12 years old and under should
inside the belt retractor is designed to lock the
always ride in the rear seat and be prop-
erly restrained. This reduces their risk of retractor in the event of a sudden change in
serious injury or death in an accident, the vehicle’s motion.
especially due to a deploying front passen-
ger’s airbag. Refer to “Child restraint sys- NOTE
tems” on page 4-13 for additional
 For instructions on installing a child restraint
information.
system using a seat belt, refer to “Installing a
 Any child who is too small to properly child restraint system using the seat belt” on
wear a seat belt must be properly page 4-18.
restrained in an appropriate child
restraint system.
 Infants MUST be placed in a rear-facing
child safety seat and positioned in the rear
seat.

Seat belts
3. Pull the seat belt out slowly while holding
WARNING the latch plate. Push the latch plate into
 To reduce the risk of serious injury or
the buckle until you hear a “click”. Pull
death in the event of an accident or sud-
up on the belt to be sure the latch plate is
den stop, all seatbacks should be kept in
the upright position while the vehicle is in locked securely in the buckle.
motion.
Seat belt performance during an accident 4
can be adversely affected if the seatbacks
are reclined. The more a seatback is
reclined, the more likely seat belt perfor-
mance will be adversely affected. If the
seat belt is not properly positioned against
the body during an accident, there is NOTE
increased risk you will slide under the belt  With the exception of the seat belt for the
and receive serious injury or death. driver, the seat belts in all other seating posi-
tions are equipped with an Automatic Lock-
2. Grasp the latch plate and slide it up the ing Retractor (ALR) function. If you pull the
webbing so that it easily pulls across your NOTE seat belt fully out of the retractor, the retrac-
body. tor will switch to its ALR child restraint
 If the seat belt locks up and cannot be pulled
installation function (see page 4-18).
out, pull it once with force and let it retract
When the ALR function has been activated,
all the way.
the seat belt will only retract. If this happens,
Then, pull the belt out slowly once again.
let the belt fully retract, then pull the seat
belt back out, repeating steps 1 through 4.
4. The lap part of the belt must always be
worn low and snug across the hips. Pull
up on the shoulder portion of the belt to WARNING
take up any slack in the lap belt.  Be sure the lap belt portion fits snugly and
is worn as low as possible across the hips,
not around the waist. Failure to follow this
instruction will increase the risk of serious
injury or death in the event of an accident.

Seat belts
without the driver’s seat belt being fastened, a
WARNING warning light will come on and a tone will
 Be sure the seat belt webbing is not
sound for approximately 6 seconds to remind
twisted when worn. Twisted webbing may
you to fasten your seat belt.
adversely affect seat belt performance.
If the vehicle is driven with the seat belt still
5. To release the belt, press the button on the unfastened, the warning light will blink and
4 buckle and allow the belt to retract. the tone will sound intermittently until the
If the belt does not retract smoothly, pull it seat belt is fastened.
out and check for kinks or twists in the
webbing. Then make sure it remains WARNING
untwisted as it retracts.
 In order to reduce the risk of serious
injury or death in an accident, always fas- When the ignition switch is turned to the
Driver’s seat belt ten your own seat belt. Do not allow any- “ON” position or the operation mode is put in
one to ride in your vehicle unless he or she ON, this indicator normally comes on and
reminder/warning light is also seated and fastening a seat belt. goes off a few seconds later.
N00418400384 Children should additionally be restrained The light comes on when a person sits on the
A tone and warning light are used to remind in a secure child restraint system. front passenger seat but does not fasten the
the driver to fasten the seat belt. seat belt. It goes off when the seat belt is sub-
sequently fastened.
NOTE
 If the seat belt subsequently remains unfas-
tened, the warning light and the tone will WARNING
issue further warnings each time the vehicle  When a child booster seat is used on the
starts moving from a stop. front passenger seat, the front passenger
seat belt warning light will not come on, if
the seat belt is not fastened when the
booster seat is used. Confirm that the
Front passenger seat belt warn- child is wearing the seat belt properly.
ing light  Do not install any accessory or sticker that
N00418300237 makes the light difficult to see.
The front passenger seat belt warning light is
If the ignition switch is turned to the “ON” located at shown in the illustration.
position or the operation mode is put in ON

Seat belts
Adjustable seat belt shoulder WARNING Installation

anchor (front seats)  Adjust the shoulder belt anchor only when
1. Unfasten the button (A) of the seat belt
N00406300357
the vehicle is not in motion.
 Make sure the anchor is securely locked in guide strap. Put the seat belt webbing
The seat belt anchor height can be adjusted. position after adjusting it. through the seat belt guide strap and fas-
To move the anchor, pull the lock knob (A) ten the button.
and slide the anchor to the desired position. 4
Release the lock knob to lock the anchor into Seat belt guide strap (rear seat)
position. N00419301055
The seat belt guide straps are equipped on the

seatback.
The seat belt guide strap will provide comfort
by keeping away the belt webbing from your
neck.
CAUTION
 Make sure the part of the seat belt webbing
you inserted into the seat belt guide strap is
not twisted.
WARNING Twisted webbing may adversely affect seat
 Always adjust the shoulder belt anchor so belt performance.
that the shoulder belt is positioned across
the center of your shoulder without touch-
ing your neck. The shoulder belt should
not be able to fall off your shoulder. Fail-
ure to follow this instruction can adversely
affect seat belt performance and increase
the risk of serious injury or death in the
event of an accident.

Seat belt use during pregnancy

2. Fasten the seat belt and make sure it fits
snugly across your shoulder.
WARNING Seat belt pre-tensioner and
 The extender should only be used if the
existing belt is not long enough. Anyone
force limiter systems
N00417701752
who can use the standard seat belt should
not use an extender. Unnecessary use of an The driver’s and front passenger’s seats each
extender can adversely affect seat belt have a seat belt equipped with a pre-tensioner
4 performance in an accident. system and force limiter system.
 When not required, the extender must be
removed and stowed.
Pre-tensioner system
Seat belt use during preg- The driver and front passenger seat belts are
equipped with a seat belt pre-tensioner sys-
nancy tem. In a moderate-to-severe frontal or side
Seat belt extender N00406800147
collision or when a rollover or overturning of
N00406700205
Seat belts work for everyone, including preg- the vehicle is detected, the pre-tensioner sys-
If your seat belt is not long enough, even nant women. Like all occupants, pregnant tem operates simultaneously with the deploy-
when fully extended, a seat belt extender women are more likely to be seriously injured ment of the front airbags, side airbags or
must be obtained. The extender may be used or killed in an accident if they do not wear curtain airbags.
for either of the front seats. seat belts. The seat belt pre-tensioners are located within
the seat belt retractors (A). When activated,
WARNING the pre-tensioners quickly draw back seat belt
 To reduce the risk of serious injury or webbing and increase seat belt performance.
death to pregnant women and unborn
children in an accident, pregnant women
should always wear a seat belt. The lap
portion of the seat belt should be worn
snug and low across the hips and below
the rounding. Consult your doctor if you
have any additional questions or concerns.

Child restraint systems

the ignition switch or the operation mode is
under the following conditions. These include
WARNING
 The seat belt pre-tensioner system is
all of the items listed above and all related
designed to work only once. After the seat
wiring.
belt pre-tensioners have been activated,
[Except for vehicles equipped with the they will not work again. They must
F.A.S.T.-key] promptly be replaced and the entire seat
The ignition switch is in the “ON” or belt pre-tensioner system inspected by an 4
“START” position. authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer.
[Vehicles equipped with the F.A.S.T.-key]
The operation mode is in ON.
The seat belt pre-tensioners will operate

SRS warning light
The seat belt pre-tensioner system includes N00408700137
under the same conditions as the airbag con-
the following components: This warning light tells you if there is a prob-
trol unit.
lem involving the SRS airbags and/or the seat
When the seat belt pre-tensioners activate, belt pre-tensioner system. Refer to “SRS
some smoke is released and a loud noise will warning light” on page 4-27.
be heard. The smoke is not harmful, but care
should be taken not to intentionally inhale it,
Force limiter system
as it may cause some temporary irritation to
N00408900142
people with respiratory problems.
The pre-tensioners activate in the event of a In the event of an accident, the seat belt force
moderate-to-severe front or side impact, even limiter system will help reduce the force
if the seat belt is not being worn. The seat belt applied to the driver and front seat passenger.
pre-tensioners may not activate in certain col-
1- SRS warning light lisions, even though the vehicle may appear Child restraint systems
2- Front impact sensors to be severely damaged. Such non-activation N00407101753
3- Seat belt pre-tensioner does not mean that something is wrong with
When transporting infants or small children
4- Side impact sensors the seat belt pre-tensioner system, but rather
in your vehicle, an appropriate child restraint
5- Airbag control unit that the collision forces were not severe
system must always be used. This is required
enough to activate the system.
by law in the U.S. and Canada.
The airbag control unit monitors the readiness
of the electronic parts of the system whenever

Child restraint systems specifically designed  Children older than 1 year of age and who
for infants and small children are offered by weigh less than 40 pounds (18 kg) or who
WARNING
 Any child who is too large to use a child
several manufacturers. Choose only a child are less than 40 inches (100 cm) tall must
restraint system should ride in the rear
restraint system with a label certifying that it be in a forward-facing restraint used only
seat and wear the lap-and-shoulder belt
complies with Federal Motor Vehicle Safety in the rear seat. properly. The shoulder belt must be posi-
Standard 213 (FMVSS 213) or Motor Vehicle  Children who weigh more than 40 pounds tioned over the shoulder and across the
4 Restraint Systems and Booster Seats Safety (18 kg) or who are more than 40 inches chest, not across their neck, and with the
Regulations (RSSR). Look for the manufac- (100 cm) tall, regardless of age, should lap belt positioned low on the child’s hips,
turer’s statement of compliance on the box use a suitable child seat or a booster seat not across their stomach. If necessary, a
and child restraint system itself. in the rear seat until the vehicle’s lap-and- booster seat should be used to help achieve
shoulder belt fits them properly. a proper seat belt fit. Follow the booster
The child restraint system should be appropri- seat manufacturer’s instructions. Only use
ate for your child’s weight and height, and a booster seat that is certified as comply-
should properly fit your vehicle’s seat. WARNING ing with Federal Motor Vehicle Safety
For detailed information, refer to the instruc-  All children must be seated in the rear Standards or Motor Vehicle Restraint Sys-
seat, and properly restrained. tems and Booster Seats Safety Regula-
tion manual accompanying the child restraint
Accident statistics show that children of tions.
system.
all sizes and ages are safer when properly  Never hold an infant or child in your arms
restrained in the rear seat, rather than in or on your lap when riding in this vehicle,
Guidelines for child restraint the front seat. even when you are wearing your seat belt.
 Be sure to select a child restraint system Never place any part of the seat belt you
system selection that is appropriate not only for the child’s are wearing around an infant or child.
size and age but also for your vehicle. Failure to follow these simple instructions
All children should be properly restrained in Some child restraint systems may not fit creates a risk of serious injury or death to
a restraint device that offers the maximum your vehicle properly. your child in the event of an accident or
protection for their size and age. sudden stop.
Be sure to check local, state, or provincial
requirements for child size and age that may
vary from the recommendations listed below.
 Children less than 1 year old and who

weigh 22 pounds (10 kg) or less MUST
ride in a rear-facing child safety seat that
MUST ONLY be used in the rear seat.

Airbag WARNING
 It is important to use an approved rear-
facing infant restraint until the infant is
one year old (unless the infant outgrows
the seat sooner). This allows the infant’s
neck and spine to develop enough to sup-
port the weight of their head in the event 4
of an accident.
 When installing a child restraint system,
follow the instructions provided by the
manufacturer and follow the directions in
this manual. Failure to do so can result in
WARNING WARNING serious injury or death to your child in an
 Your vehicle is also equipped with a front  FRONT-FACING CHILD RESTRAINT accident or sudden stop.
passenger’s airbag. SYSTEMS should be used in the rear seat  After installation, push and pull the child
Never put REAR-FACING CHILD whenever possible. If one must be used in restraint system back and forth, and side
RESTRAINT SYSTEMS or INFANT the front passenger seat, move the seat to to side, to see that it is firmly secured. If
RESTRAINT SYSTEMS in the front pas- the most rearward position and make sure the child restraint system is not installed
senger seat. This places the infant too the child stays in the child restraint sys- securely, it may cause injury to the child
close to the passenger’s airbag. During tem, properly restrained. Failure to follow or other occupants in the event of an acci-
deployment of that airbag, the infant can these instructions could result in serious dent or sudden stop.
be seriously injured or killed. Rear-facing injury or death to the child.  When not in use, keep your child restraint
child restraint systems or infant restraint system secured with the seat belt, or
systems must only be used in the rear seat. remove it from the vehicle, in order to pre-
vent it from being thrown around inside
the vehicle during an accident.

NOTE Installing a child restraint sys- Tether anchor locations

 Before purchasing a child restraint system, tem using the LATCH (Lower N00418901230
try installing it in the rear seat to ensure Your vehicle has 3 attachment points on the
proper fit. Due to the location of the seat belt Anchors and Tethers for chil- rear shelf, located behind the top of your rear
buckles and the shape of the seat cushion, it dren) system seat. These are for securing a child restraint
may be difficult to securely install some
4 manufacturer’s child restraint systems.
N00418801183 system tether strap to each of the 3 rear seat-
ing positions in your vehicle.
If the child restraint system can be pulled
forward or to either side easily on the seat
Lower anchor locations
cushion after the seat belt has been tightened,
The outboard seating positions in the rear seat
choose another manufacturer’s child restraint
system.
of your vehicle are equipped with lower
Depending on the seating position in the anchors for attaching child restraint systems
vehicle and the child restraint system that compatible with the LATCH system.
you have, the child restraint system can be
attached using one of the following 2 meth-
ods:
• Attach to the lower anchorage in the rear
seat ONLY if the child restraint system is
compatible with the LATCH system (See
page 4-16).
• Attach to the seat belt (See page 4-18).


3. Push the anchor connectors (D) on the
Examples of child restraint sys- NOTE
child restraint system into the lower
tems compatible with the LATCH anchors (C) in accordance with the  In order to secure a child restraint system
system compatible with the LATCH system, you
instructions provided by the child restraint
must use the lower anchor points in the out-
N00419000202 system manufacturer. board positions of the rear seat. To secure a
Remember, the lower anchors provided child restraint system in the center position
with your vehicle are designed to secure of the rear seat, you must use the vehicle’s 4
suitable child restraint systems compat- center seat belt.
ible with the LATCH system in the out-
board positions of the rear seat only.
The anchor connectors are NOT WARNING
designed to secure a suitable child  If there is any foreign material in or
restraint system in the center position around the lower anchors, remove it
of the rear seat. before installing the child restraint sys-
tem. Also, make sure the seat belt is away
from, not looped through or otherwise
A- Rear-facing child restraint system interfering with, the child restraint sys-
B- Front-facing child restraint system tem. If foreign matter is not removed
C- Child restraint system lower anchor and/or the seat belt interferes with the
connectors child restraint system, the child restraint
D- Tether strap system will not be secured properly, could
(These are only examples.) detach and move forward in the event of
sudden braking or an accident, and could
result in injury to the child or other vehi-
cle occupants.
Using the LATCH system
 When the vehicle is moving, do not adjust
N00419101297
A- Vehicle seat cushion the seat where the child restraint system is
1. In order to securely fasten the tether strap, B- Vehicle seatback installed.
remove the head restraint from the loca- C- Lower anchor
tion where you wish to install the child D- Connector
restraint system. 4. Open the cover for the tether anchor by
2. Open the gap a little between the seat pulling it back with your hand as illus-
cushion (A) and the seatback (B) with trated below (4).
your hand to locate the lower anchors (C).


5. Latch the tether strap hook (E) of the child
restraint system to the anchor (F) as illus-
Installing a child restraint sys- WARNING
trated below (5) and tighten the top tether tem using the seat belt (with  When you install a child restraint system
using the seat belt, always make sure the
strap so it is securely fastened. emergency/automatic locking retractor has been switched to the ALR
mechanism) child restraint installation function. The
ALR function will keep the child restraint
4 N00407301540
system tightly secured to the seat.
With the exception of the driver, the seat belt
Failure to convert the retractor to the
in all other seating positions can be converted ALR function may allow the child
from normal Emergency Locking Retractor restraint system to move forward during
(ELR) mode, to Automatic Locking Retractor sudden braking or an accident, resulting
(ALR) mode. This means that when you pull in serious injury or death to the child or
the seat belt fully out of the retractor, the other occupants.
retractor will switch to its ALR child restraint
installation function. Always use the ALR
6. Push and pull the child restraint system in child restraint installation function when you
all directions to ensure it is firmly install a child restraint system using the seat
secured. belt.
WARNING Children 12 years old and under should

always be restrained in the rear seat, when-
 Child restraint system tether anchors are
designed only to withstand loads from cor- ever possible, although the front passenger
rectly fitted child restraint systems. Under seat belt can also be converted to ALR mode.
no circumstances are they to be used for
adult seat belts, harnesses, or for attach-
ing other items or equipment to the vehi-
cle.


3. To activate the ALR child restraint instal-
WARNING Installation
lation function, slowly pull the shoulder
 Never remove the buckle (A) for the rear
1. Place the child restraint system on the seat part of the belt all the way out of the
center seat from the rubber belt (B). If the
where you wish to install it. retractor until it stops. Then let the belt
buckle is detached from the rubber belt,
the ALR mode may become deactivated To help assure proper fitting of the child feed back into the retractor.
and a child restraint system used in the restraint system, always remove the head
rear center seat position may not be restraint. 4
secured, resulting in serious injury or 2. Route the seat belt through the child
death to a child using the child restraint restraint system according to the instruc-
system and/or other occupants. Always tions provided by the child restraint sys-
make sure that the buckle is passed under
tem’s manufacturer. Then insert the seat
the rubber belt as shown in the illustration
below.
belt latch plate into the buckle. Make sure
you hear a “click” when you insert the
latch plate into the buckle.
4. After the belt has retracted, tug on it.

If the belt is in the ALR function, you will
not be able to pull it out. If the webbing
can be pulled out from retractor, the ALR
function has not been activated and you
will need to repeat steps 3 and 4.


5. After confirming that the belt is locked, 7. Latch the tether strap hook (A) of the 9. To remove a child restraint system from
grab the shoulder part of the belt near the child restraint system to the tether anchor the vehicle and deactivate the ALR mode,
buckle and pull up to remove any slack (B) as illustrated below (7) and tighten the remove the child from the restraint.
from the lap part of the belt allowing the top tether strap so it is securely fastened. Unlatch the buckle. Then remove the belt
slack to feed into the retractor. Remember, from the restraint and let the belt fully
if the lap belt portion is not tight, the child retract.
4 restraint system will not be secure. It may 10. Reinstall the head restraint.
help to put your weight on the child Refer to “Head restraints” on page 4-5.
restraint system and/or push on its seat-
back while pulling up on the belt (See
Children who have outgrown
illustration).
child restraint systems
N00407601686
Children who have outgrown a child restraint

system should be seated in the rear seat and
wear the seat belt. If the shoulder belt crosses
WARNING their face or neck, and/or the lap belt crosses
 Child restraint system tether anchors are their stomach, a commercially available
designed only to withstand loads from cor- booster seat must be used to raise the child so
rectly fitted child restraint systems. Under that the shoulder belt crosses their shoulder
no circumstances are they to be used for
and the lap belt remains positioned low
adult seat belts, harnesses, or for attach-
ing other items or equipment to the vehi-
across their hips. The booster seat should fit
If your child restraint system requires the use cle. the vehicle seat and have a label certifying
of a tether strap, fasten the tether strap in compliance with Federal Motor Vehicle
accordance with the following procedures. Safety Standards or Motor Vehicle Restraint
8. Before putting your child in the restraint,
Systems and Booster Seats Safety Regula-
push and pull the restraint in all directions
6. Open the cover from the tether anchor tions.
to be sure it is firmly secure. Do this
installation point by pulling it back with before each use. If the child restraint sys-
your hand as illustrated below (6). tem is not firmly secure, repeat steps 1
through 7.

Maintenance and inspection of seat belts

Regularly check your seat belt buckles and The SRS front airbags are designed to supple-
WARNING their release mechanisms for positive engage- ment the primary protection of the driver and
 Any child who is too small to properly
ment and release of the latch plate. Check the front passenger seat belt systems by provid-
wear a seat belt must be properly
retractors for automatic locking when in the ing those occupants with protection against
restrained in an appropriate child
restraint system, to reduce their risk of Automatic Locking Retractor function. head and chest injuries in certain moderate to
serious injury or death in an accident. severe frontal collisions. The SRS front air-
 A child should never be left unattended in,
The entire seat belt assembly should be bags, together with sensors at the front of the 4
or unsupervised around, your vehicle.
replaced if the webbing shows any obvious vehicle and sensors attached to the front
When you leave the vehicle, always take cuts, tears, increase in thickness in any sec- seats, form an advanced airbag system.
the child out as well. tion of the webbing from broken fibers, or
 Children can die from heat stroke if left or severe fading from sunlight. All of these con- The SRS driver’s knee airbag is designed to
trapped inside the vehicle, especially on ditions indicate a weakening of the belt, supplement the primary protection of the
hot days. which may adversely affect seat belt perfor- driver’s seat belt system. It can reduce the
 Keep your vehicle locked and the trunk lid mance in an accident. forward movement of the driver’s lower legs
closed when not in use. Keep your vehicle and provide increased overall body protection
keys away from children. in certain moderate to severe frontal colli-
 Never allow children to play in the trunk
WARNING
 Do not attempt to repair or replace any
sions.
of your vehicle.
part of the seat belt assemblies. This work
The SRS side airbags and the curtain airbags
should be done by an authorized
Mitsubishi Motors dealer. Failure to have are also designed to supplement the seat belts.
Maintenance and inspection an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer The SRS side airbags provide the driver and
perform the work could reduce the effec- front passenger with protection against chest
of seat belts tiveness of the belts and could result in a injuries by deploying the bag on the side
N00407000364
serious injury or death in an accident. impacted in moderate to severe side impact
The seat belt webbing may be cleaned with collisions. The SRS curtain airbags provide
mild soap or detergent solution. Do not use an the driver and passengers on the front seat
organic solvent. Allow the belts to dry in the Supplemental Restraint Sys- and rear outboard seat with protection against
shade. Do not allow them to retract until com- head injuries by deploying the curtain airbag
pletely dry. Do not attempt to bleach or re- tem (SRS) - airbag on the side impacted in moderate to severe
dye the belts. The color may rub off and the N00407701850
side impact collisions and by deploying both
webbing strength may be affected. This vehicle is equipped with a Supplemental curtain airbags when a rollover is detected.
Restraint System (SRS), which includes air- The curtain airbags are also designed to help
bags for the driver and passengers. reduce the risk of complete and partial ejec-

Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) - airbag

tion from the vehicle through side windows
in both side impact and rollover type acci-
WARNING WARNING
• Seat belts reduce the risk of injury in • To reduce the risk to the front passenger
dents.
rear impact collisions, and in lower- of serious injury or death from a deploy-
The SRS airbags are NOT a substitute for use speed frontal collisions because the air- ing passenger’s airbag, make sure the
bags are not designed to inflate in those passenger always wears the seat belt
of the seat belts. For maximum protection in
situations. properly, remains seated upright and all
4 all types of accidents, seat belts must
• Seat belts reduce the risk of being the way back in the seat, and positions
ALWAYS be worn by everyone who drives or thrown from your vehicle in a collision or the seat as far back as possible.
rides in this vehicle (with infants and small rollover. • Seat all infants and children in the rear
children in an appropriate child restraint sys-  IT IS VERY IMPORTANT TO BE PROP- seat, properly restrained in an appropri-
tem in the rear seat, and older children buck- ERLY SEATED. ate child restraint system.
led in the rear seat). Refer to “Child restraint • A driver or front passenger sitting too  Airbags inflate very quickly and with
systems” on page 4-13. close to the steering wheel or instrument great force. Do not sit on the edge of the
panel during airbag deployment can be seat or sit with your lower legs too close to
seriously injured or killed. the instrument panel, or lean your head or
WARNING chest close to the steering wheel or the
• Airbags inflate very quickly and with
 IT IS VERY IMPORTANT TO ALWAYS instrument panel.
great force. If the driver and front pas-
WEAR YOUR SEAT BELT PROPERLY  Do not put your feet or legs on or against
senger are not properly seated and
EVEN WITH AN AIRBAG.
restrained, the airbag may not provide the instrument panel.
• Seat belts help keep the driver and pas- the proper protection, and can cause
sengers properly positioned. This
serious injuries or death when it inflates.
reduces the risk of injury in all collisions,
• To reduce the risk to the driver of serious
and reduces the risk of serious injuries or
injury or death due to a deploying
death when the airbags inflate.
driver’s airbag, always properly wear
During sudden braking just before a col-
your seat belt and adjust the driver’s seat
lision, an unrestrained or improperly
as far back as possible, maintaining a
restrained driver or passengers can move
position that still allows the driver to
forward into direct contact with, or
have good control of the steering wheel,
within close proximity to, the airbag
brake, accelerator, and other vehicle con-
when it begins to inflate.
trols.
The beginning stage of airbag inflation is
the most forceful and can cause serious
injuries or death if the occupant comes in
contact with the airbag at this time.

WARNING WARNING WARNING

 Infants and small children should never  NEVER put REAR-FACING CHILD  FRONT-FACING CHILD RESTRAINT
ride unrestrained, or lean against the RESTRAINT SYSTEMS or INFANT SYSTEMS should be used in the rear seat
instrument panel. They should never ride RESTRAINT SYSTEMS in the front pas- whenever possible. If they must be used in
held in your arms or on your lap. They senger seat. This places the infant too the front passenger seat, move the seat to
can be seriously injured or killed in an close to the passenger’s airbag. During the most rearward position and make sure
accident, especially when the airbags deployment of that airbag, the infant can the child stays in the child restraint sys- 4
inflate. Seat all infants and children in the be seriously injured or killed. tem, properly restrained. Failure to follow
rear seat, properly restrained in an appro- Rear-facing child restraint systems or these instructions could result in serious
priate child restraint system. Refer to infant restraint systems must only be used injury or death to the child.
“Child restraint systems” on page 4-13. in the rear seat.
Airbag
WARNING
 Older children should be seated in the
rear seat with their seat belt properly
worn, and with an appropriate booster
seat if needed.
Refer to “Children who have outgrown
child restraint systems” on page 4-20.


When the impact sensors detect a sufficient
How the Supplemental front or side impact to deploy the airbag(s),
Restraint System works the appropriate airbag(s) will be deployed.
N00407801587
The SRS includes the following components: When the airbag control unit detects rollover
of the vehicle, curtain airbags will be
4 deployed.
When airbags deploy, some smoke is released

accompanied by a loud noise. The smoke is
not harmful, but do not intentionally inhale
10- Front impact sensors the smoke as it may cause temporary irrita-
11- Side impact sensors tion to people with respiratory problems.
12- Curtain airbag modules
An inflated airbag will deflate quickly, so you
may not even notice that the airbag was
The airbag control unit monitors the readiness inflated.
1- Airbag module (Driver) of the electronic parts of the system whenever Airbag inflation does not prevent the driver
2- Passenger’s airbag off indicator the ignition switch or the operation mode is from seeing or being able to steer the vehicle,
3- SRS warning light under the following conditions. These include and does not prevent people from leaving the
4- Airbag module (Passenger) all of the items listed above and all related vehicle.
5- Side airbag modules wiring.
6- Driver’s seat position sensor [Except for vehicles equipped with the
7- Passenger’s seat occupant classifica- F.A.S.T.-key] CAUTION
The ignition switch is in the “ON” or  Airbags inflate very quickly and with great
tion sensor system
“START” position. force. In certain situations, contact with an
8- Airbag module (Driver’s knee) inflating airbag may cause small cuts, abra-
9- Airbag control unit [Vehicles equipped with the F.A.S.T.-key]
sions, and bruises.
The airbags will operate under the same con-

ditions as the airbag control unit. Event Data Recording
N00418600256
This vehicle is equipped with an event data

recorder (EDR).

The main purpose of an EDR is to record, in “SRS warning light” on page 4-27.
certain crash or near crash-like situations,
NOTE
 EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only
such as an airbag deployment or hitting a WARNING
if a non-trivial crash situation occurs; no data
road obstacle, data that will assist in under-  If the SRS warning light comes on, have
are recorded by the EDR under normal driv-
standing how a vehicle’s systems performed. ing conditions and no personal data (e.g., the vehicle inspected by an authorized
The EDR is designed to record data related to name, gender, age, and crash location) are Mitsubishi Motors dealer as soon as possi-
vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a recorded. However, other parties, such as ble. 4
short period of time, typically 30 seconds or law enforcement, could combine the EDR  Please observe the following instructions
less. data with the type of personally identifying to ensure that the driver’s seat position
data routinely acquired during a crash inves- sensor can operate correctly.
The EDR in this vehicle is designed to record tigation. • Adjust the seat to the correct position,
such data as: and sit well back against the seatback.
To read data recorded by an EDR, special Refer to “Front seats” on page 4-2.
 How various systems in your vehicle were • Do not recline the seatback more than
equipment is required, and access to the vehi-
operating; necessary when driving.
cle or the EDR is needed. In addition to the
 Whether or not the driver and front pas- • Do not place metallic objects or luggage
vehicle manufacturer, other parties, such as
senger safety belts were buckled/fastened; under the front seat.
law enforcement, that have the special equip-
 How far (if at all) the driver was depress-  If the vehicle is involved in a severe
ment, can read the information if they have
ing the accelerator and/or brake pedal; impact, have the SRS sensor inspected by
access to the vehicle or the EDR. an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer as
and,
 How fast the vehicle was traveling. soon as possible.
Driver’s seat position sensor
These data can help provide a better under- N00417900223
standing of the circumstances in which The driver’s seat position sensor is attached Passenger’s seat occupant clas-
crashes and injuries occur. to the seat rail and provides the airbag control sification sensor system
unit with information on the seat’s fore-aft N00418000364
position. The airbag control unit controls The passenger’s seat occupant classification
deployment of the driver’s front airbag in sensor system is attached to the front passen-
accordance with the information it receives ger seat cushion and provides the airbag con-
from this sensor. trol unit with information regarding the
If there is a problem involving the driver’s occupant on the front passenger seat. The air-
seat position sensor, the SRS warning light in bag control unit controls deployment of the
the instrument panel will come on. Refer to

passenger’s front airbag in accordance with
the information it receives from this system.
WARNING WARNING
• The SRS warning light comes on while • If any liquid is spilled on the seat, wipe it
The passenger’s front airbag will not deploy
you are driving. and dry the seat immediately.
in an impact when the system senses no occu-
 To ensure that the passenger’s seat occu-  If the vehicle is involved in a severe
pant on the front passenger seat or a child in a
pant classification sensor system can sense impact, have the SRS sensors inspected by
child restraint system. In this case, the pas-
4 senger’s airbag off indicator will illuminate.
correctly, observe the following instruc-
tions. Failure to follow these instructions
an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer as
soon as possible.
Refer to “Passenger’s airbag off indicator” on can adversely affect the performance of
page 4-26. the passenger’s airbag system.
If there is a problem involving the passen- • Adjust the seat to the correct position,
Passenger’s airbag off indicator
ger’s seat occupant classification sensor sys- and sit well back against the seatback. N00418101359
tem, the SRS warning light in the instrument Refer to “Front seats” on page 4-2. The passenger’s airbag off indicator is
panel will come on. • Do not recline the seatback more than located at shown in the illustration.
Refer to “SRS warning light” page 4-27. necessary.
• Never have more than one person (adult
or child) sitting on the seat.
WARNING • Do not place anything between the seat
 If any of the following conditions occur, and the floor console.
you should immediately have your vehicle • When attaching a child restraint system,
inspected by an authorized Mitsubishi secure it firmly.
Motors dealer as soon as possible:
• Do not place luggage or other objects on
• The SRS warning light does not initially the seat.
come on when the ignition switch or the
• Do not use a seat cover or a cushion.
operation mode is under the following
• Do not modify or replace the seat and
conditions.
seat belt.
• [Except for vehicles equipped with the
• Do not place luggage or other objects
F.A.S.T.-key] The indicator normally comes on when the
under the seat.
The ignition switch is in the “ON” or ignition switch is turned to the “ON” position
“START” position. • Do not place and use an electronic device
such as a computer on the seat. or the operation mode is put in ON, and goes
• Do not place heavy objects on the seat or out a few seconds later. In the following situ-
stick pins, needles, or other objects into ations, the indicator will stay on to show that
• The SRS warning light does not go out
after several seconds. it. the passenger front airbag is not operational.
• Do not remove the seat cushion skin.
 The front passenger seat is not occupied.

 The system senses that a child is using a If there is a problem involving one or more of
child restraint system on the front passen-
WARNING the SRS components, the warning light will
 Do not attach any accessory to your vehi-
ger seat. come on and stay on.
cle that makes the passenger’s airbag off
The SRS warning light is shared by the SRS
indicator difficult or impossible to see.
When the passenger’s seat occupant classifi- airbag and the seat belt pre-tensioner system.
You must be able to see the passenger’s
cation sensor system senses there is a person airbag off indicator and verify the status
seated in the front passenger seat, the indica- of the passenger’s airbag system. WARNING 4
tor goes out to show that the passenger’s front
 If any of the following conditions occur,
airbag is operational.
SRS warning light there may be a problem with the SRS air-
bags and/or seat belt pre-tensioners, and
N00408300579
WARNING they may not function properly in a colli-
There is a Supplemental Restraint System sion or may suddenly activate without a
 If any of the following conditions occur,
you should immediately have the airbag (SRS) warning light on the instrument panel. collision:
system in your vehicle inspected by an • Even when the ignition switch or the
authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer as operation mode is in ON, the SRS warn-
soon as possible: ing light does not come on or it remains
• The passenger’s airbag off indicator on.
comes on when an adult is sitting on the • The SRS warning light comes on while
front passenger seat. driving.
• The passenger’s airbag off indicator does The SRS airbags and seat belt pre-ten-
not come on when the front passenger sioners are designed to help reduce the
seat is not occupied. risk of serious injury or death in certain
• The passenger’s airbag off indicator does collisions. If either of the above conditions
not come on when the ignition switch is occurs, immediately have your vehicle
turned to the “ON” position or the oper- checked by an authorized Mitsubishi
ation mode is put in ON. Motors dealer.
The system checks itself every time the igni-
• The passenger’s airbag off indicator does
not come on when a child is in a child
tion switch is turned to the “ON” position or
restraint system on the front passenger the operation mode is put in ON. The SRS Driver’s and passenger’s front
seat. warning light will come on for several sec-
onds and then go out. This is normal and airbag system
• The passenger’s airbag off indicator
N00407900321
comes on and goes out repeatedly. means the system is working properly.
The driver’s airbag is located under the pad-
ded cover in the middle of the steering wheel.

The front passenger’s airbag is contained in
the instrument panel above the glove com-
partment. The driver’s airbag and the front
passenger’s airbag are designed to deploy at
the same time. However, the front passen-
ger’s airbag does not deploy when the front
4 passenger seat is not occupied or when the
system senses that a child is in the child
restraint system.
Driver
Front passenger
Driver’s knee airbag system

N00404500036
The driver’s knee airbag is located under the

steering wheel. The driver’s knee airbag is
designed to deploy at the same time as the
driver’s front airbag.

Deployment of front airbags

N00408001658
The front airbags and driver’s knee airbag ARE DESIGNED TO DEPLOY when …
Head-on collision with a solid wall at speeds Moderate to severe frontal impact within the shaded 4
of approx. 15 mph (25 km/h) or higher area between the arrows
The front airbags and driver’s knee airbag are The front airbags and driver’s knee airbag another stationary vehicle, a pole or a guard
designed to deploy when the vehicle suffers a will deploy if the impact to the vehicle’s main rail).
moderate to severe frontal impact. A typical structure is above a specific threshold level. The initial stage of airbag inflation is the
condition is shown in the illustration to the The threshold level is approximately 15 mph most forceful, and can cause serious injury or
left. (25 km/h) for a frontal collision straight into a death if you are too close to the deploying air-
solid flat wall that does not bend or deform. If bag. Accordingly, it is important that you
The front airbags and driver’s knee airbag are the impact to the vehicle’s main structure is always wear the available seat belt.
designed to deploy only in certain moderate below this threshold level, the front airbags
to severe frontal collisions within the shaded and driver’s knee airbag may not deploy. This
area between the arrows in the illustration to threshold level may also be higher if the vehi-
the right. cle hits something that absorbs the impact,
either by bending or moving (for example,


they cannot provide protection to the occu-
The front airbags and driver’s Collision with a utility pole, tree or other narrow
pants.
knee airbag MAY NOT DEPLOY object
Some typical situations are shown in the
when … illustration.
In certain types of front collisions, the front Since the front airbags and driver’s knee air-
4 airbags and driver’s knee airbag may not bag do not protect the occupants in all types
deploy, even if the deformation of the body of collisions, be sure to always wear the your
Collision where the vehicle slides under the
seems to be large, because the vehicle’s body seat belts properly.
rear body of a truck
structure is designed to absorb the impact and
deform in order to help protect the occupants. Rear end collision to your vehicle
Some typical situations where the front air-
bags and driver’s knee airbag may not deploy
are shown in the illustrations.
Oblique frontal impact
Since the front airbags and driver’s knee air-
bag do not protect the occupant in all types of Side collision to your vehicle
frontal collisions, be sure to always wear your
seat belts properly.
The front airbags and driver’s Vehicle rolls onto its side or roof
knee airbag ARE NOT
DESIGNED TO DEPLOY when
…
The front airbags and driver’s knee airbag are

not designed to deploy in situations where

The front airbags and driver’s Collision with an elevated median/island or

knee airbag MAY DEPLOY when curb
…
The front airbags and driver’s knee airbag

may deploy if the underside of the vehicle 4
suffers a moderate to severe impact (under- Vehicle travels over a deep hole/pothole
carriage impact). Some typical situations are
shown in the illustration.
Since the front airbags and driver’s knee air-

bag may deploy in certain types of unex- WARNING
pected impacts, as shown in the illustrations,  Do not attach accessories to, or put them
and these unexpected impacts can move you Vehicle drives down a steep slope and hits the in front of, the windshield. They could
ground restrict the airbag inflation, or strike and
out of position, it is important to always wear
your seat belts properly. When worn properly, injure an occupant, when the airbag
seat belts can help maintain your distance inflates.
from the airbags when they begin to inflate.  Do not attach additional keys or accesso-
ries (hard, pointed or heavy objects) to the
The initial stage of airbag inflation is the
ignition key. Such objects could prevent
most forceful and can cause serious injury or the driver’s knee airbag from inflating
death if you are close to the deploying airbag. normally or could be propelled to cause
serious injury if the airbag inflates.
WARNING  Do not attach accessories to the lower por-
 Do not attach anything to the steering tion of the driver’s side instrument panel.
wheel’s padded cover, such as trim mate- Such objects could prevent the driver’s
rial, badges, etc. These could strike and knee airbag from inflating normally or
injure an occupant if the airbag inflates. could be propelled to cause serious injury
 Do not set anything on, or attach anything if the airbag inflates.
to, the instrument panel above the glove
compartment. Such items could strike and
injure an occupant if the airbag inflates.

Side airbag system Curtain airbag system

N00408100421 N00419201302
The side airbags (A) are contained in the The curtain airbags are contained in the front
driver and front passenger seatbacks. pillars and roof side rail.
The side airbag is designed to inflate only on The curtain airbag is designed to inflate only
4 the side of the vehicle that is impacted, even on the side of the vehicle that is impacted,
with no passenger in the front seat. even with no passenger in the seat.
Also, when the airbag control unit detects
rollover of the vehicle, the curtain airbags
will deploy.
WARNING
 Do not attempt to remove, install, disas-
semble or repair the SRS airbags.
 Do not place objects, such as packages or
pets, between the airbags and the driver
or the front passenger. Such objects can
adversely affect airbag performance, or
cause serious injury or death when the
airbag deploys. A label is attached to the seatbacks in vehi-
 Immediately after airbag inflation, some cles equipped with side airbags.
parts of the airbag system will be hot. Do
not touch them. You could otherwise be
burned. WARNING
 The airbag system is designed to work  The side airbags and curtain airbags can
only once. After the airbags deploy, they cause serious injury or death to anyone
will not work again. They must promptly too close to the airbag when it deploys. To
be replaced and the entire airbag system reduce the risk of injury from a deploying
must be inspected by an authorized side airbag and curtain airbag, all occu-
Mitsubishi Motors dealer. pants must be properly restrained and
seated well back, upright, and in the mid-
dle of the seat. Do not lean against the
door.

WARNING WARNING
 Do not attach a microphone (A) or any  Never install a rear-facing child restraint
other object around the part where the system in the front passenger seat. Rear-
curtain airbag deploys, such as on the facing child restraint systems MUST
windshield, side door glass or front and ONLY be used in the rear seat.
rear pillars and roof side rail. When the
curtain airbag inflates, the microphone or
 Front-facing child restraint systems
should also be used ONLY in the rear seat.
4
other object may be hurled with great If a front-facing child restraint system
force or the curtain airbag may not inflate must be used in the front passenger seat,
correctly, resulting in death or serious move the seat as far back as possible, and
injury. make sure that the child stays in the child
restraint system, properly restrained and
WARNING away from the door.
 In order to reduce the risk of injury from  Do not allow a child to lean against or sit
a deploying side airbag, do not allow any close to the passenger door, even if the
rear seat passengers to hold onto the back child is seated in a child restraint system.
of either front seat. Special care should be The child’s head should also not lean
taken with children. against or be close to the section of the
 Do not place any objects around the area seatback where the side airbag and cur-
where the side airbags deploy. Such tain airbag are located. It is dangerous if
objects can interfere with proper side air- the side airbag or curtain airbag deploys.
bag deployment, and cause injury during Failure to follow all of these instructions
deployment of the side airbag. could lead to serious injury or death to the
 Do not place stickers, labels or additional child.
trim on the back of either front seat. They  Work done on or in the vicinity of the side
can interfere with proper side airbag WARNING airbag or curtain airbag components
deployment.  Do not install seat covers or re-cover seats should be done only by an authorized
that have side airbags. Covers can inter- Mitsubishi Motors dealer. There is a risk
fere with proper side airbag deployment of a serious injury or death. Improper
and adversely affect side airbag perfor- work methods can cause accidental side
mance. airbag or curtain airbag deployment, or
render a side airbag or curtain airbag
inoperable. Either of these situations
could result in serious injury or death.


The seat belts in your vehicle are your pri-
Deployment of side airbag and mary means of protection in an accident. The Side impact in an area away from the passenger
curtain airbag SRS side airbags and curtain airbags are
compartment
N00408201588 designed to provide additional protection.
Therefore, for your safety and the safety of all
The side airbag and curtain airbag occupants, be sure to always wear your seat
4 ARE DESIGNED TO DEPLOY belts properly.
when...
Motorcycle or other similar small vehicle colli-
The side airbag and curtain airbag sion with the side of vehicle
The side airbag and curtain airbag are MAY NOT DEPLOY when...
designed to deploy when the vehicle suffers a
moderate to severe side impact to the middle In certain types of side collisions, the side air-
of the passenger compartment. bag and curtain airbag may not deploy, even
Also when the vehicle detects rollover of the if the deformation of the body seems to be
vehicle, the curtain air bags will deploy. large, because the vehicle’s body structure is Collision with a utility pole, tree or other narrow
Typical situations are shown in the illustra- designed to absorb the impact and to deform object
tion. in order to help protect the occupants. There
are also cases where the side airbag and cur-
Moderate to severe impact to the middle of the tain airbag may not deploy at the same time,
vehicle body’s side structure depending on the location of the impact.
Some typical situations where the side air-
bags and curtain airbags may not deploy are
shown in the illustrations on the following
page.
Since the side airbags and curtain airbags do

When the vehicle detects rollover of the vehicle
not protect the occupant in all types of side
(Curtain airbag only)
collisions, be sure to always wear the seat
belts properly.

Oblique side impact Head-on collision SRS servicing

N00408501741
WARNING
 Any maintenance performed on or near
the components of the SRS should be per-
formed only by an authorized Mitsubishi
4
Rear end collision to your vehicle
Motors dealer. Do not permit anyone else
Vehicle rolls onto its side or roof (Side airbag to do any service, inspection, maintenance
only) or repair on any SRS components or wir-
ing. Similarly, no part of the SRS should
ever be handled, removed or disposed by
anyone except an authorized Mitsubishi
Pitch end over end Motors dealer.
Improper work methods on the SRS com-
ponents or wiring could result in an acci-
dental airbag deployment or could make
The side airbag and curtain airbag the SRS inoperable. Either of these situa-
ARE NOT DESIGNED TO tions could result in serious injury or
death.
DEPLOY when...
 Do not modify your steering wheel or any
other SRS component or related vehicle
The side airbag and curtain airbag are not part. For example, replacement of the
designed to deploy in situations where they steering wheel, or modifications to the
cannot provide protection to the occupants. front bumper or body structure can
Some typical situations are shown in the adversely affect SRS performance and
illustration. may lead to injury.
 If your vehicle has received any damage,
Since the side airbags and curtain airbags do you should have the SRS inspected by an
not protect the occupant in all types of colli- authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer to
sions, be sure to always wear your seat belts make sure it is in proper working order.
properly.

WARNING NOTE Warning label

 Do not modify your front seats, center pil- • Steering wheel N00408600383
lar or center console. Such modifications • Instrument panel Occupant restraint warning labels for the SRS
can adversely affect SRS performance and are located in the vehicle as shown in the
may lead to injury. [For vehicles sold in U.S.A.] illustration.
Also, if you discover any tear or open
4 seam in the seat fabric near the side air-
To contact Mitsubishi Motors
bag, have the seat inspected by an autho-
North America, Inc.
rized Mitsubishi Motors dealer. call 1-888-648-7820 or write to:
 If you have found any scratch, crack or Mitsubishi Motors North Amer-
damage to the portion of the front and
ica, Inc.
rear pillars and roof side rail, you should
have the SRS inspected by an authorized Customer Relations Depart-
Mitsubishi Motors dealer. ment
P.O. Box 6400
Cypress, CA 90630-0064
NOTE
 When you transfer ownership of the vehicle
to another person, we urge you to alert the [For vehicles sold in Canada]
new owner that it is equipped with the SRS To contact Mitsubishi Motor Sales
and refer that owner to the applicable sec- of Canada, Inc.
tions in this owner’s manual.
call 1-888-576-4878 or write to:
 If you decide to junk or scrap your vehicle,
we urge you to first take it to an authorized Mitsubishi Motor Sales of Can-
Mitsubishi Motors dealer so that the SRS can ada, Inc.
be made safe for disposal. Customer Relations Depart-
 If any of the following parts needs to be
modified for use by a handicapped person,
ment
the advanced airbag system will be greatly P.O. Box 41009
affected. Please consult an authorized 4141 Dixie Road * - Located in the passenger’s side as well.
Mississauga, ON L4W 5C9
• Driver’s seat
• Front passenger seat
• Front seat belt

Features and controls
Break-in recommendations ..............................................................5-2 Tire pressure monitoring system (if so equipped) ..........................5-58
Keys .................................................................................................5-2 Rear-view camera (if so equipped).................................................5-62
Electronic immobilizer (Anti-theft starting system) ........................5-3 Instrument cluster ..........................................................................5-64 5
Keyless entry system (if so equipped) ..............................................5-6 Multi-information display .............................................................5-65
Free-hand Advanced Security Transmitter (F.A.S.T.-key) Indicator and warning light package .............................................5-75
(if so equipped) ............................................................................5-9 Indicators .......................................................................................5-76
Door locks ......................................................................................5-24 Warning lights ................................................................................5-76
Power door locks ...........................................................................5-25 Combination headlights and dimmer switch .................................5-79
Child safety locks for rear door .....................................................5-26 Turn signal lever ............................................................................5-81
Trunk lid ........................................................................................5-27 Hazard warning flasher switch ......................................................5-82
Inside emergency trunk lid release ................................................5-28 Front fog light switch (if so equipped) ..........................................5-82
Manual window control (if so equipped)........................................5-29 Wiper and washer switch ...............................................................5-82
Power window control ...................................................................5-29 Electric rear window defogger switch ...........................................5-84
Parking brake .................................................................................5-32 Horn switch ...................................................................................5-85
Steering wheel height adjustment ..................................................5-33 Link System (if so equipped) .........................................................5-85
Inside rearview mirror ...................................................................5-34 Bluetooth® 2.0 interface (if so equipped).......................................5-85
Outside rearview mirrors ...............................................................5-36 USB input terminal (if so equipped) ...........................................5-105
Ignition switch ...............................................................................5-37 Sun visors ....................................................................................5-109
Starting the engine .........................................................................5-38 12 V power outlets ....................................................................... 5-110
Manual transaxle (if so equipped) ..................................................5-40
HomeLink® Wireless Control System (if so equipped) ............... 5-110
Continuously variable transmission (CVT) (if so equipped)..........5-42
Interior lights ............................................................................... 5-115
Service brake .................................................................................5-46
Storage spaces .............................................................................. 5-116
Hill start assist ................................................................................5-47
Cup holders .................................................................................. 5-117
Brake assist system ........................................................................5-49
Bottle holders ............................................................................... 5-118
Anti-lock braking system ...............................................................5-49
Convenience hook ....................................................................... 5-118
Electric power steering system (EPS) ............................................5-51
Assist grips .................................................................................. 5-119
Active stability control (ASC) .......................................................5-52
Cruise control (if so equipped) .......................................................5-54
Break-in recommendations
Break-in recommendations Keys

N00508701382 N00508801703
Advanced automobile manufacturing tech-

niques permit you to operate your new vehi- Type 1
cle without requiring a long break-in period
of low-speed driving. Two keys are provided. The keys fit all locks.
However, you can add to the future perfor-
5 mance and economy of your vehicle by
Keep one in a safe place as a spare key.
observing the following precautions during

the first 300 miles (500 km).
Drive your vehicle at moderate speeds during 1- Key for the electronic immobilizer and
the break-in period. keyless entry system
2- Key number plate
 Avoid revving the engine.
 Avoid rough driving such as sudden starts,
sudden acceleration, prolonged high- Type 3
speed driving and sudden braking. These
would have a detrimental effect on the Two F.A.S.T.-keys and two emergency keys
engine and also cause increased fuel and are provided.
oil consumption, which could result in 1- Key for the electronic immobilizer
Keep one F.A.S.T.-key and one emergency
malfunction of the engine components. Be 2- Key number plate
key in a safe place together as a set of spare
particularly careful to avoid full accelera- keys.
tion while in low shift position (low
gears). Type 2
 Do not overload the vehicle. Stay within
the seating capacity. (Refer to “Cargo load Two keys are provided. The keys fit all locks.
precautions” on page 6-10.) Keep one in a safe place as a spare key.
 Do not use this vehicle for trailer towing.
5-2 Features and controls

Electronic immobilizer (Anti-theft starting system)
NOTE NOTE
• Keep away from devices that produce mag-  When the theft-alarm is in the system opera-
netism, such as audio systems, computers tional status, the alarm operates if a door is
and televisions. opened after using the key, the door lock
• Keep away from devices that emit strong knob or the power door lock switch to unlock
electromagnetic waves, such as cellular the vehicle.
phones, wireless devices and high fre-  The system does not enter the preparation
quency equipment (including medical
devices).
status if the keyless entry system or the
F.A.S.T.-key was not used to lock the vehi-
5
• Do not clean with ultrasonic cleaners. cle.
• Do not leave the key where it may be
1- F.A.S.T.-key
exposed to high temperature or high humid-
(with electronic immobilizer and key- ity.
Electronic immobilizer
less entry system function)  If you lose your key, to prevent the theft of (Anti-theft starting system)
2- Emergency key the vehicle immediately contact an autho- N00509100780
3- Key number plate rized Mitsubishi Motors dealer.
[For vehicles equipped with the Free-hand
If you notify an authorized Mitsubishi
Motors dealer of the key number, they can Advanced Security Transmitter (F.A.S.T.-
NOTE make a new key. The key number is stamped key)]
 The keyless entry key and F.A.S.T.-key are a on the key number plate. Keep the key num- For information on operations for vehicles
precision electronic device with a built-in ber plate in a safe place separate from the equipped with the Free-hand Advanced Secu-
signal transmitter. Please observe the follow- key itself. rity Transmitter (F.A.S.T.-key), refer to
ing in order to prevent damage.  No keys other than those registered in “Free-hand Advanced Security Transmitter
• Do not leave where it may be exposed to advance can be used to start the engine. (F.A.S.T.-key): Electronic immobilizer (Anti-
heat caused by direct sunlight, such as on Refer to “Electronic immobilizer (Anti-theft theft starting system)” on page 5-19.
top of the dashboard. starting system)” on page 5-3.
• Do not take the remote control transmitter Refer to “Free-hand Advanced Security [Except for vehicles equipped with the Free-
apart. Transmitter (F.A.S.T.-key): “Electronic hand Advanced Security Transmitter
immobilizer (Anti-theft starting system)” on (F.A.S.T.-key)]
• Do not excessively bend the key or subject
page 5-19.
it to strong impacts. The electronic immobilizer is designed to sig-
• Keep the remote control transmitter dry. nificantly reduce the possibility of vehicle
• Keep away from magnetic objects such as theft. The purpose of the system is to immo-
key rings. bilize the vehicle if an invalid start is
Features and controls 5-3


attempted. A valid start attempt can only be
achieved (subject to certain conditions) using
NOTE
 A system failure is suspected when the igni-
a key “registered” to the immobilizer system.
tion switch is turned to the “START” posi-
All of the keys provided with your new vehi-
tion, and the engine does not start. In such a
cle have been programmed to the vehicle’s case, contact an authorized Mitsubishi
electronics. Motors dealer.
5 NOTE
 In the following cases, the vehicle may not CAUTION
be able to recognize the registered ID code  Do not make any alterations or additions to
from the key. This means the engine will not the immobilizer system. Alterations or addi-
start even when the key is turned to the tions could cause failure of the immobilizer.
“START” position.
• When the key contacts a key ring or other
metallic or magnetic object (Type A) Replacement keys
• When the key grip contacts metal of
another key (Type B)
• When the key contacts or is close to other
Only keys that have been programmed to the
immobilizer keys (including keys of other vehicle’s electronics can be used to start the
vehicles) (Type C) vehicle.
 In cases like the above, move the offending
object(s) away from the key and turn the key If you lose the key, you can order a key from
back to the “ACC” or “OFF” position. Then your authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer by
try to start the engine again. If the engine NOTE referring to the key number.
does not start, contact an authorized To prevent vehicle theft, the ID code for the
 The key may not operate properly when it is
Mitsubishi Motors dealer. near an object or facility that emits strong vehicle keys must be changed.
electromagnetic waves. Take your vehicle and all remaining keys to
 Electronic immobilizer is not compatible your authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer to
with commercially available remote starting have your ID code changed.
systems. Use of commercially available
remote starting systems may result in vehicle
starting problems and a loss of security pro-
tection.


your vehicle at your Mitsubishi Motors
Additional keys dealer) by doing the following:
NOTE
 When the key registration is completed, the
To add a key, you must already have 2 regis- 1. Insert the first valid key into the ignition immobilizer indicator will come on within 3
switch and turn the key to the “ON” posi- seconds of turning the ignition switch to the
tered keys. You need to register the ID code
“ON” position with the blank immobilizer
to the vehicle. tion for 5 seconds.
key (specially cut for your vehicle at your
Registering the ID code can be done by your- 2. Turn the key to the “OFF” position and Mitsubishi Motors dealer).
self (except for vehicles sold in Canada), or remove the first key.
by your authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer. 3. Within 30 seconds of removing the first 5
For you to register the ID code yourself, fol- key, insert the second valid key into the 5. If you wish to register another key, per-
low the “Customer key programming” proce- ignition and turn it to the “ON” position. form the process again from step 1.
dure below. About 10 seconds later, the immobilizer
If you choose to have your authorized indicator will start to blink. NOTE
Mitsubishi Motors dealer register the ID 4. When the immobilizer indicator starts  It is not possible to register a key if:
code, take your vehicle and all remaining blinking, turn the second valid key to the • the immobilizer indicator goes off during
keys to your authorized Mitsubishi Motors “OFF” position and remove it. Within 30 the procedure
dealer. seconds after doing so, insert a blank • the immobilizer indicator does not come on
immobilizer key into the ignition switch within 30 seconds after step 4.
NOTE and turn it to the “ON” position. Perform  The procedure will be terminated automati-
this operation no more than 30 seconds cally if:
 You are provided with 2 keys, but you may
after the immobilizer indicator starts • a period of 30 seconds or longer elapses
register up to 8 keys.
blinking. When registration of the ID from the moment when the first key is
code is complete, the immobilizer indica- turned to the “OFF” position to the moment
when the second key is turned to the “ON”
tor will come on for 3 seconds then go off.
Customer key programming If an error occurs, the immobilizer indica-
position
(Except for vehicles sold in tor will go off during the procedure.
• a period of 30 seconds or longer elapses
from the moment when the second key is
Canada) turned to the “OFF” position to the moment
N00562201178 when the blank immobilizer key is turned
You can program new keys to the system if to the “ON” position
you have two valid (already registered) keys • more than 20 seconds elapses after the
and blank immobilizer key (specially cut for immobilizer indicator starts blinking

General information Keyless entry system (if so NOTE

N00562300097  If you press the LOCK button (1) twice the
equipped)
Your electronic immobilizer operates on a horn will sound once.
N00509002015
radio frequency subject to Federal Communi-
cations Commission (FCC) Rules (For vehi- Press the remote control transmitter buttons
cles sold in U.S.A.) and Industry Canada to lock or unlock the doors. To unlock
Rules (For vehicles sold in Canada). This It can also help you signal for attention by
5 device complies with part 15 of FCC Rules setting off the panic alarm. Press the UNLOCK button (2) to unlock the
and Industry Canada licence-exempt RSS driver’s door only.
standard(s). Within about 2 seconds, press the UNLOCK
Operation is subject to the following two con- button one more time to unlock all the doors.
ditions. The dome light will turn on for 30 seconds.
The turn signal lights will also blink twice.
 This device may not cause harmful inter-
ference.
 This device must accept any interference Answerback function
received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation of this device. The horn of the keyless entry system answer-
back function can be changed as required.
WARNING This is done with the key removed from the
1- LOCK ( ) button
ignition switch.
 Changes or modifications not expressly
2- UNLOCK ( ) button
approved by the party responsible for
compliance could void the user’s authority 3- PANIC button NOTE
to operate the equipment. 4- Indicator light  The answerback function will not operate if
any of the doors are open.
To lock
Horn deactivation/reactivation
Press the LOCK button (1) to lock all the
doors. The answerback function can be set in the
The turn signal lights will also blink once. following three ways.


Each time the answerback function is set, a
chime will sound to tell you the condition of
Using the panic alarm Additional remote control
the answerback function.
N00543700034
transmitters
If you are near your vehicle and feel threat- N00543900078
One chime: The horn will not sound. ened, you may acti-vate the alarm to call To add a remote control transmitter, you must
Two chimes: The horn will sound. attention as follows: already have 1 registered remote control
Four chimes: The horn will sound if the transmitter.
LOCK button is pressed twice 1. Press the PANIC button (3) for more than
Registering the ID code can be done by your
within 1 second. 1 second.
5
2. The headlights will blink on and off and
Take your vehicle and any remaining keys to
the horn will sound intermittently for
your authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer.
1. Remove the key from the ignition switch. about 3 minutes.
2. Open the driver’s door and turn the com- 3. To turn off the alarm, press any button on
bination headlights and dimmer switch to the remote control transmitter. NOTE
the “OFF” position.  You are provided with 2 remote control
3. Press the LOCK button (1) for 4 to 10 sec- transmitters, but you may register up to 4
Replacement remote control remote control transmitters.
onds and press the UNLOCK button (2)
during this time. transmitters
N00543801090
4. Release in sequence the UNLOCK and
LOCK buttons within 10 seconds of Only remote control transmitters pro- General information
pressing the UNLOCK button in step 3. grammed with the vehicle’s electronics can N00546100114
lock or unlock all doors. Your keyless entry system operates on a radio
Turn signal lights deactiva- frequency subject to Federal Communica-
If you lose the remote control transmitter, you tions Commission (FCC) Rules (For vehicles
tion/reactivation can order a remote control transmitter from sold in U.S.A.) and Industry Canada Rules
your authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer by (For vehicles sold in Canada). This device
The turn signal lights answerback function referring to the key number. complies with Part 15 of FCC Rules and
can be changed. To prevent vehicle theft, the ID code for the Industry Canada licence-exempt RSS stan-
If you want to change the answerback func- remote control transmitter must be changed. dard(s).
tion, please contact an authorized Mitsubishi Take your vehicle and all remote control Operation is subject to the following two con-
Motors dealer. transmitters to your authorized Mitsubishi ditions.
Motors dealer to have your ID code changed.


ference.
NOTE
 Be sure to perform the procedure with the
 This device must accept any interference
Mitsubishi mark facing you. If the
received, including interference that may
Mitsubishi mark is not facing you when you
cause undesired operation of this device. open the remote control transmitter case, the
buttons may come out.
WARNING  The Federal Communications Commission
5  Changes or modifications not expressly
(FCC) ID number, the Industry Canada (IC)
number and the model number (radio certifi-
compliance could void the user’s authority cation) are indicated in the illustrated posi-
tion.
to operate the equipment.
3. With the Mitsubishi mark facing you,
insert the cloth-cov-ered tip of a flat blade
Procedure for replacing the screwdriver into the notch in the remote
control transmitter case and use it to open
remote control transmitter bat- the case.
tery
N00544101191
1. Before replacing the battery, remove static

electricity from your body by touching a
metal grounded object. 4. Remove the old battery.
2. Remove the screw (A) from the remote 5. Install a new battery with the + side (B)
control transmitter. up.

Free-hand Advanced Security Transmitter (F.A.S.T.-key) (if so equipped)
Free-hand Advanced Secu- WARNING

+ side
rity Transmitter (F.A.S.T.-  Individuals who use implantable pace-
makers or implantable cardiovascular-
key) (if so equipped) defibrillators should keep away from the
- side external and internal transmitters. The
N00503101150
electromagnetic waves used in the
Coin type The Free-hand Advanced Security Transmit- F.A.S.T.-key may affect the operation of
battery ter (F.A.S.T.-key) enables the doors to be
locked and unlocked, the trunk lid to be
implantable pacemakers and implantable
cardiovascular-defibrillators.
5
CR1620
opened, and the engine to be started and the
operation mode to be changed simply by car-
6. Close the remote control transmitter rying it.
firmly. The F.A.S.T.-key can also be used as the
7. Attach the screw (A) removed in step 2. remote control transmitter of the keyless
8. Check the keyless entry system to see that entry system.
it works. Refer to “Free-hand Advanced Security
Transmitter (F.A.S.T.-key): Keyless entry
system” on page 5-21.
CAUTION
 When the remote control transmitter case is
The F.A.S.T.-key must be carried by the
opened, be careful to keep water, dust, etc.
out. Also, do not touch the internal compo-
driver. The F.A.S.T.-key is required for
nents. vehicle operations such as locking and
unlocking the doors, starting the engine,
and changing the operation mode. When
NOTE leaving the vehicle, make sure you are A- External transmitter
 You may purchase a replacement battery at carrying the F.A.S.T.-key and then lock B- Internal transmitter
an electric appliance store. the vehicle.
 An authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer can
replace the battery for you if you prefer.

WARNING NOTE Operating range of the

 Individuals using other electro-medical • The key is carried together with other com- F.A.S.T.-key
apparatus besides implantable pacemak- munication devices such as cellular phones N00503201223
ers and implantable cardiovascular-defi- or radios, or electrical appliances such as
brillators should check with the computers When a person enters the operating range of
manufacturer of the apparatus to confirm • The F.A.S.T.-key touches or is covered by a the F.A.S.T.-key while carrying the F.A.S.T.-
the effect of the electromagnetic waves metal object key and presses the driver’s door lock/unlock
switch the trunk lid switch, verification of the
5 used by the F.A.S.T.-key. The electromag-
netic waves may affect the operations of
• A keyless entry system is being used
nearby ID code is performed.
the electro-medical apparatus. • The battery of the F.A.S.T.-key is run down The doors can only be locked and unlocked,
• The vehicle is in a location with strong the trunk lid can only be opened, the engine
The operations possible with the F.A.S.T.- electromagnetic waves or noise can only be started and the operation mode
key can be modified as stated below. Use the emergency key in such circum- can only be changed when the ID codes of the
(Keyless entry operations are possible.) stances. vehicle and F.A.S.T.-key match.
For details, contact an authorized Refer to “To operate without using the
Mitsubishi Motors dealer. F.A.S.T.-key” on page 5-19.
• Enabling only the locking and unlocking  The F.A.S.T.-key is constantly performing
reception operations in its communication
of the doors and the opening of the trunk
with the vehicle. This means that the battery
lid is always running down, regardless of how
• Enabling only the starting of the engine often the F.A.S.T.-key is used. The battery
• Deactivating the F.A.S.T.-key life is about 1 to 2 years, depending on the
usage conditions.
NOTE  Since the F.A.S.T.-key is constantly perform-
ing reception operations, the reception of
 The F.A.S.T.-key uses weak electromagnetic
strong electromagnetic waves can accelerate
waves.
the running down of the battery. Do not place
In cases such as the following, operation
near to electrical appliances such as televi-
may be improper or unstable.
sions or computers. NOTE
• The vehicle is near a facility that emits  When the battery of the F.A.S.T.-key has run
strong electromagnetic waves, such as a TV down or there are strong electromagnetic
transmitting tower, a power station, a radio waves or noise in the area, the operating
station or an airport range could decrease or operations could
become unstable.

Operating range for locking and NOTE NOTE

unlocking the doors and opening  If the F.A.S.T.-key is within the operating  Even if the F.A.S.T.-key is within the operat-
the trunk lid range, even a person not carrying the ing range, it may not be possible to start the
F.A.S.T.-key can lock and unlock the doors engine and change the operation mode if the
or open the trunk lid by pressing the driver’s key is in a storage space such as the glove
The operating range is within about 2.3 feet door switch or the trunk lid switch. compartment, on top of the instrument panel,
(70 cm) of the driver’s door lock/unlock or in the door pocket or luggage compart-
switch and the trunk lid switch.
Operating range for starting the ment.
 Even if the F.A.S.T.-key is inside the vehicle,
5
engine and changing the opera- it may not be possible to start the engine and
tion mode change the operation mode if the key is too
N00503301093 close to a door or door window.
The operating range is the interior of the
vehicle.
To operate using the F.A.S.T.-
key
N00503401313
To lock
*: Front of the vehicle
: Operating range While carrying the F.A.S.T.-key, press the
driver’s door switch (A) within the operating
range to lock all the doors.
NOTE The turn signal lights will blink once and the
 The system may not operate if the F.A.S.T.- buzzer will sound once.
key is too close to the windshield, door win- *: Front of the vehicle
dows or trunk lid. : Operating range Also refer to “Doors locks”, “Power door
 Even if the F.A.S.T.-key is within about 2.3 locks” on pages 5-24 and 5-25 respectively.
feet (70 cm) of the driver’s door switch or
the trunk lid switch, the system may not
operate if the key is close to the ground or in
a high position.

Driver’s door To unlock NOTE

 Settings can be changed so that all the doors
While carrying the F.A.S.T.-key within the are unlocked automatically by pressing the
operating range, you can unlock the doors by driver’s door switch once.
using the F.A.S.T.-key. See an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer
for details.
The dome light will turn on for 30 seconds.
The turn signal lights will blink twice and the
5 buzzer will sound twice.
To open the trunk lid
Also refer to “Door locks”, “Power door N00590900027
locks” on pages 5-24 and 5-25 respectively. Press the trunk lid switch (B) to open the
Trunk lid switch trunk lid.
Press the driver’s door switch (A) to unlock
only the driver’s door.
Within about 2 seconds, press the driver’s Trunk lid switch
door switch one more time to unlock all the
doors.
Driver’s switch
NOTE
 In cases such as the following, the F.A.S.T.-
key does not operate. NOTE
• There is a F.A.S.T.-key in the passenger  If the doors are unlocked using the driver’s
compartment door switch when all doors are locked and no
• A door is open or ajar doors are opened within about 30 seconds,
• The operation mode is not in OFF. the doors will automatically re-lock.
 The time within which locking confirmation
is possible can be adjusted. See an autho-
rized Mitsubishi Motors dealer for details.


While carrying the F.A.S.T.-key, the engine
NOTE switch can be used to start the engine.
NOTE
 The amount of time after unlocking until the  When operating the engine switch, press the
vehicle relocks automatically can be switch all the way in. If the switch is not
adjusted. See an authorized Mitsubishi fully pressed, the engine may not start or the
Motors dealer for details. operation mode may not change. If the
 In cases such as the following, the F.A.S.T.- engine switch is pressed correctly, there is no
key does not operate. need to hold the engine switch down.
• A door is open or ajar 5
• The operation mode is not in OFF.
 Functions settings can be modified as stated Operation mode of the engine
below. switch and its function
See an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer
for details.
• Activating the operation confirmation func- OFF
tion (blinking of the turn signal lights) only
during locking, or only during unlocking. CAUTION The indicator light on the engine switch turns
• Deactivating the operation confirmation  The indicator light (A) will flash orange off.
function (blinking of the turn signal lights) when there is a problem or malfunction in On vehicles equipped with continuously vari-
and buzzer. Free-hand Advanced Security Transmitter. able transmission (CVT), the operation mode
• Modifying the number of blinks in the Never drive if the indicator light on the cannot be put in OFF when the selector lever
operation confirmation function (blinking engine switch is flashing orange. Immedi-
is in any position other than the “P” (PARK)
of the turn signal lights). ately contact your authorized Mitsubishi
position.
Motors dealer.
• Making the buzzer sound when the
F.A.S.T.-key is removed from the passenger  If the engine switch operation is not smooth
compartment when all the doors are closed. and feels like it is sticking, do not operate the ACC
switch.
Immediately contact an authorized Allows operation of some electrical accesso-
Engine switch Mitsubishi Motors dealer. ries.
N00513500088 The indicator light on the engine switch illu-
To prevent vehicle theft, no F.A.S.T.-keys minates orange.
other than those registered in advance can be
used to start the engine. (Electronic immobi- ON
lizer function)
All electrical accessories can be used.


The indicator light on the engine switch illu-
ACC power auto-cutout function
minates green.
N00568101049
The indicator light turns off when the engine
is running. When the vehicle is in ACC operation mode
for approximately 30 minutes, the ACC
power auto-cutout function automatically
NOTE cuts power to the audio system and other
 Your vehicle is equipped with an electronic electronic devices that can be used during
5 immobilizer. To start the engine, the ID code
ACC operation mode.
which the F.A.S.T.-key sends must match the
To enable power after ACC power auto-cut-
one registered to the immobilizer computer.
(Refer to “Electronic immobilizer (Anti-theft out function, press the engine switch while in
starting system)” on page 5-19) ACC.
CAUTION
 When the engine is not running, put the oper- NOTE
Changing the operation mode ation mode in OFF. Leaving the operation  It is possible to modify the functions as fol-
N00568000025
mode in ON or ACC for a long time when lows:
the engine is not running may cause the bat-
If you press the engine switch without press- • The time until the power cuts out can be
tery to be discharged, making it impossible
ing the brake pedal {continuously variable changed to approximately 60 minutes.
to start the engine.
transmission (CVT)} or the clutch pedal • The ACC power auto-cutout function can
 When the battery is disconnected, the current
be deactivated.
(manual transaxle) while the vehicle is sta- operation mode is memorized. After recon-
For details, we recommend you to consult an
tionary, you can change the operation mode necting the battery, the memorized mode is
in the order of OFF, ACC, ON, OFF. selected automatically. Before disconnect-
ing the battery for repair or replacement,
make sure to put the operation mode in OFF.
Be careful if you are not sure which opera- Warning activation
tion mode the vehicle is in when the battery N00503501239
is run down.
With the F.A.S.T.-key, warnings are given
 The operation mode cannot be changed from
through buzzers and displayed symbols in
OFF to ACC or ON if the F.A.S.T.-key is not
detected to be in the vehicle. Refer to “Oper- order to prevent mistaken operations or vehi-
ating range for starting the engine and cle theft.
changing the operation mode” on page 5-11. When a warning operates, be sure to check
the vehicle and the F.A.S.T.-key. A warning is


also shown if there is a problem in the Someone may be carrying a When the operation mode is in any mode
F.A.S.T.-key. F.A.S.T.-key with a different other than OFF, and a door is opened and the
ID code, or the F.A.S.T.-key F.A.S.T.-key is removed from the passenger
If the following warning shows, contact an compartment the ID codes of the F.A.S.T.-
may not be within the operat-
authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer. key and the vehicle can no longer be verified.
ing range
When the door is closed, the warning light
Refer to “F.A.S.T.-key take-
There is a problem in the blinks and the buzzer sounds 4 times as a
out monitoring system” on
F.A.S.T.-key warning. If the vehicle starts, the inner buzzer
page 5-15. sounds once.
5
Put the operation mode in
The battery of the F.A.S.T.-
OFF and then start the engine
again.
key is run down NOTE
If the warning is not can-  The F.A.S.T.-key take-out monitoring system
celled, there is a fault in the does not function if the F.A.S.T.-key is
 All the doors cannot be locked even when
removed through a window without opening
electronic immobilizer (Anti- the driver’s door switch is pressed.
a door.
theft starting system). This setting can be changed.
Please contact an authorized See an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer
Refer to “Key lock-in preven-
Mitsubishi Motors dealer. for details.
tion system” on page 5-15.
 The warning may display even if the
If the following warnings show, the light goes Refer to “Door ajar preven- F.A.S.T.-key is in the operating range for
off if the correct action is taken. tion system” on page 5-16. starting the engine and changing the opera-
tion mode. The surrounding environment or
 The ID codes of the F.A.S.T.-key and the Refer to “Operation mode electromagnetic waves may make it impossi-
vehicle cannot be verified OFF reminder system” on ble to verify the ID codes of the F.A.S.T.-key
page 5-16. and vehicle.
F.A.S.T.-key take-out monitoring Key lock-in prevention system

system N00559901168
N00559801196


When the operation mode is in OFF, the the driver’s door switch, the warning light The engine is warmed up enough for driv-
F.A.S.T.-key is left in the passenger compart- blinks and the buzzer sounds for about 3 sec- ing when the low coolant temperature
ment, all the doors are closed, and someone onds as a warning, and the doors cannot be indicator goes out.
tries to lock the vehicle by pressing the locked. Refer to “Low coolant temperature indi-
driver’s door switch, the warning light blinks cator” on page 5-76.
and the buzzer sounds for about 3 seconds as
Starting and stopping the
a warning, and the doors cannot be locked.
engine WARNING
5 N00514601357  Never run the engine in a closed or poorly
Door ajar prevention system ventilated area any longer than is needed
N00560001169 to move your vehicle out of the area. Car-
Tips for starting bon monoxide gas, which is odorless and
extremely poisonous, could build up and
 The operation mode can be in any mode cause serious injury or death.
to start the engine.
When the operation mode is in OFF, and  The starter motor will be turning for up to
someone tries to lock the vehicle by pressing approximately 15 seconds if the engine CAUTION
the driver’s door switch while one of the switch is released at once. Pressing the
 Do not push-start the vehicle.
doors is not fully closed, the warning light engine switch again while the starter
 Do not run the engine at high rpms or drive
blinks and the buzzer sounds for about 3 sec- motor is still turning will stop the starter at high speeds until the engine has had a
onds as a warning, and the doors cannot be motor. The starter motor will be turning chance to warm up.
locked. for up to approximately 30 seconds while
the engine switch is pressed.
If the engine does not start, wait for a Starting the engine
Operation mode OFF reminder while and then attempt to start the engine
system again. Trying repeatedly with the starter
Your vehicle is equipped with an electroni-
N00560101160
motor still turning will damage the starter
cally controlled fuel injection system. This is
mechanism.
a system that automatically controls fuel
 If the engine will not start because the bat-
injection. There is usually no need to depress
tery is weak or discharged, refer to
the accelerator pedal when starting the
When the operation mode is in any mode “Jump-starting the engine” on page 8-2
engine.
other than OFF, all the doors are closed, and for instructions.
To prevent battery drain, wait a few seconds
someone tries to lock the vehicle by pressing  A longer warm up period will only con-
between attempts to restart the engine.
sume extra fuel.

1. Make sure all occupants are properly 2. While depressing the brake pedal {contin-
seated with seat belts fastened.
NOTE uously variable transmission (CVT)} or
 On vehicles equipped with continuously
2. Make sure the parking brake is applied. the clutch pedal (manual transaxle), press
variable transmission (CVT), the engine can
3. Press and hold the brake pedal down the accelerator pedal halfway and hold it
only be started when the selector lever is in
firmly with your right foot. the “P” (PARK) or “N” (NEUTRAL) posi- there, then crank the engine. Release the
tion. accelerator pedal, immediately after the
NOTE For safety reasons, the engine should be engine starts.
3. If the engine still will not start, the engine
 After the engine has not started
the brake pedal effort needed
for a while,
to start the
started when the selector lever is in the “P”
(PARK) position in which the driving wheels could be flooded with too much gasoline.
5
engine may become greater. If this occurs, lock. While depressing the brake pedal (CVT)
depress the brake pedal more firmly than or the clutch pedal (manual transaxle),
usual. push the accelerator pedal all the way
6. Press the engine switch.
7. Confirm that all warning lights and warn- down and hold it there, then press the
4. Press and hold the clutch pedal all the way engine switch to crank the engine. If the
ing displays are functioning properly.
down (manual transaxle). engine does not start after 5 to 6 seconds,
push the engine switch to stop cranking
NOTE NOTE the engine, and release the accelerator
 For vehicles equipped with a manual trans-  Minor noises may be heard on engine start- pedal. Put the operation mode in OFF.
axle, the engine will not start unless the up. These will disappear as the engine warms Wait a few seconds, and then press the
clutch pedal is fully depressed (Clutch inter- up. engine switch to crank the engine again
lock). This is a safety feature. while depressing the brake pedal (CVT)
When the engine is hard to start or the clutch pedal (manual transaxle), but
5. On vehicles equipped with manual trans- do not push the accelerator pedal. If the
After several attempts, you may experience
axle, place the gearshift lever in the “N” engine fails to start, repeat these proce-
that the engine still does not start.
(Neutral) position. dures. If the engine still will not start, con-
On vehicles equipped with continuously 1. Make sure that all electric devices, such tact your local Mitsubishi Motors dealer
variable transmission (CVT), make sure as lights, air conditioning blower and rear or a repair facility of your choice for
the selector lever is in the “P” (PARK) window defogger, are turned off. assistance.
position.
Startability of continuously variable trans-
mission (CVT) vehicles with an ambient
temperature of -4 °F (-20 °C) or lower


When the ambient temperature is -4 °F (-20
°C) or lower, it may not be possible to start
NOTE If the F.A.S.T.-key is not operat-
from a standstill even with the selector lever  If you have to bring the engine to an emer- ing properly
gency stop while driving, press and hold the
in the “D” (DRIVE) or “R” (REVERSE) N00568301054
engine switch for 3 seconds or more, or press
position. it quickly 3 times or more. The engine will Insert the F.A.S.T.-key into the key slot of the
This phenomenon occurs because the trans- stop and the operation mode will go to ACC. floor console. Starting the engine and chang-
axle has not warmed up sufficiently; it does  On vehicles equipped with continuously ing the operation mode should be now possi-
not indicate a problem. If this occurs, place ble.
5 the selector lever in the “P” (PARK) position
variable transmission (CVT), do not stop the
engine with the selector lever in any position Remove the F.A.S.T.-key from the key slot
and let the engine idle for at least 10 minutes. other than the “P” (PARK) position. If the after starting the engine or changing the oper-
The transaxle will warm up, and you will be engine is stopped with the selector lever in ation mode.
able to start normally. any position other than the “P” (PARK) posi-
Do not leave the vehicle during warm-up tion, the operation mode will go to ACC
rather than OFF.
operation.
Put the operation mode in OFF after placing
the selector lever in the “P” (PARK) posi-
Stopping the engine tion.
N00568200014
WARNING 1. Stop the vehicle.

 Do not operate the engine switch while
2. Fully engage the parking brake while
driving except in an emergency. If the depressing the brake pedal.
engine is stopped while driving, the brake 3. On vehicles with a manual transaxle,
servomechanism will cease to function and press the engine switch to stop the engine,
braking efficiency will deteriorate. Also, and then move the gearshift lever to the
the power steering system will not func- 1st (on a uphill) or “R” (Reverse) (on a NOTE
tion and it will require greater manual downhill) position.  Do not insert into the key slot anything other
effort to operate the steering. This could On vehicles equipped with continuously than the F.A.S.T.-key. This could cause dam-
result in a serious accident. variable transmission (CVT), move the age or a malfunction.
selector lever to the “P” (PARK) position,
and then press the engine switch to stop
the engine.


vehicle has run down, the emergency key can that the door is locked, turn the emergency
NOTE be used to lock and unlock the passenger’s key back to the center and remove it.
 Remove the object or additional key from the
door.
F.A.S.T.-key before inserting the key into the
key slot. The vehicle may not be able to To use the emergency key (A), unlock the
receive the registered ID code from the regis-
lock knob (B) and remove it from the
tered key. Therefore, the engine may not start
and the operation mode may not change.
F.A.S.T.-key (C).
5
F.A.S.T.-key reminder
1- Lock
If the operation mode is in OFF and the 2- Unlock
driver’s door is opened with the F.A.S.T.-key
in the key slot, a warning is issued with the
warning light and the buzzer buzzing for
Electronic immobilizer (Anti-
approximately 3 seconds to remind you to
remove the key. theft starting system)
NOTE N00529600055
 Only use the emergency key in an emer-
The electronic immobilizer is designed to sig-
To operate without using the gency. When the battery of the F.A.S.T.-key
nificantly reduce the possibility of vehicle
has run down, replace the battery as soon as
F.A.S.T.-key possible and use it as a F.A.S.T.-key again. theft. The purpose of the system is to immo-
N00514800017
 After using the emergency key, be sure to bilize the vehicle if an invalid start is
reinsert it into the F.A.S.T.-key. attempted. A valid start attempt can only be
Emergency key achieved (subject to certain conditions) using
N00515201174 Locking and unlocking the passenger’s a F.A.S.T.-Key “registered” to the immobi-
The emergency key is built into the F.A.S.T.- door lizer system.
key. All of the keys provided with your new vehi-
When the F.A.S.T.-key cannot be used, such Turn the emergency key toward the front of cle have been programmed to the vehicle’s
as when the battery of the F.A.S.T.-key or the the vehicle to lock the door. After checking electronics.


3. Insert the new F.A.S.T.-key into the key
Replacement F.A.S.T.-keys NOTE slot.
N00561000042  You are provided with 2 F.A.S.T.-keys, but
Only the F.A.S.T.-keys that have been pro- you may register up to 4 F.A.S.T.-keys.
grammed to the vehicle’s electronics can be You can obtain blank F.A.S.T.-keys for your
used to start the vehicle. vehicle from your Mitsubishi Motors dealer.
If you lose the F.A.S.T.-key, you can order a

5 F.A.S.T.-key from your authorized Mitsubishi Customer F.A.S.T.-key program-
Motors dealer by referring to the key number. ming (Except for vehicles sold in
To prevent vehicle theft, take your vehicle Canada)
and the remaining F.A.S.T.-keys to an autho- N00561201201
rized Mitsubishi Motors dealer to have the ID
You can program new F.A.S.T.-keys to the
codes reprogrammed.
system if you have two valid (already regis- 4. With the first valid F.A.S.T.-key, press the
tered) F.A.S.T.-keys and blank (not regis- UNLOCK button for 4 to 10 seconds and
Additional F.A.S.T.-keys tered) F.A.S.T.-key. press the LOCK button during this time.
N00561100056
5. Release in sequence the LOCK and
To add a F.A.S.T.-key, you must already have For F.A.S.T.-key programming, follow the
UNLOCK buttons within 10 seconds of
2 registered F.A.S.T.-keys. You need to regis- procedures below.
pressing the LOCK button in step 4. (Per-
ter the ID code to the vehicle. form the following procedure within 30
1. Open the driver’s door.
Registering the ID code can be done by your seconds.)
authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer. Or it 6. With the second valid F.A.S.T.-key, press
can be done by yourself (except for vehicles
NOTE
the UNLOCK button for 4 to 10 seconds
 Keep the driver’s door open until F.A.S.T.-
sold in Canada). and press the LOCK button during this
key programming is finished. Do not open or
For you to register the ID code yourself, fol- time.
close other doors.
low the “Customer F.A.S.T.-key program- 7. Release in sequence the LOCK and
ming” procedure below. UNLOCK buttons within 10 seconds of
If you choose to have your authorized 2. While carrying the first valid F.A.S.T.- pressing the LOCK button in step 6. The
Mitsubishi Motors dealer register the ID key, put the operation mode in ON. (Per- immobilizer warning light will blink.
code, take your vehicle and all remaining form the following procedure within 30
F.A.S.T.-keys to your authorized Mitsubishi seconds.)
Motors dealer.

Keyless entry system NOTE

N00515501278  If you press the LOCK button (1) twice, the
Press the remote control transmitter buttons horn will sound once.
to lock or unlock the doors.
It can also help you signal for attention by
When registration of ID code is complete, setting off the panic alarm. To unlock
the buzzer will sound 3 times and the
immobilizer indicator will come on for 30 Press the UNLOCK button (2) to unlock the 5
seconds. driver’s door only.
If an error occurs, F.A.S.T.-key program- Within about 2 seconds, press the UNLOCK
ming will be terminated and the buzzer button one more time to unlock all the doors.
will sound for 3 seconds. The dome light will turn on for 30 seconds.
The turn signal lights will also blink twice.
NOTE
 F.A.S.T.-key programming will be termi- NOTE
nated if the operation mode is put in OFF  The door unlock function can be set so that
before the immobilizer warning light starts all doors unlock when the UNLOCK button
blinking. (2) is pressed once.
1- LOCK ( ) button Refer to “Setting of door unlock function” on
2- UNLOCK ( ) button page 5-22.
8. If you wish to register another F.A.S.T.-
key, repeat the process from step 1 after 3- Trunk button
the operation mode is put in OFF. 4- PANIC button
5- Operation indicator light To open the trunk lid
NOTE N00544401035
 The immobilizer display will go off immedi- Press the trunk button (3) twice within about
ately if the operation mode is put in OFF. To lock 5 seconds and the trunk lid will be opened.
 It is not possible to register a F.A.S.T.-key if The trunk lid must be closed manually after it
the immobilizer warning light goes off dur- Press the LOCK button (1) to lock all the has been opened.
ing the procedure. doors.
The turn signal lights will also blink once.


3. Press the LOCK button (1) for 4 to 10 sec-
Answerback function Turn signal light deactivation/reactiva-
onds and press the UNLOCK button (2)
N00544501094 tion
during this time.
The horn of the keyless entry system answer- 4. Release in sequence the LOCK and
The turn signal lights answerback function
back function can be changed as required. UNLOCK buttons within 10 seconds of
can be changes.
Horn deactivation/reactivation If you want to change the answerback func- pressing the LOCK button in step 3.
tion, please contact an authorized Mitsubishi
5 The answerback function can be set in the
following three ways.
Motors dealer. Using the panic alarm
N00544701100
Buzzer deactivation/reactivation If you are near your vehicle and feel threat-
One chime: The horn will not sound.
ened, you can acti-vate the alarm to call atten-
Two chimes: The horn will sound. The buzzer answerback function can be
tion as follows:
Four chimes: The horn will sound if the turned ON or OFF as required.
LOCK button is pressed twice 1. Press the PANIC button (3) for more than
within 1 second.
Setting of door unlock function 1 second.
N00544601138 2. The headlights will blink on and off and
The door unlock function can be set to the the horn will sound intermittently for
1. Put the operation mode in OFF.
following two conditions. about 3 minutes.
2. Open the driver’s door and turn the com-
Each time the door unlock function is set, a 3. To turn off the alarm, press any button on
bination headlights and dimmer switch to
chime will sound to tell you the condition of the remote control transmitter.
the “OFF” position.
3. Press the LOCK button (1) for 4 to 10 sec- the door unlock function.
onds and press the UNLOCK button (2) NOTE
during this time. Number of  The indicator light (4) comes on each time a
Condition
4. Release in sequence the UNLOCK and chimes button is pressed.
LOCK buttons within 10 seconds of One chime All doors unlock  The F.A.S.T.-key can be used from about 40
pressing the UNLOCK button in step 3. feet (12 m) away. However, this distance
Two chimes Driver’s door unlock only may change if your vehicle is near a TV
transmitting tower, a power station, or a
1. Put the operation mode in OFF. radio station.
2. Open the driver’s door and turn the com-
bination headlights and dimmer switch to

plies with Part 15 of FCC Rules and Industry
NOTE Canada licence-exempt RSS standard(s).
 If the following conditions are observed after
Operation is subject to the following two con-
pressing the LOCK (1) or UNLOCK (2) but-
ditions.
ton on the remote control transmitter, the
buttery in the F.A.S.T.-key may need to be
replaced.
ference.
• The doors cannot be locked or unlocked.
• The panic alarm cannot be operated.
received, including interference that may 5
• The indicator light (4) is dim or does not
come on.
cause undesired operation of this device.
 If you lose your F.A.S.T.-key, please contact
an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer for a WARNING NOTE
replacement.  Changes or modifications not expressly
 If you wish to obtain an additional F.A.S.T.-  Be sure to perform the procedure with the
key, please contact an authorized Mitsubishi Mitsubishi mark facing you. If the
compliance could void the user’s authority
Motors dealer. A maximum of four F.A.S.T.- Mitsubishi mark is not facing you when you
to operate the equipment.
key can be programmed for your vehicle. open the case, the transmitter may come out.
 To use the new remote control transmitters, it
is necessary to register the key with the elec-
tronic immobilizer and keyless entry system. Procedure for replacing the 3. Remove the old battery.
4. Install a new battery with the + side (A)
Refer to “Electronic immobilizer (Anti-theft remote control transmitter bat-
starting system): Customer F.A.S.T.-key pro- up.
gramming” on page 5-20.
tery
N00562100066 + side
1. Before replacing the battery, remove static
General information electricity from your body by touching a
N00562000065 metal grounded object. - side
Your F.A.S.T.-key operates on a radio fre- 2. With the Mitsubishi mark facing you,
quency subject to Federal Communications insert the cloth-cov-ered tip of a flat blade
Commission (FCC) Rules (For vehicles sold screwdriver into the notch in the case and Coin type
use it to open the case. battery
in U.S.A.) and Industry Canada Rules (For
CR2032
vehicles sold in Canada). This device com-

Door locks
5. Close the case firmly.
6. Check the keyless entry system to see that
WARNING
 Lock your vehicle whenever you leave it.
it works.
Children who get into unlocked vehicles
may not be able to get out. Children
NOTE trapped inside vehicles can quickly be
 You may purchase a replacement battery at overcome by heat and suffer serious
an electric appliance store. injury or death due to heat stroke.
5  An authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer can  Never leave a child alone in the vehicle. In
addition to the risk of heat stroke, chil-
replace the battery for you if you prefer.
dren can activate switches and controls,
resulting in an injury or fatal accident.
 When closing a door, make sure that the 1- Lock
CAUTION door is fully closed and the door-ajar 2- Unlock
 When the remote control transmitter case is warning display goes out on the informa-
opened, be careful to keep water, dust, etc. tion screen on the multi-information dis-
out. Also, do not touch the internal compo- play. If the door is ajar it could open while NOTE
nents. driving and cause an accident.  When locking or unlocking with the key,
only the driver’s door will be locked or
unlocked.
Door locks To lock and unlock with the key To lock or unlock all doors, use the power
N00509201573
(driver’s door) door lock switches, the keyless entry system
or the F.A.S.T-key operation. (if so
WARNING Turn the key toward the front of the vehicle to equipped)
Refer to “Power door locks” on page 5-25,
 Make sure all doors are tightly closed and lock the door. After checking that the door is
“Keyless entry system” on pages 5-6 and
locked while driving. locked, turn the key back to the center and 5-21, and “To operate using the F.A.S.T.-
• Locked doors, in combination with the remove it. key” on page 5-11.
use of seat belts, can help reduce the risk
 In vehicles equipped with the F.A.S.T.-key,
of ejection in an accident.
the passenger’s door can be locked and
• Locked doors can help keep passengers,
unlocked using the emergency key.
especially small children, from opening
Refer to “Emergency key” on page 5-19.
doors and falling out of moving vehicles.
• Locked doors can help prevent outsiders
from gaining access to your vehicle when
you slow or come to a stop.

Power door locks

2. Be sure the keys are not inside the vehi- the lock knob will automatically return to the
To lock or unlock the door from cle. Close the door. unlocked position.
the inside
Operation mode ON reminder
Move the lock knob to the lock position to
lock the door. system (vehicles equipped with
All doors should be kept locked while driv- the F.A.S.T.-key)
ing. N00503800150
5
If the driver’s door is opened while the engine
is stopped and the operation mode is in any
position other than OFF, the operation mode
ON buzzer will sound intermittently to
remind you to put the operation mode in OFF.
Key reminder system (except Power door locks

for vehicles equipped with the N00509301646
F.A.S.T.-key) NOTE
N00549600253
 When locking or unlocking with the key on
1- Lock If the ignition switch is turned off and the the driver’s door, only the driver’s door will
2- Unlock driver’s door is opened with the key in the lock or unlock.
ignition switch, the key reminder buzzer will  Repeated continuous operation between lock
The driver’s door can be unlocked without sound intermittently to remind you to remove and unlock could activate the power door
using the lock knob by pulling on the inside the key. locking system’s built-in protection circuit,
and prevent the system from operating. If
door handle. this occurs, wait about 1 minute before oper-
Lock out protection ating the power door lock switch.
To lock the door without using N00517300042
the key If the key is in the ignition switch or the oper-

ation mode is in any mode other than OFF
1. Move the inside lock knob to the locked when you push the lock knob forward with
position. the driver’s door or passenger’s door open,

Child safety locks for rear door
To lock and unlock the doors To unlock the doors

N00563401177
You can select the functions to unlock the

Using the power door lock switch doors either using the ignition switch or the
(if so equipped) engine switch, or using the selector lever
position {continuously variable transmis-
sion (CVT)}.
5 These functions are not activated when the
vehicle is shipped from the factory. To acti-
vate or deactivate these functions, please
contact your authorized Mitsubishi Motors
dealer.
Child safety locks for rear
door
Using the ignition switch or the N00509401315
engine switch
1- Lock
2- Unlock All doors will unlock when the ignition
switch is turned to the “OFF” position or the
operation mode is put in OFF.
All of the doors can be locked or unlocked by
pressing the power door lock switch on the
driver’s or the front passenger door. Using the selector lever position
{continuously variable transmis-
sion (CVT)}
1- To lock
All doors will unlock when the selector lever
2- To release
is moved to the “P” (PARK) position with the
ignition switch or the operation mode in ON.

Trunk lid
Child safety locks help prevent rear passen-
gers, especially children, from opening the Trunk lid To open
rear door using the inside door handle. N00509501215
A lock lever for the child safety lock is pro-

vided on each rear door.
WARNING Operation from outside the vehicle
 It is dangerous to drive with the trunk lid
When the lever is in the lock position (1), the
open since carbon monoxide (CO) gas can
rear door cannot be opened using the inside enter the cabin. CO is an invisible, odor- Using the key (Vehicles with key cylin-
door handle.
To open the rear door when the child safety
less gas that can cause unconsciousness der) 5
and even death.
lock lever is in the lock position, pull the out-  Do not allow children to have access to the Insert the key and turn it clockwise.
side door handle. trunk by climbing into the trunk from
When the lever is in the release position (2), outside of the vehicle. Always close the The trunk lid will pop up slightly. Lift it to
the child safety lock is released and the rear trunk lid when your vehicle is unattended. open the trunk.
door can be opened using the inside door han- If trapped in the trunk, it is possible to
dle. escape from the trunk by using the inside
emergency trunk release lever. (See
“Inside emergency trunk lid release” on
WARNING page 5-28.)
 Always keep the doors tightly closed and
locked when driving. An unlocked door
may be accidentally opened by a passen- CAUTION
ger, especially by a child who could fall
 Do not stand behind the exhaust pipe when
out. Also, if the doors are not locked, there
loading and unloading luggage. Heat from
is a greater risk of someone being thrown
the exhaust could lead to burns.
from the vehicle in an accident.
Using the remote control transmitter

(Vehicles with F.A.S.T.-key)
Press the trunk button (Vehicles with

F.A.S.T.-key). (See “Free-hand Advanced
Security Transmitter (F.A.S.T.-key)” on page
5-9.)

Inside emergency trunk lid release

The trunk lid will pop up to slightly. Lift it to
open the trunk.
To close Inside emergency trunk lid
Pull the trunk lid downward as illustrated. release
Operation from inside the vehicle Gently slam the trunk lid from the outside so N00509801188
that it is completely closed. Always ensure The emergency trunk lid release is designed
the trunk lid is securely closed. to provide a way to open the trunk lid from
inside the trunk. It was developed to help pre-
5 vent death and serious injuries to children
who might become locked inside a vehicle
trunk.
The emergency trunk lid release lever (see

illustration) is mounted on the trunk lid.
The lever glows in the dark after exposure to

sunlight.
Pull the trunk lid release lever, located to the
left of the driver’s seat, up to open the trunk.
CAUTION
CAUTION  Be careful to prevent catching anyone’s fin-
 Do not use the trunk lid release lever while gers when closing the trunk lid.
the vehicle is moving. If the trunk lid is  Before starting the vehicle, be sure to con-
opened, objects in the trunk could fall onto firm that the trunk lid is closed. If the trunk
the road and cause an accident. lid opens while driving the vehicle, objects
stored in the trunk could fall out onto the
road.
NOTE
 The trunk area light comes on when the trunk
lid is opened, and goes out when it is closed.
You and your family should familiarize your-
selves with the location and operation of the
emergency trunk lid release lever. Children
should be taught not to play in or around
vehicles.
Manual window control (if so equipped)
WARNING CAUTION Power window control

 Children should never be left unsuper-  When loading the trunk, place your things so N00510800370
vised in or around vehicles. that they will not touch the emergency trunk
 Unsupervised children could lock them- lid release lever when you close the trunk.
selves in an open vehicle or trunk. Otherwise you could damage the lever and
 People trapped inside a vehicle or trunk, make it unusable.
even if only for a short period of time, can
quickly die from suffocation or heat 5
stroke, especially on hot days. Interior
temperatures in vehicles can rise in min-
Manual window control (if so
utes. equipped)
 Keep your vehicle doors locked and the N00510700021
trunk lid closed when not in use. Keep
your vehicle keys away from children.
1- Open (down)
2- Close (up)
To open the trunk from the inside, move the
lever (A) in the direction of the arrow on the
lever. Push up on the trunk lid to open the NOTE
trunk and climb out.  Never try to operate the main switch and
sub-switch in different directions at the same
time. This will freeze the window in posi-
tion.
 Operating the power windows repeatedly
1- To open with the engine stopped will run down the
2- To close battery. Use the window switches only while
the engine is running.
WARNING
 Before operating the power windows,
make sure that nothing can be trapped
(head, hands, fingers, etc.) in the window.

Power window control
WARNING Type 1 Sub switch

 Never leave the vehicle without carrying N00548800098
the key.
 Never leave children or unreliable adults
unattended inside the vehicle.
Main switch
5 N00548700130
The main switch located on the driver’s door

can be used to operate all the windows.
A window can be opened or closed by operat-
ing the corresponding switch. Type 2
Press the switch down to open the window, 1- Close
and pull up the switch to close it. 2- Open
If the driver’s door window switch is fully
pressed down/pulled up, the driver’s door Each sub-switch can be used for it’s own pas-
window automatically opens/closes com- senger door window, unless the driver’s win-
pletely. (Type 1) dow lock switch is activated.
If the driver’s door window switch is fully
pressed down, the driver’s door window auto-
matically opens completely. (Type 2) NOTE
If you want to stop the window movement, 1- Driver’s door window switch  The rear door windows open only half-way.
operate the switch lightly in the reverse direc- 2- Front passenger door window switch
tion. 3- Left rear door window switch
4- Right rear door window switch Power window timer function
5- Lock switch N00548900132
The power windows can be run up or down

when the ignition switch or the operation
mode is in ON.
The door windows can be opened or closed
for a 30-second period after the engine is

Power window control

stopped. However, once the driver’s door or
the front passenger’s door is opened, the
WARNING CAUTION
 Before driving with a child in the vehicle,  The safety mechanism is deactivated while
power windows cannot be operated.
be sure to lock the window switch to make the switch is pulled up. Therefore be espe-
it inoperative. Children tampering with cially careful that fingers are not trapped in
Lock switch the switch could easily trap their hands or the door window opening.
N00549000169 heads in the window.  Do not deliberately trap your hands or head
When this switch is in the lock mode, the pas- in order to activate the safety mechanism.
senger door switches cannot be used to open Your hand or head could be trapped and per-
sonal injury could result.
5
or close the door windows, and the main Safety mechanism (Driver’s
switch will open or close only the driver’s door window of Type 1 only)
door window. To unlock the switch, press it
again.
N00528801161
NOTE
If a hand or head is trapped, for safety the  The safety mechanism can be activated if the
door window is automatically lowered a little. driving conditions or other circumstances
After the door window is lowered, clear the cause the door window to be subjected to a
Type 1 obstruction, then pull up the switch again to physical shock similar to that caused by
close the door window. trapped hand or head.
 If the safety mechanism is activated 5 or
more times in a row, the safety mechanism
WARNING will be cancelled and the door window will
Type 2  If the battery terminals are disconnected not close correctly.
or the fuse for electric window is replaced, In such a case, the following procedure
the safety mechanism will be cancelled. should be implemented to rectify this situa-
If a hand or head got trapped, a serious tion.
injury could result. If the window is open, repeatedly raise the
1- Lock driver’s door window switch until that win-
2- Unlock dow has been fully closed. Following this,
CAUTION release the switch, raise the switch once
again and hold it in this condition for at
 The safety mechanism is deactivated just
least1 second, then release it. You should
before the door window closes. This allows
now be able to operate in the normal fashion.
the door window to close completely. There-
fore be especially careful that fingers are not
trapped in the door window opening.

Parking brake
NOTE Parking brake To apply

 If the battery terminals are disconnected or N00511400399
the fuse for electric window is replaced, the
To park the vehicle, first bring it to a com-
safety mechanism will be cancelled and the
door window will not automatically
plete stop, fully engage the parking brake,
open/close completely. and then move the gearshift lever to 1st (on a
If the window is open, repeatedly raise the uphill) or “R” (Reverse) (on a downhill) posi-
tion for vehicles equipped with a manual
5 driver’s door window switch until the win-
dow has been fully closed. Following this, transaxle, set the selector lever to “P”
release the switch, raise the switch once (PARK) position for vehicles equipped with a
again and hold it in this condition for at least continuously variable transmission (CVT).
1 second, then release it. You should now be
able to operate the driver’s door window in
the normal fashion.
1- Pull the lever up without pushing the
button at the end of hand grip.
What to do if you hear wind When the parking brake is set and the
buffeting when driving ignition switch or the operation mode is
N00551400043
in the “ON” position, the brake warn-
ing light in the instrument cluster will
Wind buffeting can be described as the per-
come on.
ception of pressure on the ears or a booming
or rumbling sound. Your vehicle may exhibit Before driving, be sure to release the
wind buffeting when driving with one or both parking brake.
rear door windows down or partially opened.
This is a normal occurrence that can be mini-
mized. If the buffeting occurs with the rear
door windows open, open the front door win-
dows as well as the rear door windows to
minimize the condition.

Steering wheel height adjustment
To deactivate CAUTION
 Before driving, be sure that the parking
brake is fully released and brake warning
light is off.
If you drive without the parking brake fully
released, the warning lamp will illuminate
and a buzzer sounds when the vehicle speed
exceeds 5 mph (8 km/h).
If a vehicle is driven without releasing the
5
parking brake, the brakes will be overheated,
resulting in ineffective braking and possible
brake failure. A- Wheel lock
B- Release
1- Pull the lever up slightly.
2- Press and hold the button at the end of Steering wheel height WARNING
the hand grip. adjustment  After adjusting, make sure the lever is
3- Push the lever downward.
N00511500231 secured in the locked (A) position.
To adjust the steering wheel to the desired  Do not attempt to adjust the steering
When parking on a hill, set the parking brake, position, move the lever upward or down- wheel while driving. This can be danger-
and turn the front wheels toward the curb on a ward while moving the steering wheel to the ous.
downhill, or away from the curb on an uphill. desired level.  When releasing the lever (moving it to the
position (B)), be sure to hold the steering
wheel firmly. Otherwise, the steering
wheel may slip down too suddenly.

Inside rearview mirror
Inside rearview mirror WARNING To adjust the mirror position

N00511601385  Do not attempt to adjust the inside rear-
Adjust the inside rearview mirror only after view mirror while driving. This can be It is possible to move the mirror up/down and
making any seat adjustments so as to have a dangerous. left/right to adjust its position.
clear view to the rear of the vehicle. Be sure to adjust the mirror before driv-
ing.
Adjust the inside mirror to maximize the

5 Type 1
view through the rear window.
To adjust the vertical mirror

position
Type 2 It is possible to move the mirror up and down
to adjust its position.
Type 3

Inside rearview mirror
To reduce the glare Type 2 NOTE

 If you want to stop automatic mode, press
When the headlights of the vehicles behind the switch (3) for approximately 2 seconds
Type 1 you are very bright, the reflection factor of and the indicator (1) will go off.
the rearview mirror is automatically changed To return to automatic mode, press the
The day/night knob (A) at the bottom of the to reduce the glare. switch again. Or turn the ignition switch to
mirror can be used to adjust the mirror to the “ON” position or put the operation mode
reduce the glare from the headlights of vehi-
cles behind you during night driving.
in ON, after turning the ignition switch to the
“LOCK” position or putting the operation
5
mode in OFF.
Type 3
When the headlights of the vehicles behind

you are very bright, the reflection factor of
the rearview mirror is automatically changed
to reduce the glare.
Normally, use the automatic mode. When the

ignition switch is turned to the “ON” position
or the operation mode is put in ON, the green
1- Daytime position
indicator (1) illuminates and the reflection
2- Night position
factor of the mirror is automatically changed.
NOTE
 Do not hang items on, or spray glass cleaner
on the sensor (2), as reduced sensitivity
could result.
Normally, use the automatic mode. When the
ignition switch is turned to the “ON” position
or the operation mode is put in ON, the green

Outside rearview mirrors

indicator (1) illuminates and the reflection Press the switch (B) to adjust the mirror posi-
factor of the mirror is automatically changed.
WARNING tion.
 Your passenger’s side mirror is convex.
The objects you see in the mirror will look 1- Up
NOTE smaller and farther away than they
2- Down
 Do not hang items on, or spray glass cleaner appear in a regular flat mirror.
Do not use this mirror to estimate the dis-
3- Right
on the sensors (2), as reduced sensitivity
could result. tance of vehicles following you when 4- Left
5  If you want to stop automatic mode, press

the switch (3) and the indicator (1) will go
changing lanes.
off.
To adjust the mirror position NOTE
To return to automatic mode, press the  After adjusting, return the lever to the “•”
N00549100144
switch again. Or turn the ignition switch to (OFF) position (C).
the “ON” position or put the operation mode The outside rearview mirrors can be adjusted
in ON, after turning the ignition switch to the when the ignition switch or the operation
“LOCK” position or putting the operation mode is in ON or ACC.
mode in OFF.
To fold the mirror
Move the lever (A) to the same side as the N00549200099
mirror you wish to adjust.
The outside mirror can be manually folded in
Outside rearview mirrors towards the side window to prevent damage
when parking in tight locations.
N00512200206
Adjust the outside rearview mirrors only after

making any seat adjustments so as to have a
clear view to the rear of the vehicle.
WARNING
 Do not attempt to adjust the outside rear-
view mirrors while driving. This can be
dangerous.
Be sure to adjust the mirrors before driv- L- Left outside mirror adjustment
ing. R- Right outside mirror adjustment

Ignition switch
For information on operations for vehicles
Door mirror heater (if so equipped) equipped with the Free-hand Advanced Secu-
ACC
N00549301286
rity Transmitter (F.A.S.T.-key), refer to
“Free-hand Advanced Security Transmitter Allows operation of some electrical accesso-
When the rear window defogger switch is
(F.A.S.T.-key): ries with the engine off.
pressed with the engine running, the outside
rearview mirrors are defogged or defrosted. Engine switch” on page 5-13.
Current will flow through the heater element
[Except for vehicles equipped with the
ON
inside the mirrors, thus clearing away frost or
Free-hand Advanced Security Transmit- 5
condensation. The engine runs and all accessories can be
ter (F.A.S.T.-key)]
The indicator light (A) will illuminate while used.
the defogger is on.
The heater will be turned off automatically in
about 20 minutes. START
Engages the starter. Release the key when the

engine starts.It will automatically return to
the “ON” position.
NOTE
 Your vehicle is equipped with an electronic
immobilizer. To start the engine, the ID code
(which the transponder inside the key sends)
must match the one registered to the immobi-
OFF lizer computer. (Refer to “Electronic immo-
bilizer” on page 5-3.)
The engine is off. The key can be inserted and
Ignition switch removed only when the switch is in this posi-
N00512401739
tion. To remove the key
N00550901240
[For vehicles equipped with the Free-hand 1. Set the selector lever to the “P” (PARK)
Advanced Security Transmitter (F.A.S.T.- position {continuously variable transmis-
key)] sion (CVT)}.

Starting the engine

2. Turn the key to the “OFF” position and  A longer warm up period will only con-
remove it. Starting the engine sume extra fuel. The engine is warmed up
N00512601816
enough for driving when the low coolant
[For vehicles equipped with the Free-hand temperature indicator goes out.
Advanced Security Transmitter (F.A.S.T.- Refer to “Low coolant temperature indi-
key)] cator” on page 5-76.
For information on operation for vehicles
equipped with the Free-hand Advanced Secu-
5 rity Transmitter (F.A.S.T.-key), refer to
WARNING
 Never run the engine in a closed or poorly
“Free-hand Advanced Security Transmitter
ventilated area any longer than is needed
(F.A.S.T.-key): Starting and stopping the to move your vehicle out of the area. Car-
engine” on page 5-16. bon monoxide gas, which is odorless and
extremely poisonous, could build up and
[Except for vehicles equipped with the cause serious injury or death.
Free-hand Advanced Security Transmit-
CAUTION ter (F.A.S.T.-key)]
 If the engine is stopped while driving, the CAUTION
power brake booster will cease to function
and braking efficiency will deteriorate. Also,
Tips for starting  Do not push-start the vehicle.
 Do not run the engine at high rpms or drive
the power steering system will not function
 Do not operate the starter motor continu- at high speeds until the engine has had a
and it will require greater manual effort to
ously for longer than 15 seconds as this chance to warm up.
operate the steering.
could run the battery down or damage the  Release the ignition switch as soon as the
 Do not leave the key in the “ON” position for
starter motor. If the engine does not start, engine starts. Otherwise, the starter motor
a long time when the engine is not running.
will be damaged.
Doing so will cause the battery to be dis- turn the ignition switch back to the “OFF”
charged. position, wait a few seconds, and then try
 Do not turn the key to the “START” position again. Trying repeatedly with the engine
when the engine is running, doing so could or starter motor still turning will damage Starting the engine
damage the starter motor. the starter mechanism.
 If the engine will not start because the bat- This model is equipped with an electronically
tery is weak or discharged, refer to controlled fuel injection system. This is a sys-
“Jump-starting the engine” (on page 8-2) tem that automatically controls fuel injection.
for instructions.

Starting the engine

There is usually no need to depress the accel- 2. While depressing the brake pedal {contin-
erator pedal when starting the engine.
NOTE uously variable transmission (CVT)} or
 On vehicles equipped with CVT, the starter
The starter should not be run for more than 15 the clutch pedal (manual transaxle), press
will not operate unless the selector lever is in
seconds at a time. the accelerator pedal halfway and hold it
the “P” (PARK) or “N” (NEUTRAL) posi-
To prevent battery drain, wait a few seconds tion. there, then crank the engine. Release the
between attempts to restart the engine. For safety reasons, start the engine in the “P” accelerator pedal, immediately after the
(PARK) position so that the wheels are engine starts.
1. Make sure all occupants are properly 3. If the engine still will not start, the engine
seated with seat belts fastened.
locked.
could be flooded with too much gasoline.
5
2. Insert the ignition key. While depressing the brake pedal (CVT)
3. Make sure the parking brake is applied. 7. Turn the ignition switch to the “ON” posi-
or the clutch pedal (manual transaxle),
4. Press and hold the brake pedal down with tion and make certain that all warning
push the accelerator pedal all the way
your right foot. lights are functioning properly before
down and hold it there, then crank the
5. Press and hold the clutch pedal all the way starting the engine.
engine for 5 to 6 seconds. Return the igni-
down (manual transaxle). 8. Turn the ignition switch to the “START”
tion switch to the “OFF” position and
position without pressing the accelerator
release the accelerator pedal. Wait a few
NOTE pedal. Release the key when the engine
seconds, and then crank the engine again
 On vehicles equipped with manual transaxle, starts.
for 5 to 6 seconds while depressing the
the starter will not operate unless the clutch brake pedal (CVT) or the clutch pedal
pedal is fully depressed (Clutch interlock). NOTE (manual transaxle), but do not push the
 Minor noises may be heard on engine start-
accelerator pedal. Release the ignition key
up. These will disappear as the engine warms
6. On vehicles equipped with manual trans- if the engine starts. If the engine fails to
up.
axle, place the gearshift lever in the “N” start, repeat these procedures. If the
(Neutral) position. engine still will not start, contact your
On vehicles equipped with continuously local Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair
variable transmission (CVT), make sure
When the engine is hard to start facility of your choice for assistance.
the selector lever is in the “P” (PARK)
position. After several attempts, you may experience
that the engine still does not start.
1. Make sure that all electric devices, such

as lights, air conditioning blower and rear
window defogger, are turned off.

Manual transaxle (if so equipped)
Startability of CVT vehicle with CAUTION

ambient temperature of -4 °F (-20  Do not rest your foot on the clutch pedal
°C) or lower because this will cause premature clutch
wear or damage.
 Do not coast in the “N” (Neutral) position
When the ambient temperature is -4 °F (-20 (illegal in many states).
°C) or lower, it may not be possible to start  Do not use the gearshift lever as a handrest,
from a standstill even with the selector lever
5 in the “D” (DRIVE) or “R” (REVERSE)
because this can result in premature wear of
the transaxle shift forks.
position.
This phenomenon occurs because the trans-
axle has not warmed up sufficiently; it does NOTE
not indicate a problem. If this occurs, place NOTE  If it is hard to shift into 1st, depress the
the selector lever in the “P” (PARK) position  During cold weather, shifting may be diffi- clutch pedal a second time; the shift will then
and let the engine idle for at least 10 minutes. cult until the transaxle lubricant has warmed be easier.
up. This is normal and not harmful to the  To shift into reverse from 5th gear, move the
The transaxle will warm up, and you will be
transaxle. gearshift lever to the “N” (Neutral) position,
able to start normally.
Do not leave the vehicle during warm-up and then shift it into reverse.
operation.  To avoid grinding noises when shifting into
To start reverse, wait approximately 3 seconds with
the clutch pedal depressed when the vehicle
Manual transaxle (if so Press the clutch pedal all the way down and
is stationary.
equipped) shift into 1st or “R” (Reverse) position. Then

gradually release the clutch pedal while
N00512701181
depressing the accelerator pedal. Proper shift points
The shift pattern below is shown on the gear- N00537400065
shift lever. Press the clutch pedal all the way Always use care to change the gear with the
down while shifting gears. CAUTION
vehicle speed matched to the engine speed.
 Do not move the gearshift lever into reverse
while the vehicle is moving forward; doing
Proper shifting will improve fuel economy
so will damage the transaxle. and prolong engine life.

Manual transaxle (if so equipped)

At high altitude locations, upshift as listed Downshifting speed Shift point
CAUTION below.
 Avoid downshifting that may cause the 20 to 30 mph (32 to Shift down from cur-
tachometer pointer to enter the red zone. 48 km/h) rent gear to 3rd gear.
Shift point Upshift speeds
This puts the engine at risk of being dam-
aged. 1st gear to 2nd gear 15 mph (24 km/h)
Driving precautions
2nd gear to 3rd gear 25 mph (40 km/h)
N00513100244
3rd gear to 4th gear 40 mph (64 km/h)
Upshifting  Do not use the gearshift lever as a han-
drest. This can result in premature wear of
5
N00512900131 4th gear to 5th gear 45 mph (72 km/h)
the transaxle shift forks.
For the best fuel economy and performance in
using your manual transaxle, upshift as listed Downshifting
below. Maximum possible driving speed
N00513000096
At low altitude locations, shift at the vehicle It is recommended that you downshift to a
Shift Maximum possible driving
speeds listed. Upshifting earlier during cruise lower gear when needed to maintain the
points speed
conditions (relatively steady speeds) will desired speed, according to the table.
improve your fuel economy. Avoid downshifting at too high a speed. The 1st gear 28 mph (45 km/h)
engine may suffer damage. 2nd gear 53 mph (85 km/h)
Upshift speeds To maintain a safe speed and prolong brake
Shift point 3rd gear 78 mph (125 km/h)
life, shift down to 2nd or 1st when descend-
Acceleration Cruise 4th gear 105 mph (170 km/h)
ing a steep hill.
1st gear to 15 mph 15 mph Downshifting is also important to avoid “lug-
2nd gear (24 km/h) (24 km/h) ging” the engine at too low a speed, such as  The table above shows the maximum rec-
2nd gear to 28 mph 19 mph when turning a corner or when driving up a ommended driving speed for in each gear.
3rd gear (45 km/h) (31 km/h) steep hill. Do not drive near or at these speeds for
3rd gear to 36 mph 33 mph prolonged periods of time.
4th gear (58 km/h) (53 km/h) Recommended downshifting speed
4th gear to 45 mph 45 mph
5th gear (72 km/h) (72 km/h) Downshifting speed Shift point
Under 20 mph Shift down from cur-
(32 km/h) rent gear to 2nd gear.

Continuously variable transmission (CVT) (if so equipped)

the selector lever in the “P” (PARK) position.
Continuously variable To move the selector lever from the “P”
transmission (CVT) (if so (PARK) position to another position, follow
equipped) the steps below.
N00560200050
1. Press and hold the brake pedal down.
The CVT will automatically and continuously 2. Move the selector lever to the desired
position.
5 change its gear ratio depending on road and
driving conditions. This helps achieve
smooth driving and excellent fuel efficiency. NOTE
 The selector lever cannot be moved from “P”
(PARK) to another position if the ignition
DRIVING UPHILL switch is set to the “OFF” or “ACC” posi- Set the selector lever in the gate to
tion, or if the key has been removed, or oper- operate while the brake pedal is
The transmission prevents unnecessary ation mode is in “OFF” or “ACC”, or if the depressed.
brake pedal is not pressed and held down.
upshifts even when the accelerator pedal is Set the selector lever in the gate to
released and ensures smooth driving. operate.
The CVT selects an optimum ratio automati-
cally when the selector lever is in the “D”
DRIVING DOWNHILL WARNING
(DRIVE) position, depending on the speed of
the vehicle and the position of the accelerator  Always press the brake pedal when shift-
According to the conditions, the transmission pedal. ing the selector lever into a selector posi-
will automatically shift to a lower gear ratio tion from the “N” (NEUTRAL) position.
to achieve stronger engine braking. This may When beginning to drive, do not shift the
help reduce your need to use the service selector lever from the “N” (NEUTRAL)
position while pressing the accelerator
brake.
pedal. This will cause the vehicle to
“jump” forward or backward.
Selector lever operation
N00560301087
As an additional safety precaution, models

equipped with a continuously variable trans-
mission have a shift-lock device that holds


If you need to move the vehicle, shift the
NOTE selector lever as follows.
 To prevent mistakes in operating the lever,
make sure you stop briefly at each position. 1. Make sure the parking brake is fully
After operating, check the position in the applied.
multi-information display.
2. Stop the engine if it is running.
 If the brake pedal is not depressed and held,
3. Insert a screwdriver with a cloth over its
the shift-lock device activates to prevent the
tip into the notch (A) of the cover. Pry
selector lever from being moved from the
“P” (PARK) position. gently as shown to remove the cover. 5
 For a shift indicated by in the illustra-
tion, depress the brake pedal before moving
the selector lever. If you attempt to move the
selector lever before depressing the brake Selector lever position display
pedal, the selector lever may not move. N00560400078
When the ignition switch is turned to the

“ON” position or the operation mode is put in
When the selector lever cannot be ON, the selector lever position is shown on
shifted from the “P” (PARK) posi- the multi-information display.
tion
N00563300049 4. Depress the brake pedal with the right
When the selector lever cannot be shifted foot.
from the “P” (PARK) position to another 5. Insert a screwdriver in the shift-lock
position while the brake pedal is pressed and release hole (B). Shift the selector lever to
held down with the ignition switch or the the “N” (NEUTRAL) position while
operation mode in ON, the battery may be flat pressing the screwdriver down.
or the shift-lock mechanism may be malfunc-
tioning.
Immediately have your vehicle checked by an
authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a
repair facility of your choice.

Selector lever positions WARNING “Ds” DOWNSHIFT & SPORTY

N00560601093  Never move the selector lever to the “N” DRIVING
(NEUTRAL) position while driving since
“P” PARK you could accidentally slip it into the “P”
Use when engine braking is needed, or for
(PARK) or “R” (REVERSE) position,
damaging the transmission.
high-power sport drive.
This position locks the transmission to pre-  To prevent the vehicle from rolling when
vent the vehicle from moving. The engine can “L” LOW
5 be started from the “P” (PARK) position.
stopped on a slope, the engine should be
started in the “P” (PARK) position, not in
“N” (NEUTRAL) position.
This position is for driving up very steep hills
“R” REVERSE  To prevent rolling, always keep your foot
and for engine braking at low speeds when
on the brake pedal when the vehicle is in
“N” (NEUTRAL) position, or when shift- driving down steep hills.
Move the lever to this position only after the ing into or out of “N” (NEUTRAL) posi-
vehicle has come to a complete stop. tion. WARNING
 This position can be used for maximum
CAUTION engine braking.
 Never shift into the “P” (PARK) or “R” “D” DRIVE Be very careful not to shift into “L”
(REVERSE) position while the vehicle is in (LOW) suddenly.
motion. If the lever is shifted into the “P” Sudden engine braking may cause the
This position is used for most city and high-
(PARK) or “R” (REVERSE) position while tires to skid.
way driving. The transmission will automati- Select this position according to the road
the vehicle is in motion, the transmission cally and continuously change its gear ratio
may be damaged. conditions and vehicle speed.
depending on road and driving conditions.
“N” NEUTRAL CAUTION

 To prevent transmission damage, never shift
into the “D” (DRIVE) position from the “R”
At this position, the transmission is disen- (REVERSE) position while the vehicle is in
gaged. It is the same as the neutral position on motion.
a manual transaxle and should be used when
the vehicle is not moving for an extended
length of time during driving, such as in a
traffic jam.
When a malfunction occurs in CAUTION Operation of the CVT

the automatic transaxle  If a malfunction occurs in the CVT while N00560801079
driving, the indicator will blink.

N00549500018
In this case, immediately park your vehicle CAUTION
in a safe place and follow these procedures:  Before selecting a position with the engine
When the selector lever position [If the indicator blinks rapidly (once per sec- running and the vehicle stationary, firmly
indicator blinks ond), the CVT fluid is overheating.] depress the brake pedal to prevent the vehi-
N00574601036
When the selector lever position indicator

Park your vehicle in a safe place but do not
turn off the engine. Move the selector lever
cle from creeping.
The vehicle will begin to move as soon as the
5
blinks while you are driving, there could be a to the “P” (PARK) position and open the CVT is engaged, especially when the engine
malfunction in the automatic transaxle system engine hood. Keep the engine, idling. speed or idle speed is high, or with the air
After a while, move the selector lever into conditioning (cooling or heating) operating.
or CVT fluid temperature becomes abnor-
any position other than “P” (PARK) position Do not release the brake pedal until you are
mally high. and confirm that the indicator stops blinking. ready to drive away.
It is safe to continue driving if the indicator  Depress the brake pedal with the right foot at
no longer blinks. all times.
If the indicator continues blinking or blinks Using the left foot could cause driver move-
intermittently, have your vehicle inspected at ment delay in case of an emergency.
an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or  To prevent sudden acceleration, never run
repair facility of your choice. the engine at high rpms when shifting from
[If the indicator blinks slowly (once per 2 the “P” (PARK) or “N” (NEUTRAL).
seconds), the CVT may be operating in fail-
 Operating the accelerator pedal while the
safe mode due to a malfunction.] other foot is resting on the brake pedal will
Have the vehicle inspected at an authorized
affect braking efficiency and may cause pre-
Mitsubishi Motors dealer or repair facility of
mature wear of brake pads.
your choice as soon as possible.
NOTE
 The “A” indicator blinks only if the CVT
selector lever switch is broken.
It is not seen during normal driving.

Service brake
and then move the selector lever to the “P”
CAUTION Waiting
(PARK) position.
 Use the selector lever in the correct shift
position in accordance with driving condi- For short waiting periods, such as at traffic
tions. lights, the vehicle can be left in selector lever When the CVT makes no speed
Never coast downhill backward in the driv- position and held stationary with the service change
ing shift position “D” (DRIVE), “Ds”
brake.
(DOWNSHIFT & SPORTY DRIVING), “L”
For longer waiting periods with the engine If the CVT does not shift while driving, or
5 (LOW) or coast forward in the “R”
(REVERSE) position. running, place the selector lever in the “N” your vehicle does not pick up enough speed
Engine stopping and increased brake pedal (NEUTRAL) position and apply the parking when starting on an uphill slope, it may be
and steering effort could lead to an accident. brake, while holding the vehicle stationary that there is something unusual happening in
 Do not rev the engine with the brake pedal with the service brake. the transmission. Have your vehicle checked
pressed when the vehicle is stationary. Prior to moving off after having stopped the at an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or
This can damage the CVT. vehicle, make sure that the selector lever is in a repair facility of your choice as soon as pos-
Also, when you depress the accelerator pedal “D” (DRIVE) position. sible.
while holding down the brake pedal with the
selector lever in the “D” (DRIVE) position,
the engine revolutions may not rise as high CAUTION Service brake
as when performing the same operation with  To avoid transmission overheating, never try N00517501328
the selector lever in the “N” (NEUTRAL) to keep your vehicle stationary on a hill by
position. using the accelerator pedal. Always apply
the parking brake and/or service brake. Brake pedal
 Do not rev the engine unnecessarily while
Passing acceleration the vehicle is stationary. Unexpected acceler- Overuse of the brake can cause weakening,
ation may occur if the selector lever is in a resulting in poor brake response and prema-
To gain extra acceleration in “D” (DRIVE) position other than “P” (PARK) or “N”
ture wear of the brake pads.
position (when passing another vehicle) push (NEUTRAL).
When driving down a long or steep hill, use
the accelerator to the floor. The CVT will engine braking by moving the selector lever
automatically downshift. to “Ds” (DOWNSHIFT & SPORTY DRIV-
Parking ING) or “L” (LOW) position.
To park the vehicle, first bring it to a com-

plete stop, fully engage the parking brake,

Hill start assist

If the power brake unit or either of the two
WARNING brake hydraulic systems stops working prop-
Brake pad wear alarm
 Do not leave any objects near the brake N00550700124
erly, the rest of the brake system will still
pedal or let a floor mat slide under it; The disc brakes have an alarm that makes a
work, but the vehicle will not slow down as
doing so could prevent the full pedal
quickly. metallic squeal when the brake pads have
stroke that would be necessary in an
You will know this has happened if you find worn down enough to need service.
emergency. Make sure that the pedal can
be operated freely at all times. Make sure you need to press the brake down farther, or If you hear this sound, have the brake pads
harder when slowing down or stopping, or if replaced at an authorized Mitsubishi Motors
the floor mat is securely held in place.
the brake warning light and the warning dis- dealer or a repair facility of your choice. 5
play in the multi-information display come
CAUTION on. Have the brake system repaired at an WARNING
 It is important not to drive the vehicle with authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a  Driving with worn brake pads will make it
your foot resting on the brake pedal when repair facility of your choice immediately. harder to stop, and can cause an accident.
braking is not required. This practice can
result in very high brake temperatures, pre-
mature lining wear, and possible damage to
WARNING
the brakes.  Never coast downhill with the engine OFF. Hill start assist
Keep the engine running whenever your N00562601114
vehicle is in motion. If you turn off the
The hill start assist makes it easy to start off
engine while driving, the power brake
Power brakes booster will stop working and your brakes on a steep uphill slope by preventing the
N00517600436 will not work as well. vehicle from moving backwards. It keeps the
 If the power assist is lost or if either brake brakes applied for about 2 seconds when you
Your vehicle is equipped with power brakes
hydraulic system stops working properly, move your foot from the brake pedal to the
for more braking force with less brake pedal
take your vehicle to an authorized accelerator pedal.
effort.
Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facil-
Your brakes are designed to operate at full
ity of your choice immediately.
capacity, even if the power assist is not being
used.
If the power assist is not being used, the effort
needed to press the brake pedal is greater.
If you should lose the power assist for some
reason, the brakes will still work.

Hill start assist

2. On vehicles with M/T, place the gearshift
CAUTION lever into the 1st position.
NOTE
 Do not overly rely on the hill start assist to • On vehicles with M/T, the gearshift lever is
On vehicles with CVT, place the selector
prevent backwards movement of the vehicle. in the following position.
lever into the “D” (DRIVE) position.
Under certain circumstances, even when hill [When starting an uphill slope forwards.]
start assist is activated, the vehicle may The gearshift lever is in any position other
move backwards if the brake pedal is not suf- NOTE than “R” (Reverse).
ficiently depressed, if the vehicle is heavily  When reversing on an uphill slope, place the (The hill start assist will operate, even if the
gearshift lever or selector lever into the “R”
5 loaded, or if the road is very steep or slip-
pery. position.
gearshift lever is in the “N” (Neutral) posi-
tion.)
 The hill start assist is not designed to keep [When starting an uphill slope backwards.]
the vehicle stopped in place on uphill slopes The gearshift lever is in the “R” (Reverse)
3. Release the brake pedal and the hill start position.
for more than 2 seconds.
assist will maintain the braking force (The hill start assist will not operate when
 When facing uphill, do not rely on using the
hill start assist to maintain a stopped position applied while stopping for approximately the gearshift lever is in the “N” (Neutral)
as an alternative to depressing the brake 2 seconds. position.)
pedal. 4. Depress the accelerator pedal and the hill • On vehicles with CVT, the selector lever is
Doing so could cause an accident. start assist gradually will decrease the in any position other than “P” (PARK) or
 Do not perform the following operation braking force as the vehicle starts moving. “N” (NEUTRAL).
while the hill start assist is operating. • The vehicle is completely stationary, with
[Except for vehicles equipped with the NOTE the brake pedal depressed.
F.A.S.T.-key]  The hill start assist is activated when all of • The parking brake is released.
Turn the ignition switch to the “OFF” or the following conditions are met.  The hill start assist will not operate if the
“ACC” position. accelerator pedal is depressed before the
• The engine is running.
[Vehicles equipped with the F.A.S.T.-key] brake pedal is released.
(The hill start assist will not be activated
Put the operation mode in OFF or ACC. The  The hill start assist also operates when
while the engine is starting or immediately
hill start assist could stop operating, which reversing on an uphill slope.
after the engine is started.)
could result in an accident.  When the hill start assist is activated, you
may feel the operating sound or vibration
from under the body.
To operate This is a normal result of the hill start assist
N00562701115
operation, and does not indicate a problem.
1. Stop the vehicle completely using the
brake pedal.

Brake assist system

If the brake pedal is depressed suddenly, the
Warning indicator brakes will be applied with more force than Anti-lock braking system
N00562800092
usual. N00517900338
If an abnormal condition occurs in the sys- The anti-lock braking system helps prevent
tem, the following indicator will turn on. the wheels from locking up when braking.
CAUTION
This helps maintain vehicle drivability and
 The brake assist system is not a device
- ASC indicator designed to exercise braking force greater steering wheel handling.
than its capacity. Make sure to always keep a 5
sufficient distance between your vehicle and Driving hints
a vehicle in front of you without relying too
CAUTION much on the brake assist system.
 If the warning is displayed, the hill start  When using the anti-lock brakes (sudden
assist will not operate. Start off carefully. braking), steering is slightly different
 Park your vehicle in a safe place and stop the from normal driving conditions. Use the
engine.
NOTE steering wheel carefully.
Restart the engine and check whether the  Once the brake assist system is operational,  Always keep a safe distance from the
indicator goes out, in which case the hill start it maintains great braking force even if the vehicle in front of you. Even if your vehi-
assist is again working normally. brake pedal is lightly released.
cle is equipped with the anti-lock braking
If they remain displayed or reappear fre- To stop its operation, completely remove
your foot from the brake pedal.
system, leave a greater braking distance
quently, it is not necessary to stop the vehicle when:
immediately, but the vehicle should be  When the brake assist system is in use while
driving, you may feel as if the depressed • Driving on gravel or snow-covered
inspected by an authorized Mitsubishi
brake pedal is soft, the pedal moves in small roads.
Motors dealer or a repair facility of your
choice as soon as possible. motions in conjunction with the operation • Driving on uneven road surfaces.
noise, or the vehicle body and the steering  Operation of anti-lock braking system is
wheel vibrate. This occurs when the brake not restricted situations where brakes are
assist system is operating normally and does applied suddenly. This system may also
Brake assist system not indicate faulty operation. Continue to prevent the wheels from locking when
N00567301116 depress the brake pedal. you drive over manholes, steel roadwork
The brake assist system is a device assisting  When the anti-lock brake system warning plates, road markings, or any uneven road
drivers who cannot depress the brake pedal light is illuminated, the brake assist system is
surface.
not functioning.
firmly such as in emergency stop situations
and provides greater braking force.

Anti-lock braking system

 When the anti-lock braking system is in
use, you may feel the brake pedal vibrat-
Anti-lock braking system warn- CAUTION
ing and hear a unique sound. It may also ing light • When the ignition switch is turned to the
“ON” position or the operation mode is put
feel as if the pedal resists being pressed. N00531600674
in ON, the warning light does not come on
In this situation, simply hold the brake or it remains on and does not go off.
pedal down firmly. Do not pump the • The warning light comes on while driving
brake, which will result in reduced
braking performance.
5 If the warning light illuminate
CAUTION while driving
N00531700604
 The anti-lock braking system cannot prevent
accidents. It is your responsibility to take
safety precautions and to drive carefully. If only the anti-lock braking sys-
 To prevent failure of the anti-lock braking tem warning light illuminate
system, be sure all 4 wheels and tires are the
same size and the same type.  Avoid hard braking and high-speed driv-
If there is a malfunction in the system, the ing. Stop the vehicle in a safe place.
anti-lock braking system warning light will Test the system by restarting the engine
NOTE come on. and driving at a speed of about 12 mph
Under normal conditions, the ABS warning (20 km/h) or higher.
 You may feel the operating sound or vibra-
tion from under the body when driving light comes on when the ignition switch is If the warning light then remains off dur-
immediately after starting the engine. This is turned to the “ON” position or the operation ing driving, there is no abnormal condi-
a normal result the anti-lock braking system mode is put in ON and goes off a few seconds tion.
makes when performing a self-check. It does later. However, if the warning light does not
not indicate a problem.
disappear, or if they come on again when
 The anti-lock braking system can be used CAUTION the vehicle is driven, have the vehicle
after the vehicle has reached a speed over
approximately 6 mph (10 km/h). It stops
 Any of the following indicates that the anti- checked by an authorized MITSUBISHI
lock braking system is not functioning and MOTORS dealer or repair facility of your
working when the vehicle slows below 3
only the standard brake system is working. choice as soon as possible.
mph (5 km/h).
(The standard brake system is functioning
normally.) If this happens, take your vehicle
to an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or
a repair facility of your choice.

Electric power steering system (EPS)
If the anti-lock braking system Front Rear WARNING

warning light and brake warning  Do not stop the engine while the vehicle is
light illuminate at the same time moving. Stopping the engine would make
the steering wheel extremely hard to turn,
possibly resulting in an accident.
NOTE 5
 During repeated full-lock turning of the
The anti-lock braking system and brake force
steering wheel (for example, while you are
distribution function may not work, so hard manoeuvring the vehicle into a parking
braking could make the vehicle unstable. space), a protection function may be acti-
Avoid hard braking and high-speed driving. vated to prevent overheating of the power
Stop the vehicle in a safe place and contact an Electric power steering sys- steering system. This function will make the
authorized MITSUBISHI MOTORS dealer or tem (EPS) steering wheel gradually harder to turn. In
repair facility of your choice. this event, limit your turning of the steering
N00568400074
wheel for a while. When the system has
The power steering system operates while the cooled down, the steering effort will return
After driving on icy roads engine is running. It helps reduce the effort to normal.
N00529200080 needed to turn the steering wheel.  If you turn the steering wheel while the vehi-
After driving on snow or icy roads, remove The power steering system has mechanical cle is stationary with the headlights on, the
any snow and ice which may have be left steering capability in case the power assist is headlights may become dim. This behavior
lost. If the power assist is lost for some rea- is not abnormal. The headlights will return to
around the wheels. On vehicles that have an
son, you will still be able to steer your vehi- their original brightness after a short while.
anti-lock braking system, be careful not to
damage the wheel speed sensors (A) or the cle, but you will notice it takes much more
cables located at each wheel. effort to steer. If this happens, have your vehi-
cle inspected at an authorized Mitsubishi
choice.

Active stability control (ASC)
Electric power steering system Active stability control CAUTION

warning light (ASC)  Do not install any aftermarket limited slip
differential (LSD) on your vehicle. The ASC
N00559100176
may stop functioning properly.
The Active stability control (ASC) takes
overall control of the anti-lock braking sys-
tem, traction control function and skid control NOTE
5 function to help maintain the vehicle’s control  An operating sound or vibration may be
and traction. Please read this section in con- emitted from under the body in the following
junction with the page on the anti-lock brak- situations. The sound or vibration is associ-
ing system, traction control function and skid ated with checking the operations of the
control function. ASC. At this time, you may feel a shock
from under the body and the brake pedal if
Anti-lock braking system  P.5-49 you depress it. These do not indicate a mal-
Traction control function  P.5-52 function.
Skid control function  P.5-53 • When the ignition switch is turned to the
If there is a malfunction in the system, the “ON” position or the operation mode is put
warning light will come on. in ON.
Under normal conditions, the warning lamp CAUTION • When the vehicle is driven for a while after
comes on when the ignition switch is turned  Do not over-rely on the ASC. Even the ASC the engine is turned on.
to the “ON” position or the operation mode is cannot prevent the natural laws of physics  When the ASC is activated, you may feel a
put in ON, and goes off after the engine has from acting on the vehicle. This system, like vibration in the vehicle body or hear a whin-
any other system, has limits and cannot help ing sound from the engine compartment.
started.
you to maintain traction and control of the This indicates that the system is operating
vehicle in all circumstances. Reckless driv- normally. It does not indicate a malfunction.
CAUTION ing can lead to accidents. It is the driver’s  When the anti-lock braking system warning
 If the warning light appears while the engine responsibillty to drive carefully, This means light is illuminated, the ASC is not active.
is running, have the vehicle inspected by an taking into account the traffic, road and envi-
authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a ronmental conditions.
repair facility of your choice as soon as pos-  Be sure to use the same specified type and
sible. It may become harder to turn the steer- size of tire on all four wheels. Otherwise, the
Traction control function
N00559200076
ing wheel. ASC may not work properly.
On slippery surfaces, the traction control
function prevents the drive wheels from spin-

Active stability control (ASC)

ning excessive, thus helping the vehicle to deactivate the system by pressing down the
start moving from a stopped condition. It also “ASC OFF” switch for 3 seconds or longer.
NOTE
 When moving out of mud, sand or fresh
provides sufficient driving force and steering When the ASC is deactivated, the indica- snow, pressing the accelerator pedal may not
performance as the vehicle turns while press- tor will turn on. To reactivate the ASC, allow the engine speed to increase. In such
ing the acceleration pedal. momentarily press the “ASC OFF” switch; situations, temporarily turning off ASC with
the “ASC OFF” switch will make it easier to
the indicator is turned off.
CAUTION move out your vehicle.
 When driving a vehicle on a snowy or icy  If you continue to press the “ASC OFF”
switch after the ASC is turned off, the “mis-
5
road, be sure to install snow tires and drive
the vehicle at moderate speeds. taken operation protection function” will
activate and the ASC will turn back on.
Skid control function ASC operation indicator or

N00559300051 ASC OFF indicator
The skid control function is designed to help N00546500118
the driver maintain control of the vehicle on ASC operation indicator

slippery roads or during rapid steering -
The indicator will blink when the
maneuvers. It works by controlling the engine ASC is operating.
output and the brake on each wheel. ASC OFF indicator
CAUTION -
 For safety reasons, the “ASC OFF” switch This indicator will turn on when the
NOTE should be operated when your vehicle is ASC is turned off with the “ASC
 The skid control function operates at speeds stopped. OFF” switch.
of about 9 mph (15 km/h) or higher.  Be sure to keep the ASC on while driving in
normal circumstances.
CAUTION
ASC OFF switch  When indicator blinks, ASC is operating,
N00559400254 NOTE which means that the road is slippery or that
The ASC is automatically activated when the  Using the “ASC OFF” switch turns off both your vehicle’s wheels are beginning to slip.
the stability control function and the traction
ignition switch is turned to the “ON” position If this happens, drive slower with less accel-
control function. erator input.
or the operation mode is put in ON. You can

Cruise control (if so equipped)
NOTE CAUTION Cruise control (if so equipped)

 The indicator may turn on when you start  The system may be malfunctioning. N00518300573
Park your vehicle in a safe place and stop the
the engine. This means that the battery volt-
engine. Cruise control is an automatic speed control
age momentarily dropped when the engine
was started. It does not indicate a malfunc-
Restart the engine and check whether the system that keeps a set speed. It can be acti-
indicator goes out. If they go out, there is no vated at speeds from about 25 mph
tion, provided that the display goes out
abnormal condition. If they do not go out or (40 km/h). Cruise control does not work at
immediately.
5  When a compact spare tire has been put on
appear frequently, it is not necessary to stop
the vehicle immediately, but you should have
speeds below about 25 mph (40 km/h).
your vehicle, the gripping ability of the tire
your vehicle inspected by an authorized
will be lower, making it more likely that the
Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facility CAUTION
indicator will blink. of your choice as soon as possible.  When you do not wish to drive at a set speed,
turn off the cruise control for safety.
 Do not use cruise control when driving con-
ASC warning indicator Towing ditions will not allow you to stay at the same
speed, such as in heavy traffic or on roads
N00546600119 N00546300031
that are winding, icy, snow-covered, wet,
If an abnormal condition occurs in the sys- slippery, on a steep downhill slope.
tem, the following indicator will turn on.
CAUTION
 On vehicles equipped with manual transaxle,
 When towing the vehicle with only the front
do not move the gearshift lever to the “N”
wheels or only the rear wheels raised off the
(Neutral) position while driving at a set
- ASC indicator ground, do not place the ignition switch in
speed without depressing the clutch pedal.
the “ON” position or do not put the operation
- ASC OFF indicator The engine will run too fast and might be
mode in ON. Placing the ignition switch in
damaged.
the “ON” position or putting the operation
mode in ON could cause the ASC to operate,
resulting in an accident.
Note that the correct towing method depends NOTE
on the transmission type and the vehicle’s  Cruise control may not be able to keep your
drive configuration. speed on uphills or downhills.
For details, refer to “Towing” on page 8-12.  Your speed may decrease on a steep uphill.
You may use the accelerator pedal if you
want to stay at your set speed.

NOTE C- RES + switch

 Your speed may increase to more than the set
speed on a steep downhill. You have to use Used to increase the set speed and to return to
the brake to control your speed. As a result, the original set speed.
the set speed driving is deactivated.
D- CANCEL switch
Cruise control switches Used to deactivate the set speed driving.
5
NOTE
 When operating the cruise control switches,
press the cruise control switches correctly. Indicator
The set speed driving may be deactivated
automatically if two or more switches of the
cruise control are pressed at the same time.
2. Accelerate or decelerate to your desired

To activate speed, then press and release the SET -
N00518400385 switch (B) when the indicator is illumi-
1. With the ignition switch is in “ON” posi- nated. The vehicle will then maintain the
A- CRUISE CONTROL ON/OFF switch tion or the operation mode is in ON, press desired speed.
the CRUISE CONTROL ON/OFF switch
Used to turn on and off the cruise control. (A) to turn on the cruise control. The indi-
cator in the meter cluster will come on.
B- SET - switch
Used to reduce the set speed and to set the

desired speed.


To increase your speed in small amounts,
NOTE SET - switch
press the RES + switch for less than about 1
 When you release the SET - switch, the vehi-
second and release it.
cle speed will be set. Press and hold the SET - switch (B) while
Each time you press the RES + switch, your
vehicle will go about 1 mph (1.6 km/h) faster. driving at the set speed, and your speed will
slow down gradually.
To increase the set speed When you reach your desired speed, release
N00518500344
Accelerator pedal the switch. Your new cruising speed is now
5 There are 2 ways to increase the set speed. set.
While driving at the set speed, use the accel-
erator pedal to reach your desired speed and
RES + switch then press the SET - switch (B) and release
the switch momentarily to set a new desired
Press and hold the RES + switch (C) while cruising speed.
driving at the set speed, and your speed will
then gradually increase.
When you reach your desired speed, release
the switch. Your new cruising speed is now
set.
To slow down your speed in small amounts,

press the SET - switch for less than about 1
second and release it.
Each time you press the SET - switch, your
vehicle will slow down by about 1 mph (1.6
km/h).
To decrease the set speed
N00518600273 Brake pedal
There are 2 ways to decrease the set speed.
While driving at the set speed, use the brake
pedal, which disengages the cruise control,


then press the SET - switch (B) and release
the switch momentarily to set a new desired
To deactivate
N00518801634
cruising speed.
The set speed driving can be deactivated as
follows:
 Press the CRUISE CONTROL ON/OFF

switch (A). (Cruise control will be turned
off.) 5
 Press the CANCEL switch (D).
 Depress the brake pedal.
To temporarily decrease the speed
Depress the brake pedal to decrease the

speed. To return to the previously set speed,
To temporarily increase or press the RES + switch (C).
decrease the speed Refer to “To resume the set speed” on page
N00541700056 5-58.
To temporarily increase the speed

The set speed driving is deactivated automati-
Depress the accelerator pedal as you would
cally in any of the following ways.
normally. When you release the pedal, you
will return to your set speed.  When you depress the clutch pedal (on
vehicles equipped with manual transaxle).
 When your speed slows to about 10 mph
(15 km/h) or more below the set speed
because of a hill, etc.
 When your speed slows to about 25 mph
(40 km/h) or less.

Tire pressure monitoring system (if so equipped)

 When the active stability control (ASC) Put the operation mode in OFF or ACC.
starts operating.
To resume the set speed  Indicator is turned OFF.
N00518900306
Refer to “Active stability control (ASC)”
on page 5-52. If the set speed driving is deactivated by the
condition described in “To deactivate” on Tire pressure monitoring
WARNING
page 5-57, you can resume the previously set system (if so equipped)
speed by pressing the RES + switch (C) while N00530201612
 On vehicles equipped with continuously driving at a speed of about 25 mph (40 km/h)
5 variable transmission (CVT), although the
or higher.
The tire pressure monitoring system uses tire
set speed driving will be deactivated when inflation pressure sensors (A) on the wheels
shifting to the “N” (NEUTRAL) position, to monitor the tire inflation pressures. The
never move the selector lever to the “N” system only indicates when a tire is signifi-
(NEUTRAL) position while driving. cantly under-inflated.
You would have no engine braking and
could cause a serious accident.
Also, the set speed driving may be deacti-

vated automatically when the engine speed
rises and approaches the tachometer’s red
zone (the red-colored part of the tachometer
dial).
Under either of the following conditions,

CAUTION however, using the switch does not allow you
 When the set speed driving is deactivated to resume the previously set speed. In these
automatically in any situation other than situations, repeat the speed setting procedure:
those listed above, there may be a system
malfunction.  The CRUISE CONTROL ON/OFF
Press the CRUISE CONTROL ON/OFF
switch is pressed.
switch to turn off the cruise control and have
 [Except for vehicles equipped with the
your vehicle inspected by an authorized
Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facility F.A.S.T.-key]
of your choice. Turn the ignition switch to the “OFF” or
“ACC” position.

WARNING Tire pressure monitoring sys- CAUTION

 The compact spare wheel does not have a tem warning light  If the tire pressure monitoring system warn-
tire inflation pressure sensor. N00532701363
ing light does not illuminate when the igni-
When the spare tire is used, the tire pres- tion switch is turned to the “ON” position or
sure monitoring system will not work the operation mode is put in ON, it means
properly. that the tire pressure monitoring system is
See an authorized Mitsubishi Motors not working properly. Have the system
dealer as soon as possible to replace or
repair the original tire.
inspected by an authorized Mitsubishi
Motors dealer.
5
In such situations, a malfunctioning of the
system may be preventing the monitoring of
NOTE the tire pressure. Avoid sudden braking,
sharp turning and high-speed driving.
 The tire pressure monitoring system is not a
substitute for regularly checking tire infla-  If a malfunction is detected in the tire pres-
tion pressures. sure monitoring system, the tire pressure
Be sure to check the tire inflation pressures monitoring system warning light will blink
When the ignition switch is turned to the for approximately 1 minute and then remain
as described in “Tires” on page 9-12. “ON” position or the operation mode is put in continuously illuminated. The warning light
 The tire inflation pressure sensor (A) is ON, the tire pressure monitoring system will issue further warnings each time the
installed in the illustrated location.
warning light normally illuminates and goes engine is restarted as long as the malfunction
Replace rubber air valve (B) with a new one
when the tire is replaced.
off a few seconds later. exists.
Check to see whether the warning light goes
For details, please contact your authorized
If one or more of the vehicle tires (except for off after few minutes driving.
the spare tire) is significantly under-inflated, If it then goes off during driving, there is no
the warning light will remain illuminated problem.
while the ignition switch or the operation However, if the warning light does not go
mode is in ON. off, or if it blinks again when the engine is
restarted, have the vehicle inspected by an
Refer to “If the warning light illuminates
while driving” on page 5-60 and take the nec- In such situations, a malfunctioning of the
essary measures. system may be preventing the monitoring of
the tire pressure. For safety reasons, when
the warning light appears while driving,
avoid sudden braking, sharp turning and
high-speed driving.


Each tire, including the spare, should be the system is not operating properly. The
checked monthly when cold and inflated to TPMS malfunction indicator is combined
If the warning light illuminates
the inflation pressure recommended by the with the low tire pressure telltale. while driving
vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle placard When the system detects a malfunction, the N00532801540
or tire inflation pressure label. (If your vehi- telltale will flash for approximately one min- 1. If the tire pressure monitoring system
cle has tires of a different size than the size ute and then remain continuously illuminated. warning light illuminates, avoid hard
indicated on the vehicle placard or tire infla- This sequence will continue upon subsequent braking, sharp steering maneuvers and
tion pressure label, you should determine the vehicle start-ups as long as the malfunction high speeds. You should stop and adjust
5 proper tire inflation pressure for those tires.) exists. the tires to the proper inflation pressure as
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has When the malfunction indicator is illumi- soon as possible. Adjust the spare tire at
been equipped with a tire pressure monitoring nated, the system may not be able to detect or the same time. Refer to “Tires” on page
system (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire signal low tire pressure as intended. 9-12.
pressure telltale when one or more of your TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety
tires is significantly under-inflated. of reasons, including the installation of NOTE
Accordingly, when the low tire pressure tell- replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the  When inspecting or adjusting the tire pres-
tale illuminates, you should stop and check vehicle that prevent the TPMS from function- sure, do not apply excessive force to the
your tires as soon as possible, and inflate ing properly. Always check the TPMS mal- valve stem to avoid breakage.
them to the proper pressure. Driving on a sig- function telltale after replacing one or more  After inspecting or adjusting the tire pres-
sure, always reinstall the valve cap on the
nificantly under-inflated tire causes the tire to tires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure that
valve stem.
overheat and can lead to tire failure. the replacement or alternate tires and wheels
Without the valve cap, dirt or moisture could
Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency allow the TPMS to continue to function prop- get into the valve, resulting in damage to the
and tire tread life, and may affect the vehi- erly. tire inflation pressure sensor.
cle’s handling and stopping ability. Please  Do not use metal valve caps, which may
note that the TPMS is not a substitute for cause a metal reaction, resulting in corrosion
proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s and damage of the tire inflation pressure sen-
responsibility to maintain correct tire pres- sors.
sure, even if under-inflation has not reached  Once adjustments have been made, the warn-
the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS ing light will go off after a few minutes of
low tire pressure telltale. driving.
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a

TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when


2. If the tire pressure monitoring system
warning light remains illuminated after
NOTE NOTE
 Do not use an aerosol puncture-repair spray  Tire inflation pressures vary with the ambi-
you have been driving for about 20 min-
on any tire. ent temperature. If the vehicle is subjected to
utes after you adjust the tire inflation pres-
Such a spray could damage the tire inflation large variations in ambient temperature, the
sure, one or more of the tires may have a pressure sensors. tire inflation pressures may be under-inflated
puncture. Inspect the tire and if it has a Have any puncture repaired by an authorized (causing the warning light come on) when
puncture, have it repaired by an autho- Mitsubishi Motors dealer. the ambient temperature is relatively low. If
rized Mitsubishi Motors dealer as soon as
possible. The tire pressure monitoring system may not
the warning light comes on, adjust the tire
inflation pressure.
5
work normally in the following circum-
stances:
WARNING
 If the warning light illuminates while you
Whenever the tires and wheels
 A wireless facility or device using the
are driving, avoid hard braking, sharp same frequency is near the vehicle. are replaced with new ones
steering maneuvers and high speeds.  Snow or ice is stuck inside the fenders N00532900153
Driving with an under-inflated tire
and/or on the wheels. If new wheels with new tire inflation pressure
adversely affects vehicle performance and
can result in an accident.
 The tire inflation pressure sensor’s battery sensors are installed, their ID codes must be
is dead. programmed into the tire pressure monitoring
 Wheels other than Mitsubishi Genuine system. Have tire and wheel replacement per-
CAUTION wheels are being used. formed by an authorized Mitsubishi Motors
 Wheels that are not fitted with tire infla- dealer to avoid the risk of damaging the tire
 The warning light may not illuminate imme-
diately in the event of a tire blowout or rapid tion pressure sensors are being used. inflation pressure sensors. If the wheel
leak.  Wheels whose ID codes are not memo- replacement is not done by an authorized
rized by the vehicle are used. Mitsubishi Motors dealer, it is not covered by
 Compact spare tire is fitted on a road your warranty.
NOTE wheel.
 To avoid the risk of damage to the tire infla-  A window tint that affects the radio wave CAUTION
tion pressure sensors, have any punctured signals is installed.  The use of non-genuine wheels will prevent
tire repaired by an authorized Mitsubishi the proper fit of the tire inflation pressure
Motors dealer. If the tire repair is not done by sensors, resulting air leakage or damage of
an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer, the sensors.
damage to the tire inflation pressure sensor is
not covered by your warranty.

Rear-view camera (if so equipped)
General information Rear-view camera (if so Location of rear-view camera

N00533000236
equipped) The rear-view camera (A) is built-in to the
Your tire pressure monitoring system oper- N00546201268 trunk lid.
ates on a radio frequency subject to Federal
Communications Commission (FCC) Rules When the gearshift lever or the selector lever
(For vehicles sold in U.S.A.) and Industry is in the “R” position with the ignition switch
Canada Rules (For vehicles sold in Canada). or the operation mode is in ON, the rear-view
5 This device complies with part 15 of FCC image will be displayed on the left portion of
Rules and Industry Canada licence-exempt the inside rearview mirror.
RSS standard(s). When the gearshift lever or the selector lever
Operation is subject to the following two con- is shifted out of the “R” position, the rear-
ditions. view image will go off.

ference
WARNING
 Never rely solely on the rear-view camera
to clear the area behind your vehicle.
received, including interference that may Always check visually behind and all CAUTION
cause undesired operation. around your vehicle for persons, animals,  If the camera lens gets dirty, a clear image
obstructions or other vehicles. Failure to cannot be obtained. As necessary, rinse the
WARNING do so can result in vehicle damage, serious lens with clean water and gently wipe with a
injury or death. clean, soft cloth.
 Changes or modifications not expressly
 The rear-view camera is an aid system for  To avoid damaging the camera;
approved by the manufacturer for compli-
backing up, but it is not a substitute for • Do not rub the cover excessively or polish
ance could void the user’s authority to
your visual confirmation. it by using an abrasive compound.
operate the equipment.
 The view on the screen is limited, and • Do not disassemble the camera.
objects outside the view, such as under the • Do not splash hot water directly on the lens.
bumper or around either corner of the • Do not spray the camera and its surround-
bumper, cannot be seen on the screen. ings with high-pressure water.
• Make sure that the trunk lid is securely
closed when backing up.

Rear-view camera (if so equipped)
Reference lines on the screen CAUTION Case 2

 The rear-view camera uses a wide-angle
Reference lines and upper surface of the rear lens. As a result, images and distances shown
bumper (A) are displayed on the screen. on the screen are not exact.
 Actual distance may be different from dis-
 Red line (B) indicates approximately 20 tance indicated by the lines on the screen,
inches (50 cm) behind the rear bumper. depending on the loading condition of the
 Two Green lines (C) indicate approxi-
mately 8 inches (20 cm) outside of the
vehicle and road surface condition.
The reference lines for distance and vehicle A- Actual objects 5
width are based on a level, flat road surface. B- Objects shown on the screen
vehicle body.
 Short transverse lines (1 to 3) indicate dis- In the following cases, objects shown on the
tance from the rear bumper. screen will appear to be farther off than they
actually are. CAUTION
• When the rear of the vehicle is weighed  The reference lines for distance and vehicle
down with the weight of passengers and width are intended to indicate the distance to
luggage in the vehicle. (Case 1) a flat object such as a level, flat road surface.
• When there is an upward slope at the back. They may not indicate correct distance
(Case 2) depending on the shape of an obstacle.
For example, when there is an object behind
the vehicle that has upper sections projecting
Case 1 in the direction of the vehicle, the reference
lines on the screen will indicate that point A
is the farthest point and point B is the closest
point to the vehicle. In reality, point A and B
are actually the same distance from the vehi-
1: Approximately at the rear edge of the cle, and point C is farther off than point A
rear bumper and B.
2: Approximately 39 inches (100 cm)
3: Approximately 79 inches (200 cm) A- Actual objects
B- Objects shown on the screen

Instrument cluster
4. Press the switch until the desired language
To change the language of appears on the display.
warning text (3) Each time you press the switch, the lan-
N00591000025 guage will change to the next one. When
It is possible to change the language of the the warning text flashes, setting is com-
warning messages on the screen. pleted.
5 Instrument cluster
N00519001428
NOTE
 Mirror image is displayed on the screen.
 It is possible to change the display language
of the inside rearview mirror screen.
For details, refer to “Change language or
turn off the inside rearview mirror screen: To
change the language of warning text (3)” on 1. Turn the ignition switch to the “ON” posi-
page 5-64. tion or put the operation mode in ON.
 Under certain circumstances, it may become
difficult to see an image on the screen, even CAUTION 1- Tachometer  P.5-65
when the system is functioning correctly.  For safety reasons, do not perform the fol- 2- Multi-information display  P.5-65
• In a dark area, such as at night. lowing operations with the engine running. 3- Speedometer  P.5-64
• When water drops or condensation are on 4- Multi-information display switch
the lens.
2. Put the gearshift lever or the selector lever
• When sun light or headlights shine directly
in the “R” (REVERSE) position.
into the lens.
3. Press and hold down the switch (1) to Speedometer
enter language selection mode (for 6 to 11 N00519101302
seconds). The speedometer shows the vehicle speed in

In this mode, the image appears and the miles per hour (mph) or kilometers per hour
green indicator (2) comes on. (km/h).

Multi-information display
Type A Type D CAUTION

 The red zone indicates an engine speed
beyond the range of safe operation.
Select the correct shift position (manual
transaxle) or selector position (CVT) to con-
trol the engine speed so that the tachometer
indicator does not enter the red zone.
5
Type B
Tachometer
N00519201332
The tachometer shows engine revolutions per

minute. This allows the driver to determine
the most efficient selector position and engine
speed combinations. Multi-information display
This gauge also assists in evaluating engine N00555001389
performance. The multi-information display includes the

odometer, trip odometer, service reminder,
fuel remaining, selector lever position, aver-
Type C age fuel consumption, driving range, etc.

1- Information display  P.5-67

2- Frozen road warning (if so equipped)
 P.5-70
3- Fuel remaining display  P.5-70
4- Selector lever position display (if so
equipped)  P.5-43
NOTE
 When the ignition switch or the operation
mode is in OFF, the selector lever position
display, fuel remaining display and frozen
road warning are not displayed.

Information display
N00574801054
Each time you lightly press the multi-information display switch (A), the display switches in the following order.
1- Odometer  P.5-68 5- Driving range display  P.5-69 9- Service reminder (month)  P.5-71
2- Trip odometer  P.5-68 6- Average fuel consumption display 
3- P.5-69
Trip odometer  P.5-68
7- Outside temperature display (if so
4- Instrument panel light dimmer control
equipped)  P.5-69
 P.5-68
8- Service reminder (distance)  P.5-71
NOTE
 When the ignition switch or the operation mode is in OFF, the driving range display, average fuel consumption display and outside temperature display are
not displayed.
 While driving, the service reminder is not displayed even if you operate the multi-information display switch.

NOTE
 When the parking lights are not illuminated, the instrument panel light dimmer control is not displayed even if you operate the multi-information display
switch.
Odometer If trip odometer is displayed, only trip

Bright Dim
N00574900016 odometer will be reset.
5 The odometer indicates the total distance the

vehicle has traveled. NOTE
 Both trip odometers and can count
up to 9999.9 miles/kilometers.
Trip odometer When a trip odometer goes past 9999.9
N00575000014
miles/kilometers, it returns to 0.0 miles/kilo-
The trip odometer indicates the distance trav- meters.
eled between two points.  When disconnecting the battery terminal, the
memories of trip odometer displays and 1- Brightness level
Usage examples for trip odometer , trip are cleared, and their displays return to 2- Multi-information display switch
odometer “0.0 miles/kilometers”.
It is possible to measure two currently trav-
eled distances, from home using trip odom- NOTE
Instrument panel light dimmer  When the parking lights are illuminated, you
eter and from a particular point on the
can adjust to 8 levels.
way using trip odometer . control  Each time you reduce two brightness levels,
N00575101025 the segment display of the brightness level
Turn the parking lights on and press the decreases by one segment.
To reset the trip odometer multi-information display switch (2), there is  If you press and hold the switch for longer
a sound and the brightness changes. than about 1 second, the brightness automati-
cally scrolls through its different levels, and
To return the display to 0, hold down the stops scrolling when you release the switch.
multi-information display switch for about 1 Select your desired level of brightness.
second or more. Only the currently displayed
value will be reset.
Example
NOTE NOTE NOTE

 The brightness level of the instruments is  The display setting can be changed to the  Average fuel consumption may vary depend
stored when the ignition switch is turned to preferred units (miles or km). on the driving conditions (road conditions,
the “OFF” position or the operation mode is Refer to “Changing the function settings” on how you drive, etc.).
put in OFF. page 5-72. The actual fuel consumption may differ from
the fuel consumption displayed, so treat the
fuel consumption displayed as just a rough
Driving range display Average fuel consumption dis-
N00575201042
play
guideline.
 Disconnecting the battery cable will erase
5
This displays the approximate driving range N00575300017 from memory the manual reset mode or auto
(how many more miles or kilometers you can reset mode setting for the average fuel con-
This displays the average fuel consumption
drive). When the driving range falls below sumption display.
from the last reset to the present.
approximately 30 miles (50 km), “---” is dis-  The display setting can be changed to the
The reset mode conditions for the average preferred units {mpg, km/L, L/100 km}.
played. fuel consumption display can be switched Refer to “Changing the function settings” on
between “Auto reset” and “Manual reset”. page 5-72.
NOTE For information on how to change the aver-
 The driving range is determined based on the age fuel consumption display setting, refer to
fuel consumption data. This may vary “Changing the function settings” on page Outside temperature display (if
depending on the driving conditions and hab- 5-72. so equipped)
its. Treat the distance displayed as just a N00556501134
rough guideline.
 When you refuel, the driving range display is
NOTE Shows the temperature outside the vehicle.
updated.  The average fuel consumption display can be
However, if you only add a small amount of reset separately in both auto reset mode and
fuel, the correct value will not be displayed. manual reset mode. NOTE
 “---” is displayed when the average fuel con-  The display setting can be changed to the
Fill to a full tank whenever possible.
sumption cannot be measured. preferred units (°F or °C).
 When your vehicle is stopped on an
 The initial (default) setting is “Auto reset Refer to “Changing the function settings” on
extremely steep hill, the driving range value
mode”. page 5-72.
may change. This is due to the movement of
 Depending on factors such as the driving
fuel in the tank and does not indicate any
conditions, the displayed temperature may
breakdown.
vary from the actual outside temperature.

turned to the “ON” position or the operation
Frozen road warning (if so mode is changed to ON.
equipped) When the remaining fuel level runs very low
N00579000041 (no segments displayed), the bar graph
flashes.
If the outside air temperature drops below
If the warning display appears, refuel as soon
approx. 37 °F (3 °C), the alarm sounds and
as possible.
the outside air temperature warning symbol
5 (A) flashes for about 10 seconds.
1- Full
0- Empty
NOTE
 It may take several seconds to stabilize the
display after refilling the tank.
 If fuel is added with the ignition switch or
the operation mode in ON, the remaining
fuel display may incorrectly indicate the fuel NOTE
level.
 On hills or curves, the display may be incor-
CAUTION  The fuel lid mark (A) indicates that the fuel rect due to the movement of fuel in the tank.
 There is a danger the road might be icy, even tank filler door is located on the left side of
when this symbol is not flashing, so please the vehicle. (Refer to “Filling the fuel tank”
take care when driving. on page 3-3.)
CAUTION
 Running out of gas could damage the cata-
lytic converter. If the warning display
Fuel remaining display Fuel remaining warning display appears, refuel as soon as possible.
N00575401031
The fuel remaining display indicates the fuel When the remaining fuel level runs low (one
level in the fuel tank when the ignition switch segment is displayed), the last segment of the
or the operation mode in ON. fuel gauge flashes when the ignition switch is

Service reminder NOTE To reset

N00556701312  Shows the distance in units of 100 miles (100
Displays the approximate time until the next km) and the time in units of 1 month. The “---” display can be reset while the igni-
recommended periodic inspection. “---” is tion switch or the operation mode is in OFF.
displayed when the inspection time has 2. This informs you that a periodic inspec-
arrived. tion is due. Contact an authorized 1. When you lightly press the multi-informa-
Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facil- tion display switch a few times, the infor-
NOTE ity of your choice to have the system mation display switches to the service 5
checked. reminder display.
 The service reminder time can be modified
by an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer, 3. After your vehicle is inspected at an
to adjust for severe usage, etc. Refer to authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer, it
“Severe maintenance schedule” in your vehi- displays the time until the next periodic
cle’s Warranty and Maintenance Manual. For inspection.
further information, please contact your
authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer. NOTE
 When the next periodic inspection is
approaching, the wrench symbol will be dis-
Distance played whenever the ignition switch is
turned from the “OFF” position to the “ON”
position or when the operation mode is
changed from OFF to ON.
The wrench symbol will continuously be dis- 2. Press and hold the multi-information dis-
Month played, even on non-service reminder display switch for about 1 second or more to
plays (odometer, trip meter, etc.), until the make the wrench symbol start flashing. (If
service reminder is reset.
there is no operation for about 10 seconds
When the service reminder resets, the
with flashing, the display will revert to its
wrench symbol will not be displayed until
the next periodic inspection. original indication.)
1. Shows the time until the next periodic

inspection.

3. With this indicator flashing, if you lightly 1. When you lightly press the multi-informa-
press the multi-information meter switch,
NOTE tion display switch a few times, the infor-
 When “---” is displayed, after a certain dis-
the display switches from “---” to mation display switches to the driving
tance and a certain period of time, the dis-
“cLEAr”. After that, the time until the range display.
play is reset and the time until the next
next periodic inspection is shown. periodic inspection is displayed. Refer to “Information display” on page
 If you accidentally reset the display, consult 5-67.
an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer for 2. Each time you press the multi-information
display switch for 1 second or more on
5 assistance.
driving range display, you can switch
reset mode for average fuel consumption.
Changing the function settings (A: Auto reset mode, B: Manual reset
N00556801267
mode)
The “Average fuel consumption reset mode”,
“Fuel consumption unit” and “Temperature
unit” setting can be modified as desired, Auto reset mode Manual reset mode
mode is ON.
CAUTION
 The customer is responsible for making sure
that regular inspections and maintenance and
CAUTION
 The driver should not operate the display
periodic inspections and maintenance are
while the vehicle is in motion.
performed.
Inspections and maintenance must be per-  When operating the system, stop the vehicle
formed to prevent accidents and malfunc- in a safe area.
tions.
Manual reset mode
Changing the reset mode for aver-
 When the average fuel consumption is
NOTE age fuel consumption being displayed, if you hold down the
 The “---” display cannot be reset while the N00575501032
multi-information display switch, these
ignition switch or the operation mode is in You can change the mode condition for the calculations will be reset to zero.
ON.
average fuel consumption display to “Auto  When the following operation is per-
reset” or “Manual reset”. formed, the mode setting changes auto-
matically from manual to auto.

[Except for vehicles equipped with the 3. Press and hold the multi-information dis-
F.A.S.T.-key]
NOTE play switch to switch in sequence from
 The average fuel consumption display can be
Turn the ignition switch to the “ON” posi- “km/L”  “L/100 km”  “mpg” 
reset separately for the auto reset mode and
tion from the “ACC” or “OFF” position. “km/L”.
for the manual reset mode.
[For vehicles equipped with the F.A.S.T.-  Disconnecting the battery cable will erase
from memory the manual reset mode or auto
key]
reset mode setting for the average fuel con-
Change the operation mode to ON from
ACC or OFF.
sumption display.
 The initial (default) setting is “Auto reset
5
mode”.
Auto reset mode
 When the average fuel consumption is Changing the fuel consumption

being displayed, if you hold down the
display unit
multi-information display switch, these
N00557100156
calculations will be reset to zero.
 When the engine switch or the operation The fuel consumption display unit can be
changed. The distance and amount units are NOTE
mode is in the following conditions, the
also switched to match the selected fuel con-  The display units for the driving range, the
average fuel consumption display will average fuel consumption are changed, but
automatically reset. sumption unit.
the units for the indicating needle (speedom-
1. When you lightly press the multi-informa- eter), the odometer, the trip odometer and the
[Except for vehicles equipped with the service reminder will remain unchanged.
F.A.S.T.-key] tion display switch a few times, the infor-
 If the battery is disconnected, the memory of
The ignition switch has been set to the mation display switches to the average
the unit setting is erased and it returns auto-
“ACC” or “OFF” position for about 4 fuel consumption display.
matically to factory setting.
hours or more. Refer to “Information display” on page
5-67.
[For vehicles equipped with the F.A.S.T.- 2. Press and hold the multi-information dis- The distance units is also changed in the fol-
key] play switch for about 5 seconds or more lowing combinations to match the selected
The operation mode has been set to ACC until buzzer sound is heard twice. fuel consumption unit.
or OFF for about 4 hours or more.

Distance
Fuel consumption
(driving range)
km/L km
L/100 km km
mpg mile (s)
5 Changing the temperature unit (if

so equipped)
N00557201183
The temperature display unit can be switched.
1. When you lightly press the multi-informa-

tion display switch a few times, the infor-
mation display switches to the outside
temperature display.
Refer to “Information display” on page
5-67.
2. Each time you press the multi-information
display switch for 5 seconds or more on
outside temperature display, you can
switch from °F to °C or from °C to °F unit
of outside temperature display.
NOTE
 The temperature value on air conditioning
panel is switched in conjunction with outside
temperature display unit of the multi-infor-
mation display.
However, “°F” or “°C” are not shown to tem-
perature display of an air conditioning.

Indicator and warning light package
Indicator and warning light package

N00519801905
1- High beam indicator  P.5-76 9- Low coolant temperature indicator 17- Cruise control indicator (if so
2- Electric power steering system warning (green)  P.5-76 equipped)  P.5-55
light  P.5-51 10- Oil pressure warning light  P.5-78 18- Active stability control (ASC) indica-
3- Tire pressure monitoring system warn- 11- Engine malfunction indicator (“SER- tor/warning light  P.5-53, 5-54
ing light (if so equipped)  P.5-59 VICE ENGINE SOON” or “Check 19- Washer fluid level warning light (if so
4- Turn signal indicators/Hazard warning engine light”)  P.5-77 equipped)  P.5-79
lights  P.5-76 12- Charging system warning light 20- Active stability control (ASC) OFF
5- Front fog light indicator (if so P.5-78 indicator/warning light  P.5-53, 5-54
equipped)  P.5-76 13- Brake warning light  P.5-76 21- Position indicator (if so equipped)
6- Door-ajar warning light  P.5-78 14- Anti-lock braking system warning light P.5-76
7- Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)  P.5-50 22- ECO indicator  P.5-76
warning light  P.4-27 15- Multi-information display  P.5-65 23- For details, refer to “Warning activa-
8- High coolant temperature warning light 16- Driver’s seat belt reminder/warning tion” on page 5-14 (if so equipped)
(red)  P.5-78 light  P.4-10

Indicators
24- For details, refer to “Warning activa-
Front fog light indicator (if so Warning lights
tion” on page 5-14 (if so equipped)
equipped) N00520300147
Indicators
N00520200175
Brake warning light and buzzer

N00519900127 This indicator comes on while the front fog
N00520400526
lights are on.
This light comes on when the ignition switch
Turn signal indicators/Hazard
5 warning lights Position indicator (if so equipped)
is turned to the “ON” position (engine off) or
the operation mode is put in ON.
N00520000216 N00551301049 When the engine is started, the light should
The arrows will flash in time with the corre- go off a few seconds later.
This indicator light illuminates while the
sponding exterior turn signals when the turn The warning light also illuminates after start-
parking lights are on.
signal lever is used. ing the engine under the following condi-
tions.
Both arrows will flash when the hazard warn- Low coolant temperature indi-
ing flasher switch is pressed.  When the parking brake is still applied.
cator - green
 When the brake fluid level is low.
N00575600010
 When the brake system circuit is not
NOTE This indicator comes on in green while the working properly.
 If the indicator flashes faster than usual or if coolant temperature is low.
the indicator stays on without flashing, check
When the vehicle is moving at more than 5
for a malfunctioning turn signal light bulb or
turn signal connection. NOTE mph (8 km/h) and the parking brake applied,
 When the indicator goes out, this should be a buzzer will sound to inform the driver that
used as a rough indication of when the heat- the parking brake is not properly release.
ing starts working.
High beam indicator Before driving, be sure that the parking brake
N00520100086 is fully released and the brake warning light
A blue light comes on when the headlights is off.
ECO indicator
are on high beam. N00568800036
This indicator comes on while fuel-efficient

driving is achieved.

Warning lights
CAUTION Engine malfunction indicator CAUTION

 If the brake warning light and the Anti-lock (“SERVICE ENGINE SOON”  Driving for a long time with the engine mal-
braking system warning light are illuminated function indicator on may cause more dam-
at the same time, the braking force distribu- or “Check engine light”) age to the emission control system. This
tion function will not operate, the vehicle N00520500804
could also affect fuel economy and drivabil-
may be destabilized during sudden braking This indicator is a part of the onboard diag- ity.
under the following conditions. nostic (OBD) system which monitors the  If this indicator does not come on when the
• When the brake warning light does not go
out even when the parking brake is
emissions, engine control system or continu- ignition switch is turned to the “ON” posi-
tion or the operation mode is put in ON, have
5
ously variable transmission (CVT) control
released. the system checked at an authorized
system. If a problem is detected in one of
• When the brake warning light stays on Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facility
these systems, this indicator illuminates or
while driving. of your choice.
flashes. When the ignition switch is turned to
If the above occurs, avoid sudden braking  If the engine malfunction indicator comes on
the “ON” position or the operation mode is while the engine is running, avoid driving at
and high-speed driving. Park the vehicle in a
safe place, and contact an authorized put in ON, this indicator normally comes on high speeds.
Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facility and goes off after the engine has started. During vehicle operation with the indicator
of your choice as soon as possible. on, the vehicle may not accelerate when you
 The vehicle should be brought to a halt in the
This indicator will come on if the fuel tank depress the accelerator pedal.
following manner when brake performance filler cap is not properly tightened. If this When the vehicle is stationary with the indi-
is deteriorated. indicator comes on and stays on after refuel- cator on, you must depress the brake pedal
• Confirm that the vehicle slows down when ing, stop the engine and check that the cap is more firmly than usual since the engine
you press down on the brake pedal harder properly tightened. (Turn the cap clockwise idling speed is higher than usual and a vehi-
than usual. In some cases, the brake pedal until you hear clicking sounds.) cle with a CVT has a stronger tendency to
may go all the way to the floor. If this indicator does not go off after several creep forward.
• Should the brakes fail, use engine braking seconds or lights up while driving, have the
to reduce your speed and slowly apply the system checked as soon as possible at an
parking brake. authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a
Depress the brake pedal to illuminate the repair facility of your choice.
stop lights and to alert the vehicles behind
you.

Warning lights
NOTE Oil pressure warning light CAUTION

 Do not disconnect the battery cable when the N00520700170  If the light comes on during vehicle opera-
engine malfunction indicator (“SERVICE This light comes on when the engine oil pres- tion, it indicates that the engine is possibly
ENGINE SOON” or “Check engine light”) is overheating. Continued driving could make
sure is below normal. If the light stays on
on. the engine fail. Immediately stop the vehicle
while driving, stop the engine as soon as pos-
The engine electronic control module stores in a safe place and take appropriate action.
critical OBD information (especially exhaust sible. Do not run the engine until the cause of (Refer to “Engine overheating” on page 8-4.)
the low oil pressure is corrected.
5 emission data), which may be lost if the bat-
tery cable is disconnected while the engine
malfunction indicator is on. This will make it CAUTION NOTE
difficult to diagnose the cause of future prob-
 If this light comes on when the engine oil  The high coolant temperature warning light
lems.
level is not low, have your vehicle checked at may illuminate when the vehicle has been
an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a driven at high speeds or on hilly roads. This
repair facility of your choice. illuminating does not necessarily indicate a
Charging system warning light  This warning light does not show the amount problem. It should stop if you keep the
N00520600313 of oil in the crankcase. This can only be engine running for a while or continue driv-
determined by checking the oil level with the ing the vehicle.
This light comes on in the event of a malfunc-
dipstick with the engine turned off.
tion in the charging system or when the igni-
tion switch is turned to the “ON” position
(engine off) or the operation mode is put in Door-ajar warning light and
ON. When the engine is started, the light High coolant temperature buzzer
should go out. Check to make sure that the warning light - red N00520901342
light has gone out before driving. N00575700011

This light comes on when any door is open or
This light comes on in red if the coolant tem- not completely closed.
CAUTION perature becomes excessively high. When the vehicle is moving at more than 5
 If the warning light stays on while the engine mph (8 km/h) and any door is open or ajar, a
is running, park your vehicle in a safe place tone will sound 4 times to inform the driver
as soon as possible and contact an authorized that any door is not properly shut.
Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facility
of your choice to have the system checked.
CAUTION
 Before driving, make sure that the door-ajar
warning light is off.

Combination headlights and dimmer switch

The daytime running lights will be illumi-
NOTE nated:
 When the auto cut-out function of the doom
light is been activated, the light goes out
The daytime running lights illumi-
automatically after about 30 minutes. OFF
Refer to “Dome light” on page 5-116. nated
The daytime running lights illumi-
nated
Washer fluid level warning Parking, tail, front and rear side- 5
marker lights, license plate and
light (if so equipped)
instrument panel lights on
N00590300021
Headlights and other lights on
This light comes on when the washer fluid is The combinations of switch operations and
running low. illuminated lights differ in accordance with
the following conditions.
If the light comes on, replenish the container NOTE
with washer fluid. Refer to “Washer fluid” on  Once the daytime running light come on,
Except for vehicles equipped with day-
page 9-9. they do not go out until the ignition switch is
time running lights
turned to the “OFF” or “ACC” position or
the operation mode is changed to OFF or
Combination headlights and OFF All lights off
ACC.
dimmer switch Parking, tail, front and rear side-
N00522501889
marker lights, license plate and
instrument panel lights on [When the engine is not running, or when the
engine is running but the parking brake is not
Headlights Headlights and other lights on released]
Rotate the switch to operate the lights. The engine starts when the lights are off.
Vehicles equipped with daytime running
lights OFF All lights off
[When the engine is started, and the parking Parking, tail, front and rear side-
brake is released] marker lights, license plate and
instrument panel lights on
Headlights and other lights on

Combination headlights and dimmer switch

The operation mode is changed to OFF or
NOTE When you want to keep the lights
ACC and the driver’s door is opened.
 Do not leave the headlights and other lights on:
on for a long period of time when the engine
 If the following operation is performed
is not running. The battery will run down.
with the combination headlights and dim- If the combination headlights and dimmer
 When it rains, or when the vehicle has been
washed, the inside of the lens sometimes mer switch in the “ ” or “ ” position, switch is turned to the “ ” or “ ” posi-
becomes foggy. This is the same as when the lights automatically turn off after tion again after the engine is turned off, the
about 3 minutes. about 3-minute auto-cutout function
5 window glass mists up on a humid day, and
does not indicate a problem. When the light described above will not work. The lights (the
is switched on, the heat will dry out the fog. [Except for vehicles equipped with the parking lights, tail lights and license plate
However, if water collects inside the light, F.A.S.T.-key] lights) will stay on and will not turn off auto-
have it checked by an authorized Mitsubishi The ignition switch is turned to the “OFF” matically.
Motors dealer or a repair facility of your or “ACC” position or the key is removed
choice. from the ignition switch and the driver’s
door is not opened. Headlight reminder buzzer
N00549800226
Light auto-cutout function [For vehicles equipped with the F.A.S.T.- [When using a key to start the engine]
key] If the driver’s door is opened with the key in
(headlights and other lights)
The operation mode is changed to OFF or the “OFF” or “ACC” position or removed
N00532600570
ACC and the driver’s door is not opened. from the ignition switch while the lights are
 If the following operation is performed
with the combination headlights and dim- on, the tone will sound to remind you to turn
NOTE off the lights.
mer switch in the “ ” or “ ” position,
the lights automatically turn off.  The light auto-cutout function can be deacti-
[When using the F.A.S.T.-key to start the
vated.
engine]
[Except for vehicles equipped with the See your authorized Mitsubishi Motors
dealer for details. If the driver’s door is opened with the opera-
F.A.S.T.-key]
tion mode is put in OFF or ACC, or if the
The ignition switch is turned to the “OFF”
operation mode is changed to OFF while the
or “ACC” position or the key is removed
lights are on, the tone will sound to remind
from the ignition switch and the driver’s
you to turn off the lights.
door is opened.
[For vehicles equipped with the F.A.S.T.- In either case, the lights will turn off automat-
key] ically and so will the tone. Or you can turn

Turn signal lever

the light switch to the “OFF” position to stop go back to normal when you let go. While the
the tone. high beam is on, you will see a blue light on
the instrument panel.
Dimmer (high/low beam
change) NOTE
N00549900142
 You can flash the high beams by pulling the
lever toward you, even if the light switch is
To change the headlights from high beam to
low beam and vice versa, pull the turn signal
off. 5
 If you turn the lights off with the head lights
lever to (1). Switch the headlights to low set to high-beam illumination, the headlights
beam as a courtesy whenever there are are automatically returned to their low-beam
oncoming vehicles, or when there is traffic setting when the light switch is next turned
moving ahead of you. An illuminated blue to the “ ” position. NOTE
light in the instrument cluster indicates when  A light in the instrument panel flashes to
the headlights are on high beam. show when the turn signal lights are working
properly.
Turn signal lever If this light flashes faster than usual, check
N00522600519 for a burned out turn signal light bulb or mal-
When changing lanes, or to making a gradual functioning connection in the signal.
turn, hold the lever in the “lane change” posi- If the panel light does not come on when the
lever is moved, check for a blown fuse or a
tion (1). It will return to the neutral position
burned out bulb in the panel.
when you let go. Use the full position (2) Have the system inspected by your autho-
when making a normal turn. The lever will rized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair
return to the neutral position when the turn is facility of your choice.
complete. There may be times when the lever  It is possible to modify functions as follows:
does not return to the neutral position. This • Deactivate the turn signal light 3-flash
usually happens when the steering wheel is function for lane changes.
turned only slightly. You can easily return the • Adjust the time required to operate the
lever by hand. lever for the 3-flash function.
Headlight flasher Also, when you move the lever to (1) slightly • Changing of the tone of a sounding buzzer
N00550000185 then release it, the turn signal lights and the as the turn signal lights flash.
You can flash the high beams by pulling the indicator light in the instrument cluster will
lever gently toward you (2). The lights will flash three times.

Hazard warning flasher switch

See your authorized Mitsubishi Motors
dealer for details. Front fog light switch (if so NOTE
 If the light switch is rotated to the “OFF” or
equipped)
“ ” position while the front fog lights are
Hazard warning flasher N00522800393
illuminated, they will automatically turn off.
switch The front fog lights illuminate only when the They can be turned back on again by rotating
the combination headlights and dimmer
N00522700318 headlights are on low beam.
Turning the knob in the direction of the “ON” switch back to “ ” position, and turning
5 position turns on the front fog lights as well the knob in the direction of the “ON” posi-
as the indicator in the instrument cluster. To tion.
turn them off, turn the knob in the direction of  Do not use fog lights except in conditions of
fog, otherwise excessive light glare may
temporarily blind oncoming vehicle drivers.
The knob will return to the neutral position
when it is released.
Wiper and washer switch
N00523001748
CAUTION
If you press the flasher switch, the turn sig-  If the washer is used in cold weather, the
nals will flash intermittently, and so will the washer fluid sprayed against the glass may
hazard warning lights. This is an emergency freeze, which may hinder visibility. Warm
warning system and should not be used when the glass with the defroster before using the
washer.
the vehicle is in motion, except for emergen-
cies.
If you need to leave your vehicle, the flashers
will keep working after the ignition switch is Windshield wipers
removed or the operation mode is put in OFF.
NOTE The windshield wiper and washer can be
 If the headlights are switched to high beam,
NOTE operated with the ignition switch or the oper-
the front fog lights will go out; they will illu-
 If the flashers are used for several hours, the ation mode is in ON or ACC.
minate again when the headlights are
battery will run down. This could make it switched back to low beam. If the blades are frozen to the windshield, do
difficult or impossible to restart your vehicle. not operate the wipers until the ice has melted

Wiper and washer switch

and the blades are freed, otherwise the wiper
motor may be damaged.
A
1- Fast
2- Slow
Windshield washer
MIST- Misting function N00504600298
The wipers will operate once. NOTE To turn on the windshield washer, pull the
OFF- Off  The speed-sensitive-operation function of lever toward you with the ignition switch or
INT- Intermittent (Speed sensitive) the windshield wipers can be deactivated. the operation mode is in ON or ACC.
LO- Slow For further information, please contact your The wipers will wipe automatically several
HI- Fast authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a
times when the washer fluid is sprayed.
To turn off the spray, release the lever.
To adjust intermittent intervals Misting function
With the lever in the “INT” (speed sensitive The misting function can be used when the
intermittent operation) position, the intermit- ignition switch or the operation mode is in
tent intervals can be adjusted by turning the ON or ACC.
knob (A). The wipers will operate once if the wiper
lever is raised to the “MIST” position and
released. This operation is useful when it is
drizzling, etc. The wipers will continue to
operate while the lever is held in the “MIST”
position.

Electric rear window defogger switch
Precautions to observe when NOTE Type 1

using wipers and washers  Avoid using the washer for more than 20 sec-
N00523501349
onds at a time. Do not operate the washer
when the washer fluid reservoir is empty or
CAUTION the pump may fail.
 During cold weather, add a recommended
 If the washer is used in cold weather, washer
fluid sprayed onto the glass might freeze, washer solution that will not freeze in the
5 blocking your view. Heat the glass with the
washer fluid reservoir. Otherwise the washer
may not work or may be damaged.
defroster before using the washer.
 Replace the wiper blades when they are
worn. Use the proper size replacement
blades. For further information, please con-
NOTE tact your authorized Mitsubishi Motors Type 2
 Do not use the wipers when the windshield is dealer.
dry. This could scratch the glass and wear the
wiper blades prematurely.
 Before using the wipers in cold weather, Electric rear window defog-
check to be sure that the wiper blades are not
frozen to the windshield. Using the wipers
ger switch
N00523701484
while the blades are frozen could cause the
wiper motor to burn out. The rear window defogger can be used when
 If the moving wipers become blocked part- the engine is running.
way through a sweep by ice or other deposits The indicator light (A) will come on when
on the glass, the wipers may temporarily stop you press the electric rear window defogger
operating to prevent the motor from over- After about 20 minutes of operation, the sys-
switch. Electric current will flow through the
heating. In this case, park the vehicle in a tem will shut off automatically.
heating wires on the rear window to help
safe place, turn the ignition switch to the To switch the defogger OFF before 20 min-
clear away moisture or frost.
“OFF” position or put the operation mode in utes have passed, press the switch again. The
OFF, and then remove the ice or other depos- indicator light will go out and the defogger
its. will turn off.
Because the wipers will start operating again If you need the defogger for more than 20
after the wiper motor cools down, check that minutes, press the switch again. This will add
the wipers operate before using them.
20 more minutes.

Horn switch
CAUTION Refer to “To play tracks from a Bluetooth®

device” on page 7-37.
 The rear window defogger is not designed to
melt snow. Remove any snow manually
before using the rear window defogger. Bluetooth® is a registered trademark of
 Use the rear window defogger only after the BLUETOOTH SIG, INC.
engine has started and is running. Be sure to
turn the defogger switch off immediately
Link System End User License
after the window is clear to save on battery
power. Agreement 5
 Do not place stickers, tape, or other items N00563801083
that are attached with adhesive over the grid You have acquired a device that includes soft-
wires on the rear window. ware licensed by Mitsubishi Motors Corpora-
 When cleaning the inside rear window, use a tion from Visteon Corporation, and their
soft cloth and wipe lightly over the grid Link System (if so equipped) subsequent 3rd party suppliers. For a com-
wires. N00563701167
plete list of these 3rd party products and their
The Link System takes control of the devices end user license agreements, please go to the
following website.
NOTE connected via the USB input terminal or the
http://www.jciblueconnect.com/faq/fulldis-
 If your vehicle is equipped with heated mir- Bluetooth® 2.0 interface allowing the con-
closure.pdf
rors, mist can also be removed from the out- nected devices to be operated by using the
side rearview mirrors when the rear window switches in the vehicle or voice commands.
defogger switch is pressed. (Refer to “Door See the following section for details on how Bluetooth® 2.0 interface (if so
mirror heater” on page 5-37.) to operate. equipped)
Refer to “Bluetooth® 2.0 interface” on page
N00563901316
Horn switch 5-85. The Bluetooth® 2.0 interface allows for mak-
N00523800185 Refer to “USB input terminal” on page 5-105. ing/receiving hands-free calls in the vehicle
Refer to “To play tracks from USB device” using a cellular phone compatible with a
To honk the horn, press around the “ ” mark
on page 7-29. wireless communication technology com-
on the steering wheel.
Refer to “To play iPod tracks via voice opera-
tion” on page 7-31. monly known as Bluetooth®. It also allows
the user to play music, saved in a Bluetooth®
music player, through the vehicle’s speakers.

Bluetooth® 2.0 interface (if so equipped)

The system is equipped with a voice recogni-
tion function, which allows you to make
NOTE NOTE
 For vehicles equipped with the F.A.S.T.-key,  For detail of the Bluetooth® 2.0 interface,
hands-free calls by simple switch and voice
if the operation mode is left in ACC, the refer to the following website:
command operations using a defined voice
accessory power will automatically turn off [For vehicles sold in U.S.A.]
tree. after a certain period of time and you will no You can access the Mitsubishi Motors North
longer be able to use the Bluetooth® 2.0 America website.
The Bluetooth® 2.0 interface can be used interface. The accessory power comes on [For vehicles sold in Canada]
5 mode is in ON or ACC.
again if the engine switch is operated.
Refer to “ACC power auto-cutout function”
You can access the Mitsubishi Motors web-
site.
on page 5-14. Please read and agree to the “Warning about
Before you can use the Bluetooth® 2.0 inter-  The Bluetooth® 2.0 interface cannot be used Links to the Web Sites of Other Companies”,
face, you must pair the Bluetooth® device the websites mentioned above may connect
if the Bluetooth® device has a dead battery
you to websites other than the Mitsubishi
and Bluetooth® 2.0 interface. Refer to “Con- or the device power is turned off.
Motors website.
necting the Bluetooth® 2.0 interface and  Hands-free calls will not be possible if your http://www.mitsubishi-motors.com/en/prod-
phone does not have service available. ucts/index.html
Bluetooth® device” on page 5-91.
 If you place the Bluetooth® device in the  Software updates by cellular phone/digital
cargo area, you may not be able to use the audio device manufacturers may
Bluetooth® is a registered trademark of
Bluetooth® 2.0 interface. change/alter device connectivity.
BLUETOOTH SIG, INC.
 Some Bluetooth® devices are not compatible
Steering control switch and microphone 
with the Bluetooth® 2.0 interface.
WARNING  You can confirm the Link System software
P.5-87
 Although the Bluetooth® 2.0 interface Voice recognition function  P.5-88
version by pressing the HANG-UP button 3
allows you to make hands-free calls, if you Useful voice commands  P.5-89
times (press and hold 2 times and then press
choose to use the cellular phone while briefly) within 10 seconds. Speaker enrollment function  P.5-90
driving, you must not allow yourself to be Connecting the Bluetooth® 2.0 interface and
distracted from the safe operation of your
the Bluetooth® device  P.5-91
vehicle. Anything, including cellular
phone usage, that distracts you from the Operating a music player connected via Blue-
safe operation of your vehicle increases tooth®  P.5-96
your risk of an accident. How to make or receive hands-free calls 
 Refer to and comply with all state and P.5-96
local laws in your area regarding cellular Phonebook function  P.5-98
phone usage while driving.


• In such circumstances, you can press the
Steering control switch and Volume down button
button briefly to switch between callers.
microphone You will switch to the first caller and the
N00564000072 Press this button to decrease the volume. other caller will be put on hold.
• To establish a three-way call in such situ-
SPEECH button ations, press the SPEECH button to enter
voice recognition mode and then say
 Press this button to change to voice recog- “Join calls.”
nition mode. 5
While the system is in voice recognition
mode, “Listening” will appear on the
HANG-UP button
audio display.  Press this button when an incoming call is
 If you press the button briefly while in received to refuse the call.
voice recognition mode, it will interrupt  Press this button during a call to end the
prompting and allow voice command current call.
input. When another call is on hold, you will
Pressing the button longer will deactivate switch to that call.
the voice recognition mode.  If this button is pressed in the voice recog-
1- Volume up button  Pressing this button briefly during a call nition mode, the voice recognition mode
2- Volume down button will enable voice recognition and allow will be deactivated.
3- SPEECH button voice command input.
4- PICK-UP button
5- HANG-UP button NOTE
PICK-UP button
6- Microphone  When you press the SPEECH button to enter
voice recognition mode with a cellular phone
 Press this button when an incoming call is
paired to the system, current information on
received to answer the telephone.
the cellular phone, such as “remaining bat-
Volume up button  When another call is received during a tery life,” “signal strength” or “roaming,”
call, press this button to put the first caller will be displayed on the audio display.*
Press this button to increase the volume. on hold and talk to the new caller. *: Some cellular phones will not send this
information to the Bluetooth® 2.0 interface.


American Spanish, Canadian French and Jap- 4. The voice guide will say “Select a lan-
NOTE anese. The factory setting is “English.” guage: English, Spanish, French or Japa-
 Call waiting and three-way calls can be used
nese.” Say the desired language.
by the Bluetooth® 2.0 interface, only if it is (Example: “English”)
possible to use those services with your cel- NOTE
 If the voice command that you say differs
5. The voice guide will say “English (Span-
lular phone.
from the predefined command or cannot be ish, French or Japanese) selected. Is this
recognised due to ambient noise or some correct?” Say “Yes.”
Microphone If you say “No,” the system will return to
5 other reason, the Bluetooth® 2.0 interface
Step 4.
will ask you for the voice command again up
Your voice will be recognized by a micro- to 3 times.
phone in the overhead console, allowing you  For best performance and further reduction NOTE
to make hands-free calls with voice com- of ambient noise, the vehicle windows  The voice guide will repeat the same mes-
mands. should be closed, lower the blower speed and sage twice. The first message is in the cur-
refrain from conversation with your passen- rent language, and the second message is in
gers while engaging the voice recognition the selected language.
NOTE function.  If many entries are registered in the vehicle
 If a cellular phone is within close proximity  Some voice commands have alternative phonebook, changing the language will take
of the microphone, it may distort the sound commands. a longer time.
quality. In this case, place the cellular phone  Depending on the selected language, some  Changing the language deletes the mobile
as far as possible from the microphone. functions may not be available. phonebook imported to the Bluetooth® 2.0
 Language can be changed by using the audio interface. If you wish to use it, you will have
control panel besides the following proce- to import it again.
Voice recognition function dure.
N00564100086 For details, refer to “To change the language
(vehicles with Bluetooth® 2.0 interface)” on 6. When the voice guide says “English
The Bluetooth® 2.0 interface is equipped page 7-27. (Spanish, French or Japanese) selected,”
with a voice recognition function. the language change process will be com-
Simply say voice commands and you can per- pleted and the system will return to the
form various operations and make or receive Selecting the language main menu.
hands-free calls.
1. Press the SPEECH button.
With the Bluetooth® 2.0 interface, voice rec- 2. Say “Setup.”
ognition is possible for US English, North 3. Say “Language.”


With the confirmation function activated, you
Useful voice commands are given more opportunities than normal to
Setting the passcode
N00564200016
confirm a command when making various Use the following procedure to turn on the
settings to the Bluetooth® 2.0 interface. This security function by setting a passcode.
Help function
allows you to decrease the possibility that a
N00564300017
setting is accidentally changed. 1. Press the SPEECH button.
The Bluetooth® 2.0 interface is equipped The confirmation function can be turned on 2. Say “Setup.”
3. Say “Passcode.”
with a help function.
If you say “Help” when the system is waiting
or off by following the steps below.
4. The voice guide will say “Passcode is dis- 5
for a voice command input, the system will 1. Press the SPEECH button. abled. Would you like to enable it?”
tell you a list of the commands that can be 2. Say “Setup.” Answer “Yes.”
used under the circumstances. 3. Say “Confirmation prompts.” Answer “No” to cancel the setting of the
4. The voice guide will say “Confirmation passcode and return to the main menu.
prompts are <on/off>. Would you like to 5. The voice guide will say “Please say a 4-
Canceling turn confirmation prompts <off/on>.” digit passcode. Remember this passcode.
N00564401073
Answer “Yes” to change the setting or It will be required to use this system.”
There are 2 cancel functions. answer “No” to keep the current setting. Say a 4-digit number which you want to
If you are at the main menu, say “Cancel” to 5. The voice guide will say “Confirmation set as a passcode.
exit from the Bluetooth® 2.0 interface. prompts are <off/on>” and then the sys- 6. For confirmation purposes, the voice
If you are anywhere else within the system, tem will return to the main menu. guide will say “Passcode <4-digit pass-
say “Cancel” to return to the main menu. code>. Is this correct?” Answer “Yes.”
Security function Answer “No” to return to the passcode
NOTE N00564600023
input in Step 5.
7. When the registration of the passcode is
 You can return to the previous menu by say- It is possible to use a passcode as a security
ing “Go Back.” completed, the voice guide will say “Pass-
function by setting a passcode of your choice code is enabled” and the system will
for the Bluetooth® 2.0 interface. return to the main menu.
When the security function is turned on, it is
Confirmation function setting necessary to make a voice input of a 4-digit
N00564500019
passcode in order to use all functions of the NOTE
The Bluetooth® 2.0 interface is equipped  Passcode will be required to access the sys-
Bluetooth® 2.0 interface, except for recep- tem after the next ignition cycle.
with a confirmation function. tion.


You can turn a voice model registered with
NOTE Disabling the passcode
the speaker enrollment function on and off
 It is required for a little time after engine
Use the following procedure to turn off the whenever you want.
stop that the entered passcode is actually
recorded in the system. security function by disabling the passcode.
If the ignition switch or the operation mode Speaker enrollment
is made to ACC or ON or the engine is NOTE N00564800038
started immediately after engine stop, there
 System must be unlocked to disable the pass- It takes about 2 to 3 minutes to complete the
5 is a case when the entered passcode is not
recorded in the system. At this time, please
code. speaker enrollment process.
try to enter the passcode again. To ensure the best results, run through the
1. Press the SPEECH button. process while in the driver’s seat, in an envi-
Entering the passcode 2. Say “Setup.” ronment that is as quiet as possible (when
3. Say “Passcode.” there is no rain or strong winds and the vehi-
If a passcode has been set and the security 4. The voice guide will say “Passcode is cle windows are closed). Please turn off your
function is enabled, the voice guide will say enabled. Would you like to disable it?” phone while in speaker enrollment to prevent
“Hands-free system is locked. State the pass- Answer “Yes.” interruption of the process.
code to continue” when the SPEECH button Answer “No” to cancel the disabling of Use the following procedure for speaker
is pressed to enter voice recognition mode. the passcode and return to the main menu. enrollment.
Say the 4-digit passcode number to enter the 5. When the disabling of the passcode is
passcode. 1. Stop your vehicle in a safe area, put the
completed, the voice guide will say “Pass- gearshift lever in the “N” (Neutral) posi-
If the entered passcode is wrong, the voice code is disabled” and the system will
guide will say “<4-digit passcode>, Incorrect tion (manual transaxle), or the selector
return to the main menu. lever in the “P” (PARK) position (contin-
passcode. Please try again.” Enter the correct
passcode. uously variable transmission (CVT)), and
Speaker enrollment function pull the parking brake lever.
NOTE N00564700011
NOTE
 You can reenter the passcode as many times The Bluetooth® 2.0 interface can use the
 Speaker enrollment is not possible unless the
as you want. speaker enrollment function to create a voice
vehicle is parked. Make sure you park the
 If you have forgotten your passcode, say model for one person per language. vehicle in a safe area before attempting
“Cancel” to quit the voice input mode and This makes it easier for the Bluetooth® 2.0 speaker enrollment.
then check with an authorized Mitsubishi
interface to recognise voice commands said
Motors dealer.
by you.


3. Say “Voice training.” 2. Say “Voice training.”
4. The voice guide will say “This operation
NOTE 3. If you have completed a speaker enroll-
 To repeat the most recent voice training com-
must be performed in a quiet environment ment process once already, the voice
mand, press and release the SPEECH button.
while the vehicle is stopped. See the guide will say either “Enrollment is
 If you press the HANG-UP button anytime
owner’s manual for the list of required enabled. Would you like to disable or
during the process, the system will beep and
training phrases. Press and release the stop the speaker enrollment process. retrain?” or “Enrollment is disabled.
SPEECH button when you are ready to Would you like to enable or retrain?”
begin. Press the HANG-UP button to can- 4. When enrollment is “enabled,” the voice
cel at any time.” 6. When all enrollment commands have model is on; when enrollment is “dis-
5
Press the SPEECH button to start the been read out, the voice guide will say abled,” the voice model is off. Say the
speaker enrollment process. “Speaker enrollment is complete.” The command that fits your needs.
system will then end the speaker enroll- Say “Retrain” to start the speaker enroll-
ment process and return to the main
NOTE ment process and recreate a new voice
menu. model. (Refer to “Speaker enrollment” on
 If you do not start the speaker enrollment
process within 3 minutes after pressing the page 5-90.)
SPEECH button, the speaker enrollment NOTE
function will time out.  Completing the speaker enrollment process
The voice guide will say “Speaker enroll- will turn on the voice model automatically. Connecting the Bluetooth® 2.0
ment has timed out.” The system will then  The commands “Help” and “Cancel” will not interface and Bluetooth® device
beep and the voice recognition mode will be work in this mode. N00565001366
deactivated.
Before you can make or receive hands-free
Enabling and disabling the voice calls or play music using the Bluetooth® 2.0
5. The voice guide will prompt for phrase 1. interface function, you must pair the Blue-
Repeat the corresponding phrase listed in model and retraining
tooth® device and Bluetooth® 2.0 interface.
table “Enrollment commands” on page N00564900055
5-105. You can turn a voice model registered with

The system will register your voice and the speaker enrollment function on and off
then move on to the registration of the whenever you want.
next command. Continue the process until You can also retrain the system.
all phrases have been registered. Use the following procedure to perform these
actions.


1. Stop your vehicle in a safe area, put the
NOTE gearshift lever in the “N” (Neutral) posi-
NOTE
 Pairing is required only when the device is  If 7 devices have already been paired, the
tion (manual transaxle), or the selector
used for the first time. Once the device has voice guide will say “Maximum devices
lever in the “P” (PARK) position (contin-
been paired with the Bluetooth® 2.0 inter- paired” and then the system will end the
uously variable transmission (CVT)), and pairing process. To register a new device,
face, all you need is to bring the device into
pull the parking brake lever. delete one device and then repeat the pairing
the vehicle next time and the device will
process.
connect to the Bluetooth® 2.0 interface auto-
NOTE
5 matically (if supported by the device). The
(Refer to “Selecting a device: Deleting a
device” on page 5-93.)
device must have Bluetooth® turned ON to  You cannot pair any Bluetooth® device with
connect. the Bluetooth® 2.0 interface unless the vehi- 4. The voice guide will say “Start pairing
cle is parked. Before pairing a Bluetooth® procedure on the device. See the device
device with the Bluetooth® 2.0 interface, manual for instructions.” and then will
Up to 7 Bluetooth® devices can be paired confirm that the vehicle is parked in a safe say “The pairing code is <pairing code>.”
with the Bluetooth® 2.0 interface. location.
If multiple paired Bluetooth® devices are NOTE
available in the vehicle, the cellular phone or 2. Press the SPEECH button.  Some Bluetooth® devices require a specific
music player most recently connected is auto- 3. Say “Pair Device.” pairing code. Please refer to the device man-
matically connected to the Bluetooth® 2.0 ual for pairing code requirements and read
the next section “If your device requires a
interface. NOTE specific pairing code” on page 5-93 to set the
 The following procedure ( to ) can also pairing code.
You can also change a Bluetooth® device to be used instead of saying “Pair Device.”  The pairing code entered here is only used
be connected. Replace this step 3 with the following proce-
for the Bluetooth® connection certification.
dure if you prefer.
Depending on the connection settings of the
To pair Say “Setup.”
Bluetooth® device, this code may have to be
Say “Pairing Options.” entered each time you connect the Blue-
The voice guide will say “Select one of tooth® device to the Bluetooth® 2.0 inter-
To pair a Bluetooth® device with the Blue-
the following: pair, edit, delete, list or set face. For the default connection settings,
tooth® 2.0 interface, follow the steps below. code.” refer to the instructions for the device.
Say “Pair.”


5. Enter in the Bluetooth® device the 4-digit 7. The voice guide will say “Pairing code set
NOTE to <pairing code>.”
number that has been read out in Step 4.  When the confirmation function is on, after
When the confirmation function is on, the
repeating the device tag you have said, the
NOTE voice guide will ask “Is this correct?”
system will confirm whether the number
said is acceptable. Answer “Yes.”
 Depending on the Bluetooth® device, it may Answer “Yes.”
take a few minutes to pair it with the Blue- To change the device tag, answer “No” and Answer “No,” the system will return to
then say the device tag again. Step 6.
tooth® 2.0 interface.
8. The voice guide will say “Do you want to
 If the Bluetooth® 2.0 interface cannot recog- pair a device now?” Answer “Yes,” the
5
nize the Bluetooth® device, the voice guide 7. The voice guide will say “Pairing Com- system will proceed to Step 3 in the pair-
will say “Pairing has timed out” and the pair- plete. Would you like to import the con- ing process. Refer to the previous section
ing process will be cancelled. tacts from your mobile device now?” “To pair.”
Confirm that the device you are pairing sup- Answer “Yes,” and the voice guide will
ports Bluetooth®, and try pairing it again. say “Please wait while the contacts are
 If you enter the wrong number, the voice imported. This may take several minutes.” Selecting a device
guide will say “Pairing failed” and the pair- Answer “No” to end the pairing process. N00565100025
ing process will be cancelled. If multiple paired Bluetooth® devices are

Confirm the number is right, and try pairing
If your device requires a specific pairing available in the vehicle, the cellular phone or
it again.
If your device requires a specific pairing code music player most recently connected is auto-
code, you need to set the pairing code. Refer matically connected to the Bluetooth® 2.0
to the device manual for pairing code If your device requires a specific pairing interface.
requirements and read the next section “If code, you need to set the pairing code. Follow You can connect to the other paired cellular
your device requires a specific pairing code” the procedures below. phone or music player by following setting
on page 5-93. change procedures.
2. Say “Setup.”
6. The voice guide will say “Please say the 3. Say “Pairing Options.” To select a cellular phone
name of the device after the beep.” You 4. Say “Set Code.”
can assign a desired name for the Blue- 1. Press the SPEECH button.
5. The voice guide will say “Do you want
2. Say “Setup.”
tooth® device and register it as a device the pairing code to be random or fixed?”
3. Say “Select phone.”
tag. Say the name you want to register Say “Fixed.”
after the beep. 6. The voice guide will say “Please say a 4-
digit pairing code.” Say a 4-digit number.


4. After the voice guide says “Please say,” The voice guide will say “<device tag>
To select a music player
the numbers of the cellular phones and selected” and then the system will return
device tags of corresponding cellular 1. Press the SPEECH button. to the main menu.
phones will be read out in order, starting 2. Say “Setup.”
with the cellular phone that has been most 3. Say “Select music player.” Deleting a device
recently connected. 4. After the voice guide says “Please say,”
Say the number of the cellular phone that the numbers of the music players and Use the following procedure to delete a
you want to connect to.
5 When the confirmation function is on, the
device tags of corresponding music play-
ers will be read out in order, starting with
paired Bluetooth® device from the Blue-
tooth® 2.0 interface.
system will ask you again whether the the music player that has been most
phone that you want to connect to is cor- recently connected. 1. Press the SPEECH button.
rect. Answer “Yes” to continue and con- Say the number of the music player that 2. Say “Setup.”
nect to the cellular phone. you want to connect to. 3. Say “Pairing Options.”
Answer “No,” and the voice guide will When the confirmation function is on, the 4. The voice guide will say “Select one of
say “Please say.” Say the number of the system will ask you again whether the the following: pair, edit, delete, or list.”
phone that you want to connect to. music player that you want to connect to Say “Delete.”
is correct. Answer “Yes” to continue and 5. After the voice guide says “Please say,”
NOTE connect to the music player. the numbers of the devices and device
 You can connect to a phone at any time by Answer “No,” and the voice guide will tags of corresponding devices will be read
pressing the SPEECH button and saying the say “Please say.” Say the number of the out in order, starting with the device that
number, even before all of the paired num- music player that you want to connect to. has been most recently connected. After it
bers and device tags of corresponding cellu-
completes reading all pairs, the voice
lar phones are read out by the system.
NOTE guide will say “or all.”
 You can connect to a music player at any Say the number of the device that you
5. The selected phone will be connected to time by pressing the SPEECH button and want to delete from the system.
the Bluetooth® 2.0 interface. The voice saying the number, even before all of the If you want to delete all paired phones
guide will say “<device tag> selected” paired numbers and device tags of corre- from the system, say “All.”
and then the system will return to the sponding music players are read out by the
6. For confirmation purposes, the voice
system.
main menu. guide will say “Deleting <device tag>
<number>. Is this correct?” or “Deleting
5. The selected music player will be con- all devices. Is this correct?”
nected to the Bluetooth® 2.0 interface. Answer “Yes” to delete the phone(s).


Answer “No,” the system will return to 6. After the device tags of all paired Blue-
Changing a device tag
Step 4. tooth® devices have been read, the system N00565300014
7. The voice guide will say “Deleted,” and will say “End of list, would you like to
then the system will end the device dele- You can change the device tag of a paired cel-
start from the beginning?”
tion process. lular phone or music player.
To hear the list again from the beginning,
Follow the steps below to change a device
answer “Yes.”
NOTE tag.
When you are done, answer “No” to
 If the device deletion process fails for some
reason, the voice guide will say “Delete
return to the main menu. 1. Press the SPEECH button. 5
2. Say “Setup.”
failed” and then the system will cancel delet-
ing the device. NOTE 3. Say “Pairing Options.”
 If you press and release the SPEECH button 4. The voice guide will say “Select one of
and say “Continue” or “Previous” while the the following: pair, edit, delete, or list.”
To check a paired Bluetooth® list is being read, the system will advance or Say “Edit.”
rewind the list. 5. The voice guide will say “Please say,” and
device Say “Continue” to proceed to the device with
N00565200013
read out the numbers of the Bluetooth®
the next highest number or “Previous” to
devices and device tags of corresponding
You can check a paired Bluetooth® device by return to the phone with the previous num-
devices in order, starting with the Blue-
ber.
following the steps below. tooth® that has been most recently con-
 You can change the device tag by pressing
1. Press the SPEECH button. and releasing the SPEECH button and then nected.
2. Say “Setup.” saying “Edit” while the list is being read. After all paired device tags have been
3. Say “Pairing Options.”  You can change the phone to be connected read, the voice guide will say “Which
4. The voice guide will say “Select one of
by pressing and releasing the SPEECH but- device, please?” Say the number of the
ton and then saying “Select phone” while the device tag you want to change.
the following: pair, edit, delete, or list.” list is being read.
Say “List.”
5. The voice guide will read out device tags
 You can change the music player to be con- NOTE
nected by pressing and releasing the
of corresponding devices in order, starting  You can press and release the SPEECH but-
SPEECH button and then saying “Select
ton while the list is being read, and immedi-
with the Bluetooth® device that has been music player” while the list is being read.
ately say the number of the device tag you
most recently connected. want to change.


6. The voice guide will say “New name, You can also use the phonebooks in the Blue- 1. Press the SPEECH button.
please.” Say the name you want to regis- tooth® 2.0 interface to make calls without 2. Say “Dial.”
ter as a new device tag. dialing telephone numbers. 3. After the voice guide says “Number
When the confirmation function is on, the please,” say the telephone number.
voice guide will say “<New device tag>. To make a call P.5-96 4. The voice guide will say “Dialing <num-
Is this correct?” Answer “Yes.” Send function P.5-98 ber recognized>.”
Answer “No,” you can say the new device Receiving calls P.5-98 The Bluetooth® 2.0 interface will then
tag you want to register again. Mute function P.5-98
5 7. The device tag is changed. Switching between hands-free mode and pri-
make the call.
When the change is complete, the voice vate mode P.5-98 system will confirm the telephone number
guide will say “New name saved” and again. To continue with that number,
then the system will return to the main NOTE answer “Yes.”
menu.  Hands-free calls may not operate correctly To change the telephone number, answer
when you place or receive the call directly “No.” The system will say “Number
Operating a music player con- from your cellular phone, instead of using please” then say the telephone number
the Bluetooth® 2.0 interface. again.
nected via Bluetooth®
N00565400015
For the operation of a music player connected NOTE

To make a call  In the case of English, the system will recog-
via Bluetooth®, refer to “To play tracks from N00565600020
nise both “zero” and “oh” (Letter “o”) for the
a Bluetooth® device” on page 7-37. You can make a call in the following 3 ways number “0.”
using the Bluetooth® 2.0 interface:  The Bluetooth® 2.0 interface supports num-
How to make or receive hands- - By saying a telephone number bers (0 to 9) and characters (+, # and *).
- By using the Bluetooth® 2.0 interface’s  The maximum supported telephone number
free calls length is as follows:
N00565500087 phonebook
• International telephone number: + and tele-
You can make or receive hands-free calls - By redialing a telephone number
phone numbers (to 18 digits).
using a Bluetooth® compatible cellular phone Making a call by using the telephone • Except for international telephone number:
telephone numbers (to 19 digits).
connected to the Bluetooth® 2.0 interface. number
You can make a call by saying the telephone

number.


If there are 2 or more matches, the voice
Making a call using a phonebook
guide will say “More than one match was
NOTE
 If the name you selected has matching data
You can make calls using the vehicle phone- found, would you like to call <returned
in the vehicle phonebook but no telephone
book or mobile phonebook of the Bluetooth® name>.” If that person is the one you want
number is registered under the selected loca-
2.0 interface. to call, answer “Yes.” tion, the voice guide will say
For details on the phonebooks, refer to Answer “No,” the name of the next “{home/work/mobile/other} not found for
“Phonebook function” on page 5-98. matching person will be uttered by the <name>. Would you like to add location or
voice guide.
try again?”
Say “Try again,” and the system will return
5
2. Say “Call.” NOTE to Step 3.
 If you say “No” to all names read by the sys- Say “Add location” and you can register an
additional telephone number under the
NOTE tem, the voice guide will say “Name not
selected location.
 If you say “Call” when the vehicle phone- found, returning to main menu” and the sys-
tem will return to the main menu.  If the name you selected has matching data
book and the mobile phonebook are empty,
in the mobile phonebook but no telephone
the voice guide will say “The vehicle phone-
number is registered under the selected loca-
book is empty. Would you like to add a new 5. If only 1 telephone number is registered tion, the voice guide will say
entry now?” under the name you just said, the voice “{home/work/mobile/other} not found for
Answer “Yes,” and the voice guide will say guide will proceed to Step 6. <name>. Would you like to try again?”
“Entering the phonebook - new entry menu.” If 2 or more telephone numbers are regis- Answer “Yes,” and the system will return to
You can now create data in the vehicle
tered that match the name you just said, Step 3.
phonebook.
the voice guide will say “Would you like Answer “No,” and the call will be cancelled.
Answer “No,” the system will return to the
to call <name> at [home], [work], Start over again from Step 1.
main menu.
[mobile], or [other]?” Select the location
to call. 6. The voice guide will say “Calling <name>
3. After the voice guide says “Name please,”
<location>” and then the system will dial
say the name you want to call, from those
the telephone number.
registered in the phonebook.
4. If there is only 1 match, the system will
proceed to Step 5.

NOTE Receiving calls Switching between hands-free

 When the confirmation function is on, the N00565800035 mode and private mode
system will check if the name and location of If an incoming phone call is received while N00566600014
the receiver are correct. If the name is cor- the ignition switch or the operation mode is in
rect, answer “Yes.” The Bluetooth® 2.0 interface can switch
ON or ACC, the audio system will be auto- between hands-free mode (hands-free calls)
To change the name or location to call,
matically turned on and switched to the and private mode (calls using cellular phone).
answer “No.” The system will return to Step
incoming call, even when the audio system If you press the SPEECH button and say
5 3.
was originally off. “Transfer call” during a hands-free call, you
The voice guide announcement for the can stop the hands-free mode and talk in pri-
Redialing incoming call will be output from the front vate mode.
passenger’s seat speaker. To return to hands-free mode, press the
You can redial the last number called, based If the CD player or radio was playing when SPEECH button again and say “Transfer
on the history of dialed calls in the paired cel- the incoming call was received, the audio sys- call.”
lular phone. tem will mute the sound from the CD player
Use the following procedure to redial. or radio and output only the incoming call.
To receive the call, press the PICK-UP button Phonebook function
1. Press the SPEECH button. on the steering wheel control switch. N00566000018
2. Say “Redial.” When the call is over, the audio system will The Bluetooth® 2.0 interface has 2 types of
return to its previous state. unique phonebooks that are different from the
Send function phonebook stored in the cellular phone. They
N00565700018
Mute function are the vehicle phonebook and the mobile
During a call, press the SPEECH button to N00565900010 phonebook.
enter voice recognition mode, then say At any time during a call, you can mute the These phonebooks are used to register tele-
“<numbers> SEND” to generate DTMF vehicle microphone. phone numbers and make calls to desired
tones. Pressing the SPEECH button and then saying numbers via voice recognition function.
For example, if during a call you need to sim- “Mute” during a call will turn ON the mute
ulate the pressing of a phone button as a
response to an automated system, press the
function and mute the microphone. NOTE
Saying “Mute off” in the same way will turn  Disconnecting the battery cable will not
SPEECH button and speak “1 2 3 4 pound off the mute function and cancel the mute on delete information registered in the phone-
send” and the 1234# will be sent via your cel- the microphone. book.
lular phone.


2. Say “Phonebook.”
Vehicle phonebook NOTE
N00566101162  When the confirmation function is on, the
the following: new entry, edit number,
This phonebook is used when making calls voice guide will say “<Location>. Is this cor-
edit name, list names, delete, erase all, or
with the voice recognition function. rect?” Answer “Yes.”
import contact.” Say “New entry.” If a telephone number has been registered for
Up to 32 names can be registered in the vehi- 4. The voice guide will say “Name please.” the selected location, the voice guide will say
cle phonebook per language. Say your preferred name to register it. “The current number is <telephone number>,
Also, each entry has 4 locations associated
with: home, work, mobile and other. You can NOTE
number please.”
If you do not want to change the telephone
5
register one telephone number for each loca-  If the maximum number of entries are number, say “cancel” or the original number
tion. already registered, the voice guide will say to keep it registered.
“The phonebook is full. Would you like to
You can register a desired name as a name for delete a name?” Say “Yes” if you want to
any phonebook entry registered in the vehicle 6. The voice guide will say “Number
delete a registered name.
phonebook. If you say “No,” the system will return to the please.” Say the telephone number to reg-
Names and telephone numbers can be main menu. ister it.
changed later on.
5. When the name has been registered, the
NOTE
The vehicle phonebook can be used with all  In the case of English, the system will recog-
voice guide will say “home, work,
paired cellular phones. nise both “zero” and “oh” (Letter “o”) for the
mobile, or other?” Say the location for number “0.”
To register a telephone number in the which you want to register a telephone
vehicle phonebook number.
7. The voice guide will repeat the telephone
You can register a telephone number in the number you have just read, and then reg-
vehicle phonebook in the following 2 ways: ister the number.
Reading out a telephone number, and select- When the telephone number has been reg-
ing and transferring 1 phonebook entry from istered, the voice guide will say “Number
the phonebook of the cellular phone. saved. Would you like to add another
number for this entry?”
To register by reading out a telephone To add another telephone number for a
number new location for the current entry, answer
“Yes.” The system will return to location
1. Press the SPEECH button. selection in Step 5.


Answer “No” to end the registration pro- 5. After the voice guide says “Ready to
cess and return to the main menu.
NOTE receive a contact from the phone. Only a
 If telephone numbers contain characters
home, a work, and a mobile number can
other than 0 to 9, *, # or +, these characters
NOTE are deleted before the transfer. be imported,” the Bluetooth® 2.0 inter-
 When the confirmation function is on, after  For the connection settings on the cellular face will receive the phonebook data from
repeating the telephone number you have
phone side, refer to the instructions for the the Bluetooth® compatible cellular phone.
read, the voice guide will ask “Is this cor-
cellular phone.
rect?” Answer “Yes.”
5 Answer “No” to return to telephone number 1. Press the SPEECH button.
6. Operate the Bluetooth® compatible cellu-
registration in step 6. lar phone to set it up so that the phone-
2. Say “Phonebook.”
book entry you want to register in the
vehicle phonebook can be transferred to
To select and transfer one phonebook the following: new entry, edit number,
edit name, list names, delete, erase all, or the Bluetooth® 2.0 interface.
entry from the phonebook of the cellular
phone import contact.” Say “Import contact.”
4. The voice guide will say “Would you like NOTE
You can select 1 phonebook entry from the to import a single entry or all contacts?”  If the Bluetooth® 2.0 interface cannot recog-
phonebook of the cellular phone and register Say “Single entry.” nise the Bluetooth® compatible cellular
it in the vehicle phonebook. The Bluetooth® 2.0 interface will become phone or the connection takes too much
time, the voice guide will say “Import con-
ready to receive transferred phonebook
tact has timed out” and then the system will
NOTE data.
cancel the registration. In such case, start
 Transfer is not permitted unless the vehicle is over again from Step 1.
parked. Before transferring, make sure that NOTE  Pressing the HANG-UP button or pressing
the vehicle is parked in a safe location.  If the maximum number of entries are and holding the SPEECH button will cancel
 All or part of data may not be transferred, already registered, the voice guide will say the registration.
even when the cellular phone supports Blue- “The phonebook is full. Would you like to
tooth®, depending on the compatibility of delete a name?” Say “Yes” if you want to
delete a registered name. 7. When the reception is complete, the voice
the device.
If you say “No,” the system will return to the guide will say “<Number of telephone
 The maximum supported telephone number
main menu. numbers that had been registered in the
length is 19 digits. Any telephone number of
20 digits or more will be truncated to the first
import source> numbers have been
19 digits. imported. What name would you like to
use for these numbers?”


Say the name you want to register for this You can also listen to the list of names regis- When the confirmation function is on, the
phonebook entry. tered in the vehicle phonebook. system will check the target name and
location again. Answer “Yes” if you want
NOTE NOTE to continue with the editing.
 If the entered name is already used for other  The system must have at least one entry.
Answer “No,” the system will return to
phonebook entry or similar to a name used Step 3.
for other phonebook entry, that name cannot 6. The voice guide will say “Number,
be registered. [Editing a telephone number] please.” Say the telephone number you
want to register.
5
8. The voice guide will say “Adding 2. Say “Phonebook.”
<name>.” NOTE
When the confirmation function is on, the  If the telephone number is already registered
the following: new entry, edit number, in the selected location, the voice guide will
system will ask if the name is correct. edit name, list names, delete, erase all, or say “The current number is <current num-
Answer “Yes.” import contact”. Say “Edit number.” ber>. New number, please.” Say a new tele-
Answer “No,” the voice guide will say 4. The voice guide will say “Please say the phone number to change the current number.
“Name please.” Register a different name. name of the entry you would like to edit,
9. The voice guide will say “Numbers or say list names.” Say the name of the
saved.” 7. The voice guide will repeat the telephone
phonebook entry you want to edit.
10. The voice guide will say “Would you like number.
to import another contact?” When the confirmation function is on, the
NOTE system will ask if the number is correct.
Answer “Yes” if you want to continue
 Say “List names,” and the names registered
with the registration. You can continue to Answer “Yes.”
in the phonebook will be read out in order.
register a new phonebook entry from Step Refer to “Vehicle phonebook: Listening to Answer “No,” the system will return to
5. the list of registered names” on page 5-102. the Step 3.
Answer “No,” the system will return to 8. Once the telephone number is registered,
the main menu. the voice guide will say “Number saved”
5. The voice guide will say “Home, work, and then the system will return to the
mobile or other?” Select and say the loca- main menu.
To change the content registered in the tion where the telephone number you
vehicle phonebook want to change or add is registered.
You can change or delete a name or telephone
number registered in the vehicle phonebook.


Answer “No,” the system will return to
NOTE Step 4.
NOTE
 If the location where a telephone number  You can call, edit or delete a name that is
6. The voice guide will say “Name please.”
was already registered has been overwritten being read out.
Say the new name you want to register.
with a new number, the voice guide will say Press the SPEECH button and say “Call” to
“Number changed” and then the system will 7. The registered name will be changed. call the name, “Edit name” to edit it, or
return to the main menu. When the change is complete, the system “Delete” to delete it.
will return to the main menu. The system will beep and then execute your
5 [Editing a name] [Listening to the list of registered names]
command.
 If you press the SPEECH button and say
“Continue” or “Previous” while the list is
1. Press the SPEECH button. 1. Press the SPEECH button. being read, the system will advance or
2. Say “Phonebook.” 2. Say “Phonebook.” rewind the list. Say “Continue” to proceed to
3. The voice guide will say “Select one of 3. The voice guide will say “Select one of the next entry or “Previous” to return to the
the following: new entry, edit number, the following: new entry, edit number, previous entry.
edit name, list names, delete, erase all, or edit name, list names, delete, erase all, or
import contact.” Say “Edit name.” import contact.” Say “List names.”
[Deleting a telephone number]
4. The voice guide will say “Please say the 4. Bluetooth® 2.0 interface will read out the
name of the entry you would like to edit, entries in the phonebook in order. 1. Press the SPEECH button.
or say list names.” Say the name you want 5. When the voice guide is done reading the 2. Say “Phonebook.”
to edit. list, it will say “End of list, would you like 3. The voice guide will say “Select one of
to start from the beginning?” When you the following: new entry, edit number,
NOTE want to check the list again from the edit name, list names, delete, erase all, or
 Say “List names,” and the names registered beginning, answer “Yes.” import contact.” Say “Delete.”
in the phonebook are read out in order. Refer
When you are done, answer “No” to 4. The voice guide will say “Please say the
to “Vehicle phonebook: Listening to the list
return to the previous or main menu. name of the entry you would like to
of registered names” on page 5-102.
delete, or say list names.” Say the name of
the phonebook entry in which the tele-
5. The voice guide will say “Changing phone number you want to delete is regis-
<name>.” tered.
system will check if the name is correct.
Answer “Yes” if you want to continue
with the editing based on this information.

7. When the telephone number deletion is Answer “No” to cancel the deletion of all
NOTE complete, the voice guide will say registered information in the phonebook
 Say “List names,” and the names registered
“<name> <location> deleted” and then and return to the main menu.
in the phonebook are read out in order. Refer
the system will return to the main menu. 6. The voice guide will say “Please wait,
to “Vehicle phonebook: Listening to the list
of registered names” on page 5-102. If all locations are deleted, the system will erasing the hands-free system phone-
say “<name> and all locations deleted” book” and then the system will delete all
and the name will be removed from the data in the phonebook.
5. If only one telephone number is registered phonebook. If numbers still remain under When the deletion is complete, the voice
in the selected phonebook entry, the voice the entry, the name will retain the other guide will say “Hands-free system phone-
5
guide will say “Deleting <name> <loca- associated numbers. book erased” and then the system will
tion>.” return to the main menu.
If multiple telephone numbers are regis-
Erasing the phonebook
tered in the selected phonebook entry, the
voice guide will say “Would you like to
Mobile phonebook
You can delete all registered information N00566200049
delete [home], [work], [mobile], [other], from the vehicle phonebook.
or all?” All entries in the phonebook stored in the cel-
Select the location to delete, and the voice 1. Press the SPEECH button. lular phone can be transferred in a batch and
guide will say “Deleting <name> <loca- 2. Say “Phonebook.” registered in the mobile phonebook.
tion>.” 3. The voice guide will say “Select one of Up to 7 mobile phonebooks, each containing
the following: new entry, edit number, up to 1,000 names, can be registered.
NOTE edit name, list names, delete, erase all, or
 To delete the telephone numbers from all import contact.” Say “Erase all.” The Bluetooth® 2.0 interface automatically
locations, say “All.” 4. For confirmation purposes, the voice converts from text to voice the names regis-
guide will ask “Are you sure you want to tered in the transferred phonebook entries,
erase everything from your hands-free and creates names.
6. The system will ask if you really want to
delete the selected telephone number(s) to system phonebook?” Answer “Yes.”
go ahead with the deletion, answer “Yes.” Answer “No” to cancel the deletion of all NOTE
Answer “No,” the system will cancel registered information in the phonebook  Only the mobile phonebook transferred from
deleting the telephone number(s) and then and return to the main menu. the connected cellular phone can be used
return to Step 4. 5. The voice guide will say “You are about with that cellular phone.
to delete everything from your hands-free
system phonebook. Do you want to con-
tinue?” Answer “Yes” to continue.
NOTE NOTE NOTE

 You cannot change the names and telephone  If telephone numbers contain characters  If the Bluetooth® 2.0 interface could not be
numbers in the phonebook entries registered other than 0 to 9, *, # or +, these characters
connected to the Bluetooth® compatible cel-
in the mobile phonebook. You cannot select are deleted before the transfer.
lular phone, the voice guide will say “Unable
and delete specific phonebook entries, either.  For the connection settings on the cellular to transfer contact list from phone” and then
To change or delete any of the above, change phone side, refer to the instructions for the the system will return to the main menu.
the applicable information in the source cellular phone.
 If you press the HANG-UP button or press
5 phonebook of the cellular phone and then
transfer the phonebook again. 1. Press the SPEECH button.
and hold the SPEECH button during the data
transfer, the transfer will be cancelled and
2. Say “Phonebook.” the system will return to the main menu.
To import a devices phonebook 3. The voice guide will say “Select one of  If an error occurs during the data transfer, all
the following: new entry, edit number, transfer will be cancelled and the voice guide
Follow the steps below to transfer to the edit name, list names, delete, erase all, or will say “Unable to complete the phonebook
mobile phonebook the phonebook stored in import contact.” Say “Import contact.” import” and then the system will return to
the cellular phone. 4. The voice guide will say “Would you like the main menu.
to import a single entry or all contacts?”  If there are no contacts in the phonebook, the
NOTE Say “All contacts.” voice guide will say “There are no contacts
 Transfer should be completed while the vehi- 5. The voice guide will say “Importing the on the connected phone.”
cle is parked. Before transferring, make sure contact list from the mobile phonebook.
that the vehicle is parked in a safe location. 6. When the transfer is complete, the voice
This may take several minutes to com-
 The already stored phonebook in the mobile guide will say “Import complete” and
plete. Would you like to continue?”
phonebook is overwritten by the stored then the system will return to the main
Answer “Yes,” transferring to the mobile
phonebook in the cellular phone. menu.
phonebook the phonebook stored in the
 All or part of data may not be transferred, cellular phone will start.
even when the cellular phone supports Blue-
Answer “No,” the system will return to General information
tooth®, depending on the compatibility of the main menu. N00566301119
the device.
 Only a home, a work, and a mobile number Model name: MMC or MDGMY10
can be imported.
NOTE FCC ID: CB2MDGMY10 or
 The transfer may take some time to complete NT8MDGMY10
 The maximum supported telephone number
depending on the number of contacts. IC: 279B-MDGMY10 or 3043A-MDGMY10
length is 19 digits. Any telephone number of
20 digits or more will be truncated to the first Your Bluetooth® 2.0 interface operates on a
19 digits. radio frequency subject to Federal Communi-

USB input terminal (if so equipped)

cations Commission (FCC) Rules (For vehi- Class B digital device, pursuant to part 15 of
cles sold in U.S.A.) and Industry Canada the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to
Enrollment commands
N00566401080
Rules (For vehicles sold in Canada). This provide reasonable protection against harmful
device complies with Part 15 of the FCC interference in a residential installation.
Rules and RSS-210 of the Industry Canada This equipment generates, use and can radiate
Rules. Operation is subject to the following radio frequency energy and, if not installed
two conditions: and used in accordance with the instructions,
may cause harmful interference to radio com-
 This device may not cause harmful inter- munications.
5
ference. However, there is no guarantee that interfer-
 This device must accept any interference ence will not occur in a particular installation.
received, including interference that may If this equipment does cause harmful interfer-
cause undesired operation. ence to radio or television reception, which
can be determined by turning the equipment
CAUTION off and on, the user is encouraged to try to USB input terminal (if so
 Changes or modifications made to this correct the interference by one or more of the equipped)
equipment not expressly approved by the following measures: N00566701155
manufacturer may void the FCC authoriza-
tion to operate this equipment.  Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna. You can connect your USB memory device or
 Increase the separation between the iPod* to play music files stored in the USB
equipment and receiver. memory device or iPod.
The term “IC:” before the radio certification
 Connect the equipment into an outlet on a This section explains how to connect and
number only signifies that Industry Canada
circuit different from that to which the remove a USB memory device or iPod.
technical specifications were met.
receiver is connected. See the following section for details on how
The antenna used for this transmitter must not
 Consult the dealer or an experienced to play music files.
be co-located or operating in conjunction
radio/TV technician for help.
with any other antenna or transmitter. End- Refer to “To play tracks from USB device”
users and installers must be provided with ICES Notice: This Class B digital apparatus on page 7-29.
installation instructions and transmitter oper- complies with Canadian ICES-003. Refer to “To play iPod tracks via voice opera-
ating conditions for satisfying RF exposure tion” on page 7-31.
compliance.
FCC Notice: This equipment has been tested *: “iPod” is a registered trademark of Apple
and found to comply with the limits for a Inc. in the United States and other countries.

How to connect a USB memory WARNING

device  An open glove compartment door can
N00566800104
cause a serious injury or death to the front
passenger in an accident, even if the pas-
senger is wearing his/her seat belt. Always
To connect keep the glove compartment door closed
when driving.
5 1. Park your vehicle in a safe place and turn
the ignition switch to the “OFF” position
NOTE
or put the operation mode in OFF.
 Do not connect the USB memory device to
2. Open the glove compartment and remove
4. Connect the commercially available USB the vehicle’s connector cable directly.
the connector cable (A, B) from clips (C). The USB memory device may be damaged.
connector cable (D) to the vehicle’s con-
nector cable (B).  When closing the glove compartment, be
careful not to trap the connector cable and
Be sure to hold the terminal part (A) of
USB memory device.
the connector cable as shown in the illus-
tration.
5. Fix the connector cable (A, B) on the
clips.
To remove
1. Turn the ignition switch to the “OFF”
position or put the operation mode in
OFF.
2. Remove the commercially available USB
3. Connect a commercially available USB connector cable (D).
connector cable (D) to the USB memory Be sure to hold the terminal part (A) of
device (E). the connector cable as shown in the illus-
tration.

3. Fix the connector cable on the clips and 3. Connect the connector cable to the iPod.
close the glove compartment.
WARNING
 An open glove compartment door can
NOTE cause a serious injury or death to the front
 Use a genuine connector cable from Apple
How to connect an iPod Inc.
passenger in an accident, even if the pas-
N00566901157 senger is wearing his/her seat belt. Always
keep the glove compartment door closed
To connect 4. Connect the connector cable (D) to the when driving.
connector cable (B).
Be sure to hold the terminal part (A) of
1. Park your vehicle in a safe place and turn the connector cable as shown in the illus- NOTE
the ignition switch to the “OFF” position tration.  When closing the glove compartment, be
or put the operation mode in OFF. 5. Fix the connector cable (A, B) on the careful not to trap the connector cable and
2. Open the glove compartment and remove clips. iPod.
the connector cable (A, B) from clips (C).
To remove
OFF.
2. Remove the connector cable (D).


Be sure to hold the terminal part (A) of Model name Condition Model name Condition
the connector cable as shown in the illus-
Storage capacity of first gener- F/W Ver.3.1.3 or
tration.
USB memory device 256 Mbytes or ation later
more second F/W Ver.4.2.1 or
fifth gen- F/W Ver.1.3 or iPod generation later
iPod*
eration later touch* third gen- F/W Ver.4.3.1 or
5 80GB/180 F/W Ver.1.1.2 or eration later
GB later fourth F/W Ver.4.3.1 or
iPod clas- F/W Ver.2.0.1 or generation later
120GB
sic* later F/W Ver.3.1.3 or
iPhone
160GB F/W Ver.2.0.4 or later
(late 2009) later F/W Ver.4.2.1 or
iPhone 3G
3. Fix the connector cable on the clips and first gener- F/W Ver.1.3.1 or later
close the glove compartment. ation later iPhone F/W Ver.4.3.1 or
iPhone*
second F/W Ver.1.1.3 or 3GS later
Types of connectable devices generation later F/W Ver.4.3.1 or
iPhone 4
and supported file specifica- third gen- F/W Ver.1.1.3 or later
tions iPod eration later F/W Ver.5.0.1 or
nano* iPhone 4S
N00567000015 fourth F/W Ver.1.0.4 or later
generation later Models other than Digital audio
Device types fifth gen- F/W Ver.1.0.2 or USB memory devices player supporting
N00567101143 eration later and iPods mass storage class
Devices of the following types can be con- sixth gen- F/W Ver.1.0 or
nected. eration later On vehicles equipped with the Bluetooth®
2.0 interface, for these connectable device
types, “iPod*,” “iPod classic*,” “iPod
nano*,” “iPod touch*” and “iPhone*,” refer
to the following website:
[For vehicles sold in U.S.A.]
Sun visors
You can access the Mitsubishi Motors North
America website.
NOTE Sun visors
 Do not connect to the USB input terminal
[For vehicles sold in Canada] N00524600353
any device (hard disk, card reader, memory Pull the sun visor downward (1) to reduce
You can access the Mitsubishi Motors web-
reader, etc.) other than the connectable front glare while driving. To reduce side
site. Please read and agree to the “Warning devices specified in the previous section.
about Links to the Web Sites of Other Com- glare, turn the visor to the side (2).
The device and/or data may be damaged. If
panies”. The websites mentioned above may any of these devices was connected by mis-
connect you to websites other than the Mit-
subishi Motors website.
take, remove it after turning the ignition
switch to the “OFF” position or putting the
5
http://www.mitsubishi-motors.com/en/prod- operation mode in OFF.
ucts/index.html
File specifications
*: “iPod,” “iPod classic,” “iPod nano,” “iPod
N00567200020
touch” and “iPhone” are registered trade-
marks of Apple Inc. in the United States and You can play music files of the following
other countries. specifications that are saved in a USB mem-
ory device or other device supporting mass
storage class. When you connect your iPod,
NOTE playable file specifications depend on the
 Depending on the type of the USB memory
device or other device connected, the con-
connected iPod. Vanity mirror
nected device may not function properly or
Item Condition
the available functions may be limited. A vanity mirror is fitted to the back of the sun
 It is recommended to use an iPod with firm- File format MP3, WMA, AAC visor.
ware updated to the latest version. Maximum number of
 You can charge your iPod by connecting it to levels (including the Level 8
the USB input terminal when the ignition
root)
switch or the operation mode is in ON or
ACC. Number of folders 700
 Do not keep your USB memory device or Number of files 65,535
iPod in your vehicle.
 It is recommended that you back up the files
in case of data damage.

12 V power outlets
12 V power outlets HomeLink® Wireless Con-

N00525001670
trol System (if so equipped)
CAUTION N00554301040
 Be sure to use a “plug-in” type accessory

HomeLink® Wireless Control System is a
operating at 12 V and at 120 W or less.
registered trademark of Gentex Corporation.
 Also be aware that using electronic equip-
5 ment with the engine off may run the battery HomeLink® provides a convenient way to
down. replace up to 3 hand-held radio-frequency
 When the power outlet is not in use, be sure (RF) transmitters used to activate devices
to close the power outlet cover. This will pre- such as gate operators, garage door openers,
vent the power outlet from becoming entry door locks, security systems, even home
clogged and short circuiting.
Card holder lighting. Additional HomeLink® information
can be found at www.homelink.com,
Cards can be slipped into the holder (A) on Accessories can be operated while the igni- www.youtube.com/HomeLinkGentex, or by
the sun visor. tion switch or the operation mode is in ON or calling the toll-free HomeLink®-Hotline at 1-
ACC. 800-355-3515.
To use a “plug-in” type accessory, open the
cover, and insert the plug in the power outlet.
WARNING
 Do not use HomeLink® with any garage
door opener that lacks safety stop and
reverse features as required by U.S. Fed-
eral Regulations. A garage door opener
which cannot detect an object in the path
of a closing garage door and then auto-
matically stop and reverse, does not meet
current U.S. Federal Regulations. Using a
garage door opener without these features
increases the risk of serious injury or
death.

HomeLink® Wireless Control System (if so equipped)
WARNING Programming a new Home-

 During programming, your garage door Link®
or gate may open or close. Make sure that N00584700020
people and objects are clear of the garage
door or gate that you are programming. To program HomeLink® to operate a garage
door, gate, or entry door opener, home or
office lighting, you need to be at the same
NOTE location as the device. 5
 Once HomeLink® is programmed, retain the
original transmitter for future programming 1. Press the HomeLink® button that you
procedures (for example, new vehicle pur- 1- HomeLink® button 1 would like to program. The indicator light
chases). Upon sale of the vehicle, the pro- (A) will flash orange slowly.
2- HomeLink® button 2
grammed HomeLink® buttons should be
erased for security purposes. Refer to 3- HomeLink® button 3
“Cleaning the programmed information” on
page 5-114.
 You can program a maximum of 3 devices. Before programming Home-
To change or replace any of the 3 devices
after it has been initially programmed, you Link®
must first erase the current settings. N00584600029
See “Cleaning the programmed information”  Some garage door openers manufactured
on page 5-114 or “Reprogramming a single after 1995 have “rolling code protection”.
HomeLink® button” on page 5-115. To program a garage door opener
equipped with “rolling code protection”;
you will need to access the garage door
opener motor to press the motor’s “Learn”
NOTE
 You do not need to continue holding the
or “Smart” buttons. For convenience, use
a ladder and another person to assist you. HomeLink® button.
 It is recommended that a new battery be  If the indicator light does not flash, refer to
“Cleaning the programmed information” on
placed in the hand-held transmitter of the
page 5-114.
device being programmed to HomeLink®
for quicker training and accurate trans-
mission of the radio-frequency signal.

2. Position the end of your hand-held trans- • If the device does not operate, continue
mitter (B) 1 to 3 inches (2 to 8 cm) away
NOTE
 Some devices may require you to replace this
with “Programming a new HomeLink®”
from the HomeLink® button while keep- steps 5 to 7 to complete the program-
“Programming a new HomeLink®” step 3
ing the indicator light in view. ming of a rolling code equipped device.
with procedures noted in the “Gate operator /
Canadian programming” section. If the indi- 5. At the garage door opener receiver
cator light does not change to rapidly flash- (motor-head unit) in the garage, locate the
ing green or continuously lit green after “Learn” or “Smart” button. This can usu-
5 performing these steps, contact HomeLink® ally be found where the hanging antenna
wire is attached to the motor-head unit
at www.homelink.com
(see the garage door opener manual to
identify the “Learn” button.)
4. Press the HomeLink® button that was just 6. Firmly press and release the “Learn” or
programmed and observe the indicator “Smart” button. (The name and color of
light. the button may vary by manufacturer.)
• If the indicator light continuously illumi- There are typically 30 seconds to initiate
nates green, programming is complete step 7.
NOTE and your device should operate when the 7. Return to the vehicle and firmly press,
 Some hand-held transmitters may actually HomeLink® button is pressed and hold for 2 seconds and release the pro-
train better from a distance of 6 to 12 inches released. grammed HomeLink® button. Repeat the
(15 to 20 cm). Keep this in mind if you have • If the indicator light rapidly flashes
difficulty with the programming process. “press/hold/release” sequence a second
green, firmly press, hold for 2 seconds time, and, depending on the brand of the
and release the programmed HomeLink® garage door opener (or other rolling code
3. Press and hold the hand-held transmitter button. Repeat the “press/hold/release” equipped device), repeat this sequence a
button while watching the indicator light sequence a second time, and, depending third time to complete the programming
(A). Continue pressing the button until the on the brand of the garage door opener process.
indicator light (A) changes from slowly (or other rolling code equipped device),
flashing orange to either rapidly flashing HomeLink® should now activate your
repeat this sequence a third time to com- rolling code equipped device.
green (rolling code) or continuously lit plete the programming process. At this
green (fixed code). Now you may release point if your device operates, program-
the hand-held transmitter button. ming is complete.

NOTE NOTE
 In the event that there are still programming  If programming a garage door opener or gate
difficulties or questions, additional Home- operator, it is advised to unplug the device
Link® information and programming videos during the “cycling” process to prevent pos-
can be found online at www.homelink.com, sible overheating.
www.youtube.com/HomeLinkGentex, or by
calling the HomeLink® Hotline. 3. Press and release - every 2 seconds
(“cycle”) your hand-held transmitter until the 5
HomeLink® indicator light changes from
Gate operator/Canadian pro- slowly flashing orange to either rapidly flash-
gramming ing green (rolling code) or continuously lit 1. Within 5 seconds after successfully pro-
N00584800021 green (fixed code). Now you may release the gramming the garage door opener (refer
hand-held transmitter button.
Canadian radio-frequency laws require trans-
Proceed with “Programming a new Home- to “Programming a new HomeLink®”
mitter signals to “time-out” (or quit) after section), both garage door operation indi-
several seconds of transmission - which may Link®” step 4 to complete. cators (A) will flash rapidly green indicat-
not be long enough for HomeLink® to pick ing that the garage door feedback has
up the signal during programming. Similar to Additional steps for program- been enabled.
this Canadian law, some U.S. gate operators ming a door system with feed- If the indicators do not flash, perform
are designed to “time-out” in the same man- steps 2 and 3 while pressing the Home-
back
ner. Link® button up to the first 10 times after
N00584900022
The indicator LED on the hand-held transmit- successful programming.
ter will go off when the device times out indi- The HomeLink® has the capability of receiv- 2. Press and release the programmed Home-
cating that it has finished transmitting. ing garage door status from compatible Link® button to activate the door. You
If you live in Canada or you are having diffi- garage door opener systems. Check your now have 1 minute in which to complete
culties programming a gate operator or garage door opener manual for the available step 3.
garage door opener by using the “Program- feature and HomeLink® compatibility. Also
ming” procedures, replace “Programming a for a listing of compatible systems contact
new HomeLink®” step 3 with the following: HomeLink® at: www.homelink.com


3. Once the door has stopped, press and The HomeLink® has the capability of listen-
release the “Learn” or “Smart” button on ing to these messages at a range up to 820.2
the garage door opener (refer to your feet (250 m) (open line of sight), but range
garage door opener owner’s manual for may be reduced by obstacles such as houses
the location of the “Learn” button). Both or trees. You may have to slow your vehicle
the HomeLink® garage door operation speed to receive the CLOSED or OPENED
indicators will flash rapidly green upon message feedback from the garage door
5 successful synchronization with the door
opener (within 5 seconds).
opener. If the unit is out of range before
receiving either the UP or DOWN message
from the door opener, both the UP and
Operating HomeLink® The indicators will illuminate/blink in
DOWN indicators will flash red followed by
a continuous lit orange indicator in the direc-
N00585000020
response to the following conditions: tion the door was last moving.
To operate, simply press and release the pro- Recall of the door state after initial feedback
grammed HomeLink® button. Activation will : Blinking : Illuminates is possible by simultaneously pressing either
now occur for the trained device (i.e. garage HomeLink® buttons 1 and 2 or buttons 2 and
door opener, gate operator, security system, Garage door opener closing 3 for 2 seconds. The last recorded message
entry door lock, home/office lighting, etc.). (orange)
will be displayed for 3 seconds, again follow-
For convenience, the hand-held transmitter of ing the garage door status indication of the
the device may also be used at any time. Garage door opener closed
(green) figure above.
Garage door feedback Out of range

(red) Clearing the programmed
N00585200022
information
The HomeLink® has the capability of receiv- Garage door opener opening
(orange) N00585300023
ing garage door status from compatible
To erase programming from the 3 buttons
garage door opener systems. Refer to “Addi- Garage door opener opened (individual buttons cannot be erased but can
tional steps for programming a door system (green)
be “reprogrammed” as outlined below), fol-
with feedback” on page 5-113.
Out of range low the steps noted:
Garage door status is then displayed with
(red)
indicators (A).

Interior lights
1. Press and hold the 2 outer HomeLink® NOTE CAUTION
buttons for at least 10 seconds. The indi-  If you do not complete the programming of a  The transmitter has been tested and complies
cator will change from continuous yellow new device to the button, it will revert to the with FCC and IC rules.
to rapidly flashing green. previously stored programming. Changes or modifications not expressly
2. Release both buttons. For questions or comments, visit approved by the party responsible for com-
www.homelink.com, pliance could void the user’s authority to
NOTE www.youtube.com/HomeLinkGentex, or by operate the device.
 Do not hold for longer than 20 seconds. calling the HomeLink® Hotline. 5
This equipment complies with FCC radiation
3. HomeLink® is now in the train (or learn- exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled
ing) mode and can be programmed at any General information environment. End Users must follow the spe-
time beginning with “Programming a new N00585600026 cific operating instructions for satisfying RF
exposure compliance. This transmitter must
HomeLink®” step 1. Your HomeLink® system operates on a radio
be at least 12 inches (20 cm) from the user
frequency subject to Federal Communica-
and must not be co-located or operating in
tions Commission (FCC) Rules (For vehicles
Reprogramming a single sold in U.S.A.) and Industry Canada Rules
conjunction with any other antenna or trans-
HomeLink® button (For vehicles sold in Canada). This device
mitter.
The term “IC:” before the certification/regis-
N00585400024 complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and
tration number only signifies that Industry
To reprogram a HomeLink® button, complete RSS- 210 of the Industry Canada Rules.
Canada technical specifications were met.
the following. Operation is subject to the following two con-
ditions.
1. Press and hold the desired HomeLink® Interior lights
button. Do not release the button. N00525301644
ference.
2. The indicator light will begin to slowly
flash orange after 20 seconds. The Home-
 This device must accept any interference NOTE
that may be received, including interfer-  Be aware that leaving the light illuminated
Link® button can be released at this point. ence that may cause undesired operation. with the engine off may run the battery
Proceed with “Programming a new down.
HomeLink®” step 2. Never leave the vehicle without checking
that the light is off.

Storage spaces
• When the remote control transmitter of
Dome light the keyless entry system or the F.A.S.T.-
NOTE
N00525801317  The time until the light goes off (delayed off)
key is used to lock the vehicle.
can be adjusted. See your authorized
• When the door lock/unlock switch is
Mitsubishi Motors dealer for details.
pressed to lock the vehicle while carry-
 The auto cut-out function cannot be operated
ing the F.A.S.T.-key.
Auto cut-out function when the dome light switch is in the “ ”
If the light is left switched on with the position.
5 ignition switch is in the “OFF” or “ACC” Also, this function can be deactivated. See
your authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer for
position or the operation mode is in OFF
details.
or ACC, and a door is opened, it goes off
automatically after approximately 30 min-
3- ( )
utes.
The light goes off regardless of whether a
The light will illuminate again after it
door is open or closed.
1- ( ) automatically goes off in the following
The light illuminates regardless of cases:
whether a door is open or closed. • When the ignition switch is turned to the Storage spaces
2- (•) “ON” position or the operation mode is N00526400528
Delayed off function put in ON.

The light illuminates when a door is • When the keyless entry system or the CAUTION
opened. It goes off approximately 30 sec- F.A.S.T.-key is operated.  Never leave lighters, carbonated drink cans,
onds after the door is closed. • When all doors are closed. or spectacles in the cabin when parking the
However, the light goes off immediately vehicle in hot sunshine. The cabin will
with all doors closed in the following NOTE become extremely hot, so lighters and other
flammable items may catch fire and
cases:  When the key was used to start the engine: if
unopened drink cans (including beer cans)
• When the ignition switch is turned to the the key is removed while the doors are
may rupture. The heat may also deform or
“ON” position or the operation mode is closed, the light is illuminated and after
crack plastic spectacle lenses and other spec-
put in ON. approximately 30 seconds it goes off.
tacle parts that are made of plastic.
• When the power door lock function is  When the F.A.S.T.-key was used to start the
 Keep the lids of storage spaces closed while
engine: if the operation mode is put in OFF
used to lock the vehicle. driving the vehicle. A lid or the contents of a
while the doors are closed, the light illumi-
storage space could otherwise cause injuries
nates and after approximately 30 seconds it
during a sudden stop.
goes off.

Cup holders
NOTE NOTE
 Do not leave valuables in any storage space  The USB input terminal (if so equipped) is
when leaving the vehicle. located in the glove compartment. For
details, refer to “USB input terminal” on
page 5-105.
Glove compartment
N00551500275
Cup holders 5
WARNING N00527301433
 An open glove compartment door can The cup holder is designed for holding cups
cause a serious injury or death to the front
or drink-cans securely in its holes.
passenger in an accident, even if the pas- CAUTION
senger is wearing his/her seat belt. Always
 Do not drink beverages while driving your
keep the glove compartment door closed NOTE vehicle.
when driving.  Plastic bottles may sometimes not fit This is distracting and could cause an acci-
securely depending on the shape of the bot- dent.
To open, pull the lever (A). tle. Plastic bottles could fall if driving is
done while a plastic bottle is not securely
placed, so check that plastic bottles are
placed securely or use the bottle holder. For the rear seat
N00537001215
For the front seat Type 1
The cup holder is located in front of the floor The cup holder is located behind the parking
console. brake lever.

Bottle holders
Bottle holders NOTE

N00502800065  Some beverages may not be stored, depend-
ing on the size and shape of the plastic bot-
CAUTION tles, etc.
 Drink beverages while driving your vehicle
is distracting and can cause an accident.
 Vibration and shaking while driving may
Convenience hook
5 cause beverages to spill. Be very careful, as
N00574700014
spilling hot beverages could cause burns. Convenience hook is located on the seatback
of the passenger’s seat.
There are bottle holders located on the front
doors.
Type 2
In order to use cup holder, allow the arm rest

to drop down.
NOTE
 To avoid damage to the convenience hook,
NOTE do not hang objects that weight more than 9
pounds (4 kg).
 Do not store cup or drink can in the bottle
holder.
 Make sure all lids are tightly closed when
storing beverages that are in plastic bottles,
etc.

Assist grips
Assist grips
N00559000074
These grips are to support the body by hand

while seated in the vehicle.
CAUTION
 Do not use the assist grips when getting into
or out of the vehicle. The assist grips could
detach causing you to fall.

Driving safety
Fuel economy ...................................................................................6-2

Driving, alcohol and drugs ..............................................................6-2
Floor mat ..........................................................................................6-2
Vehicle preparation before driving ..................................................6-3
Safe driving techniques ....................................................................6-4 6
Driving during cold weather ............................................................6-4
Braking ............................................................................................6-5
Parking .............................................................................................6-5
Loading information ........................................................................6-6
Cargo loads ....................................................................................6-10
Trailer towing ................................................................................6-11
Fuel economy
retaining clip on the driver’s floorboard to
Fuel economy Driving, alcohol and drugs secure the floor mat. When used, this clip will
N00628800178 N00628900049
help prevent the floor mat from moving for-
Fuel economy is dependent on many factors. Drunk driving is one of the most frequent ward and possibly interfering with the opera-
Your personal driving habits can have a sig- causes of accidents. tion of the pedals. To prevent the floor mat
nificant effect on your fuel consumption. Your driving ability can be seriously impaired from moving forward and possibly interfering
Several recommendations for achieving the even with blood alcohol levels far below the with the operation of the pedals, Mitsubishi
greatest fuel economy are listed below. legal minimum. If you have been drinking, genuine floor mats are recommended.
don’t drive. Ride with a designated non-
 Whenever accelerating from a stop,
6 always accelerate slowly and smoothly.
drinking driver, call a cab or a friend, or use
public transportation. Drinking coffee or tak-
To install the floor mat
 When parked for even a short period, do ing a cold shower will not make you sober.
N00628700047
not idle the engine. Shut it off. 1. Place the floor mat to fit the shape of the
Similarly, prescription and nonprescription
 Plan your trips to avoid unnecessary floorboard.
drugs affect your alertness, perception and
stops. 2. Align the floor mat with the installation
reaction time. Consult with your doctor or
 Keep your tires inflated to the recom- holes over the retaining clips.
pharmacist before driving while under the
mended pressures. 3. Secure the floor mat with retaining clips.
influence of any of these medications.
 For freeway driving, maintain a speed of
approximately 50 mph (80 km/h) when
traffic, roadway and weather conditions
WARNING
 NEVER DRINK AND DRIVE.
safely permit.
Your perceptions are less accurate, your
 Keep your air filter clean and your vehicle
reflexes are slower and your judgment is
lubricated according to the recommenda- impaired.
tions in this manual.
 Always keep your vehicle well main-
tained. A poorly maintained engine
wastes fuel and costs money. Floor mat
 Never overload your vehicle. N00628600046
The original equipment floor mat provided

with your vehicle was specifically designed NOTE
for your vehicle. Always properly position  The shape of the mat and the number of
the floor mat and assure it does not interfere retaining clips may vary depending on the
with operation of the pedals. Always use the vehicle model.
6-2 Driving safety

Vehicle preparation before driving

 Move the driver’s seat as far backward as
WARNING possible, while keeping good visibility,
 If a floor mat is the wrong size or is not
and good control of the steering wheel,
properly installed, it can interfere with the
brakes, accelerator, and controls. Check
operation of the pedals. Interference with
the pedals can cause unintended accelera- the instrument panel indicators and multi-
tion and/or increased stopping distances information display for any possible prob-
resulting in a crash and injury. Always lem.
make sure the floor mat does not interfere  Similarly, the front passenger seat should
with the accelerator or brake pedal. also be moved as far back as possible.
 Always use the retaining clip on the
driver’s floorboard to secure the floor
 Make sure that infants and small children 6
are properly restrained in accordance with
mat. all laws and regulations.
 Always install the mat with the correct
side facing down. Vehicle preparation before
 Never install a second mat over or under Defrosters
an existing floor mat.
driving
N00629001770
 Do not use a floor mat designed for Check these by selecting the defroster mode,
another model vehicle even if it is a For a safer and more enjoyable trip, always and set the blower switch on high. You should
Mitsubishi genuine floor mat. check for the following: be able to feel the air blowing against the
 Before driving, be sure to check the fol- windshield.
lowing:
• Periodically check that the floor mat is
Seat belts and seats Refer to “Defrosting or defogging (wind-
shield, door windows)” on page 7-6, 7-10,
properly secured with the retaining clips.
 Before starting the vehicle, make certain 7-17.
If you remove the floor mat while clean-
ing the inside of your vehicle or for any
that you and all passengers are seated and
wearing their seat belts properly (with
other reason, always check the condition
children in the rear seat, in appropriate
Tires
of the floor mat after it has been rein-
stalled. restraints), and that all the doors are
• While the vehicle is stopped with the locked. Check all the tires for heavy tread wear or
engine off, check that the floor mat is not uneven wear patterns. Look for stones, nails,
interfering with the pedals by depressing glass, or other objects stuck in the tread. Look
the pedals fully. for any tread cuts or sidewall cracks. Check
the wheel nuts for tightness, and the tires
(including spare tire) for proper pressure.
Driving safety 6-3

Safe driving techniques

Replace your tires before they are heavily you give extra attention to the following Before driving the vehicle, check to see if
worn out. areas, you can better protect yourself and the engine runs at the proper speed and if
On vehicles equipped with a tire pressure your passengers: the headlights are as bright as normally.
monitoring system, there is a risk of damage Charge or replace the battery if necessary.
to the tire inflation pressure sensors when the  Drive defensively. Be aware of traffic, During extreme cold weather, it is possi-
tire is replaced on the rim. Tire replacement road and weather conditions. Leave plenty ble that a very low battery could freeze.
should, only be performed by an authorized of stopping distance between your vehicle
Mitsubishi Motors dealer. and the vehicle ahead. WARNING
 Before changing lanes, check your mir-  The battery gives off explosive hydrogen
rors, your blind spots, and use your turn-
6 Lights signal light.
gas. Any spark or flame can cause the bat-
tery to explode, which could cause serious
 While driving, watch the behavior of injury or death.
Have someone watch while you turn all the other drivers, bicyclists, and pedestrians. Always wear protective clothes and a face
exterior lights on and off. Also check the turn  Always obey applicable laws and regula- mask when working with your battery, or
signal indicators and high-beam indicators on tions. Be a polite and alert driver. Always let a skilled mechanic do it.
the instrument panel. leave room for unexpected events, such as
sudden braking.  Warm the engine sufficiently. After start-
Fluid leaks  If you plan to drive in another country, ing the engine, allow a short warm-up
obey their vehicle registration laws and time to distribute oil to all cylinders. Then
make sure you will be able to get the right drive your vehicle slowly.
Check the ground under the vehicle after fuel.  Stay at low speeds at first so that the man-
parking overnight, for fuel, water, oil, or ual transaxle oil or the automatic transaxle
other leaks. Make sure all the fluid levels are fluid has time to spread to all the lubrica-
correct. Also, if you can smell fuel, you need Driving during cold weather tion points.
to find out why immediately and have it N00629400474
 Manual transaxle can be harder to shift in
fixed.  Check the battery. At the same time,
cold weather conditions. This is normal
check the terminals and wiring. During
and shifting will get easier as the transaxle
extremely cold weather, the battery will
Safe driving techniques not be as strong. Also, the battery power
warms up.
 Check the engine antifreeze.
N00629200137
level may drop because more power is
If there is not enough coolant because of a
Even this vehicle’s safety equipment, and used for cold starting and driving.
leak or from engine overheating, add
your safest driving, cannot guarantee that you
Mitsubishi Motors Genuine Super Long
can avoid an accident or injury. However, if
Life Coolant Premium or equivalent.
6-4 Driving safety
Braking
Please read this section in conjunction
When driving in cold weather For vehicles equipped with man-
with the “Engine coolant” on page 9-7.
ual transaxle
WARNING On snowy roads, ice can form on the braking
 Never open the radiator cap when the system, making the brakes less effective. Place the gearshift lever into the “R”
radiator is hot. You could be seriously While driving in such conditions, pay close (Reverse) position when parking on a down-
burned. attention to surrounding vehicles and to the hill slope, into the 1st position when parking
condition of the road surface. From time to on an uphill slope.
time, lightly depress the brake pedal and
Braking check how effective the brakes are. For vehicles equipped with contin- 6
N00629500521 uously variable transmission
All parts of the brake system are critical to When driving downhill (CVT)
safety. Have the vehicle serviced by an autho-
rized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair It is important to take advantage of the engine Be sure that the parking brake is firmly set
facility of your choice at regular intervals braking by downshifting while driving on when parked and that the selector lever is in
according to the “WARRANTY AND steep downhill roads in order to prevent the the “P” (PARK) position.
MAINTENANCE MANUAL”. brakes from overheating. When parking on a hill, it is important to set
the parking brake before moving the selector
When brakes are wet Parking lever to the “P” (PARK) position. This pre-
N00629601372
vents loading the parking brake against the
Check the brake system while driving at a transaxle. When this happens, it is difficult to
move the selector lever out of the “P”
low speed immediately after starting, espe- Parking on a hill (PARK) position.
cially when the brakes are wet, to confirm
they work normally.
When parking on a hill, set the parking brake,
A film of water can be formed on the brake
and turn the front wheels toward the curb on a Parking with the engine run-
discs or brake drums, and prevent normal ning
downhill, or away from the curb on an uphill.
braking after driving in heavy rain or through
If necessary, apply chocks to the wheels.
large puddles, or after the vehicle is washed.
If this occurs, dry the brakes out by driving Never leave the engine running while you
slowly while lightly depressing the brake take a short nap or rest. Also, never leave the
pedal. engine running in a closed or poorly venti-
lated place.
Driving safety 6-5
Loading information
 Vehicle maximum load on the tire: load
WARNING When leaving the vehicle on an individual tire that is determined by
 Leaving the engine running risks injury or
distributing to each axle its share of the
death from accidentally moving the gear- Always carry the key and lock all doors when maximum loaded vehicle weight and
shift lever (manual transaxle) or the selec-
leaving the vehicle unattended. dividing by two.
tor lever (CVT) or from the accumulation
Always try to park your vehicle in a well lit  Vehicle normal load on the tire: load on an
of toxic exhaust fumes in the passenger
compartment. area. individual tire that is determined by dis-
tributing to each axle its share of the curb
Loading information weight, accessory weight, and normal
6 Where you park N00629900424
occupant weight and dividing by two.
 Maximum loaded vehicle weight: the sum
It is very important to know how much of -
Your front bumper can be damaged if you weight your vehicle can carry. This weight is (a) Curb weight;
scrape it over curbs or parking stop blocks. called the vehicle capacity weight and (b) Accessory weight;
Be careful when traveling up or down steep includes the weight of all occupants, cargo, (c) Vehicle capacity weight; and
slopes where your bumper can scrape the non-factory-installed options, if any, being (d) Production options weight.
road. towed. The tire and loading information plac-  Curb weight: the weight of a motor vehi-
ard located on the driver’s door sill of your cle with standard equipment including the
WARNING vehicle will show how much weight it may maximum capacity of fuel, oil, and cool-
 Do not park your vehicle in areas where properly carry. ant.
combustible materials such as dry grass or  Accessory weight: the combined weight
leaves can come in contact with a hot WARNING (in excess of those standard items which
exhaust, since a fire could occur.  Never overload your vehicle. Overloading may be replaced) of automatic transmis-
can damage your vehicle, adversely affect sion, power steering, power brakes, power
vehicle performance, including handling windows, power seats, radio, and heater,
Do not keep the steering wheel and braking, cause tire failure, and result to the extent that these items are available
in an accident.
fully turned for a long time as factory- installed equipment (whether
installed or not).
It is important to familiarize yourself with the  Vehicle capacity weight: the rated cargo
More effort could be required to turn the
following terms before loading your vehicle: and luggage load plus 150 lbs (68 kg)*
steering wheel.
times the vehicle’s designated seating
Refer to “Electric power steering system
capacity.
(EPS)” on page 5-51.
6-6 Driving safety

Loading information
 Production options weight: the combined
weight of those installed regular produc-
tion options weighing over 5 lbs (2.3 kg)
in excess of those standard items which
they replace, not previously considered in
curb weight or accessory weight, includ-
ing heavy duty brakes, ride levelers, roof
rack, heavy duty battery, and special trim.
 Normal occupant weight: 150 lbs (68 kg)*
times the number of specified occupants. 6
(In your vehicle the number is 3)
 Occupant distribution: Occupant distribu- This placard shows the maximum number of
tion within the passenger compartment (In occupants permitted to ride in your vehicle as
your vehicle the distribution is 2 in front, well as “the combined weight of occupants
1 in second row seat) and cargo” (A), which is called the vehicle
*: 150 lbs (68 kg) is the weight of one per- capacity weight. This placard also tells you
son as defined by U.S.A. and Canadian the size and recommended inflation pressure
regulations. for the original equipment tires on your vehi-
cle. For more information, refer to “Tires” on
page 9-12.
Tire and loading information

placard
N00630100396
The tire and loading information placard is

located on the inside sill of the driver’s door.
Driving safety 6-7

Loading information
5. Determine the combined weight
Steps for Determining Correct
of luggage and cargo being loaded
Load Limit
N00630201277
on the vehicle. That weight may
1. Locate the statement “The com- not safely exceed the available
bined weight of occupants and cargo and luggage load capacity
cargo should never exceed XXX calculated in Step 4.
kg or XXX lbs.” on your vehicle’s 6. If your vehicle will be towing a
placard. trailer, load from your trailer will
6 2. Determine the combined weight be transferred to your vehicle.
of the driver and passengers that Consult this manual to determine
will be riding in your vehicle. how this reduces the available
3. Subtract the combined weight of cargo and luggage load capacity
the driver and passengers from of your vehicle.
XXX kg or XXX lbs.
NOTE
4. The resulting figure equals the
 The above steps for determining
available amount of cargo and
luggage load capacity. For exam- correct load limit were written in
ple, if the “XXX” amount equals accordance with U.S.A. regula-
1400 lbs. and there will be five tions.
150 lbs. passengers in your vehi- Your vehicle cannot tow a
cle, the amount of available cargo trailer, so step 6 is irrelevant.
and luggage load capacity is 650
lbs. (1400 - 750 (5 x 150) = 650
lbs.)
6-8 Driving safety

Loading information
NOTE
 The following table shows examples on how to calculate total cargo/load capacity of your vehicle with varying seating configurations and number and size
of occupants. This table is for illustration purposes only and may not be accurate for the seating and load capacity of your vehicle.
 For the following example the combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed 865 lbs (392 kg).
 Under a maximum loaded vehicle condition, gross axle weight ratings (GAWR’s) for the front and rear axles must not be exceeded. For further information
on GAWR’s, vehicle loading, see the “Specifications” section of this manual.
Driving safety 6-9

Cargo loads
Cargo loads WARNING WARNING

N00629700435  To reduce the risk of serious injury or  Make sure that the weight of luggage and
death, the combined weights of the driver, the roof carrier do not exceed the maxi-
passengers and cargo and must never mum roof load, 110 lb (50 kg). If the maxi-
Cargo load precautions exceed the vehicle capacity weight. mum roof load is exceeded, this could
N00630300082
 Exceeding the vehicle capacity weight will cause damage to the vehicle or result in an
To determine the cargo load capacity for your adversely affect vehicle performance, accident.
vehicle, subtract the weight of all vehicle including handling and braking, and may  The total weight of all occupants and lug-
occupants from the vehicle capacity weight. cause an accident. gage, including your roof load, must not
6 For additional information, if needed, refer to  Do not load cargo or luggage higher than exceed the vehicle capacity weight. For
more information, refer to “Tire and load-
“Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit” the top of the seatback. Be sure that your
cargo or luggage cannot move when your ing information placard” on page 11-3.
on page 6-8.
vehicle is in motion.  Roof load is determined by adding the
DO NOT USE the Gross Vehicle Weight Rat-
Having either the rear view blocked, or weight of the roof carrier and the weight
ing and Gross Axle Weight Rating numbers your cargo being thrown inside the cabin of the luggage placed on the roof carrier.
listed on the safety certification label (A) if you suddenly have to brake can cause a
located on the inside sill of the driver’s door serious accident or injury or death.
as the guide for passengers and/or cargo  Put cargo or luggage in the cargo area of CAUTION
weight. your vehicle. Try to spread the weight  Do not load luggage directly onto the roof.
evenly. Use a roof carrier that properly fits your
vehicle.
For installation, refer to the instruction man-
Loading cargo on the roof ual provided with the roof carrier.
N00630401149  Place the luggage on the carrier so that its
weight is distributed evenly with the heaviest
WARNING items on the bottom. Do not load items that
are wider than the roof carrier.
 Weight placed on the roof of the vehicle
will raise the vehicle’s center of gravity
and adversely affect its handling charac-
teristics. As a result, driving errors or
emergency maneuvers could lead to a loss
of control and result in an accident. Drive
slowly and avoid excessive maneuvers
such as sudden braking or quick turning.
6-10 Driving safety

Trailer towing
CAUTION Trailer towing

 Before driving and after traveling a short dis- N00629801358
tance, always check the load to make sure it
is securely fastened to the roof carrier.
Stop the vehicle periodically and check that
the load remains secure. If the load is not
secure, it could fall from the vehicle and
damage your vehicle, another vehicle or cre-
ate a road hazard.
6
NOTE
 To prevent wind noise or reduction in gas
mileage, remove the roof carrier when not in
use.
 Before using an automatic car wash, check WARNING
with the attendant to determine if the roof  Do not use this vehicle for trailer towing.
carrier should be removed. It may not be possible to maintain control
 Be sure that adequate clearance is main- or adequate braking.
tained for raising the trunk lid during loading
luggage on the roof carrier.
Driving safety 6-11

Comfort controls
Vents ................................................................................................7-2
Heater without air conditioning function (if so equipped) ...............7-4
Manual air conditioning (if so equipped) .........................................7-7
Automatic air conditioning (if so equipped)...................................7-12
Important air conditioning operating tips ......................................7-18
Air purifier (if so equipped)............................................................7-19
AM/FM electronically tuned radio with CD player
7
(if so equipped) ..........................................................................7-19
To play tracks from USB device (if so equipped) ..........................7-29
To play tracks from a Bluetooth® device
(vehicles with Bluetooth® 2.0 interface) ...................................7-37
Steering wheel audio remote control switches (if so equipped) .....7-40
Error codes .....................................................................................7-41
Handling of compact discs .............................................................7-42
Antenna ..........................................................................................7-44
General information about your radio ...........................................7-44
Vents
Vents
N00729901305
1- Open
7 2- Close
Side vents
1- Center vents
2- Side vents
When the dimple (A) is pressed, the vents NOTE
open.  On rare occasions, air from the vents of an
To close the vents, press the dimple on the air-conditioned vehicle may be foggy. This is
Air flow and direction adjust- opposite side.
only moist air cooling suddenly and does not
ments indicate a problem.
Change the direction of the air flow by turn-
 Do not let drinks or other liquids get into the
N00730200330 ing the vent itself. vents as they could prevent the air condition-
ing from operating normally.
Center vents
Move the knob (A) to make adjustments. Changing the mode selection
N00736401676
To change air flow direction, turn the mode

selection dial. Refer to “Mode selection dial”
on page 7-5, 7-8.
On vehicles with the automatic air condition-
ing, press the MODE switch or defogger
switch. (Refer to “MODE switch” on page
7-2 Comfort controls

Vents
7-14, “Defogger switch” on page 7-14.)
These symbols are used in the next several
illustrations to demonstrate the quantity of air
coming from the vents.
: Small amount of air from the vents
: Medium amount of air from the vents
: Large amount of air from the vents
Face position
Air flows only to the upper part of the passen- 7

ger compartment. NOTE
 With the mode selection dial between the Foot/Defroster position
“ ” and “ ” positions, air flows mainly
to the upper part of the passenger compart- Air flows to the leg area, the windshield and
ment. With the mode selection dial between the door windows.
the “ ” and “ ” positions, air flows
mainly to the leg area.
Foot position
Air flows mainly to the leg area.
Foot/Face position
Air flows to the upper part of the passenger

compartment, and flows to the leg area.
Comfort controls 7-3

Heater without air conditioning function (if so equipped)
NOTE Heater without air condi- Blower speed selection dial

 With the mode selection dial between the
tioning function (if so equipped) N00737901043
“ ” and “ ” positions, air flows mainly When the ignition switch is in the “ON” posi-
N00737700031
to the leg area. With the mode selection dial tion, select the blower speed by turning the
between the “ ”and “ ” positions, air The heater can only be used while the engine blower speed selection dial.
flows mainly to the windshield and the door is running. Turning the dial clockwise will increase the
windows. blower speed; turning the dial counterclock-
wise will decrease it. When the dial is set to
the “OFF” position, all fan-driven airflow
Defroster position Control panel will stop.
N00737801042
7
Air flows mainly to the windshield and the
door windows.
1- Temperature control dial

2- Blower speed selection dial
3- Electric rear window defogger switch
 P. 5-84
4- Mode selection dial
5- Air selection lever

Temperature control dial Mode selection dial

N00738001067 N00738101084
Turn the temperature control dial clockwise To change air flow direction, turn the mode
to make the air warmer. Turn it counterclock- selection dial. Refer to “Changing the mode
wise to make the air cooler. selection” on page 7-2.
7
If the outside air is dusty or contaminated in
some way, use the recirculation position.
Switch to the outside air position every now
and then to keep the windows from fogging
up.
Air selection lever CAUTION

N00738201056  Using recirculated air for a long time may
Normally, use the outside air position to keep cause the windows to fog up.
the windshield and side windows clear and to
quickly remove fog or frost from the wind-
shield. Operating the system
N00738301073
To change the air selection, use the air selec-
tion lever. Heating
“ ” Outside air
“ ” Recirculated air Set the mode selection dial to the “ ” posi-
tion and set the air selection lever to the out-
side air position.


Turn the temperature control dial clockwise
Combination of unheated air and Defrosting or defogging (wind-
or counterclockwise to the desired tempera-
ture. Select the desired blower speed to fit heated air shield, door windows)
N00738401045 N00738501091
your needs.
Set the mode selection dial to the positions
shown in the illustration and set the air selec- CAUTION
tion lever to the outside air position.  For safety, make sure you have a clear view
through all the windows.
The air flow will be directed to the leg area
and the upper part of the passenger compart-
Set the mode selection dial (between “ ”
ment. Set the desired blower speed.
Warm air flows to the leg area and unheated and “ ”) to remove frost or mist from the
7 or slightly warm air (depending upon the windshield and door window.
position of the temperature control dial) flows For ordinary defrosting
to the upper part of the passenger compart- Use this setting to keep the windshield and
ment. door windows clear of mist, and to keep the
leg area heated (when driving in rain or
CAUTION snow).
 The engine speed may increase when the
heater is operating.
With an increased engine speed, a CVT vehi-
cle will creep to a greater degree than with a
lower engine speed. Fully depress the brake
pedal to prevent the vehicle from creeping.
NOTE
 For quick heating, set the blower speed at the
3rd position.
1. Set the mode selection dial to the “ ”

position.

Manual air conditioning (if so equipped)

2. Set the air selection lever to the outside air
Manual air conditioning (if so Blower speed selection dial
position.
N00736501228
3. Select your desired blower speed by turn- equipped)
ing the blower speed selection dial. When the ignition switch is in the “ON” posi-
N00730300344
4. Select your desired temperature by turn- tion, select the blower speed by turning the
ing the temperature control dial. The air conditioning can only be used while blower speed selection dial.
the engine is running. Turning the dial clockwise will increase the
For quick defrosting blower speed; turning the dial counterclock-
wise will decrease it. When the dial is set to
Control panel the “OFF” position, all fan-driven airflow
N00730501327
will stop.
7

position.
1- Temperature control dial
2- Air conditioning switch
position.
3- Blower speed selection dial
3. Set your blower to the maximum speed.
4- Electric rear window defogger
4. Set the temperature to the highest posi-
switch P.5-84
tion.
5- Mode selection dial
6- Air selection lever
NOTE
 To defog quickly, direct the air flow from the
side vents toward the door windows.

Temperature control dial Mode selection dial Air selection lever

N00736601258 N00736701246 N00736801423
Turn the temperature control dial clockwise To change air flow direction, turn the mode Normally, use the outside air position to keep
to make the air warmer. Turn it counterclock- selection dial. Refer to “Changing the mode the windshield and side windows clear and to
wise to make the air cooler. selection” on page 7-2. quickly remove fog or frost from the wind-
shield.
To change the air selection, use the air selec-

tion lever.
“ ” Outside air
7 “ ” Recirculated air
NOTE
 While the engine coolant temperature is low,
the temperature of the air from the heater
will be cool/cold until the engine warms up,
even if you have selected warm air with the
dial.
If the outside air is dusty or contaminated in
some way, use the recirculation position.
Switch to the outside air position every now
and then to keep the windows from fogging
up.

CAUTION Operating the air conditioning Cooling

 Using recirculated air for a long time may system N00731201389
cause the windows to fog up. N00731101304
Heating
Air conditioning switch
N00731001488
Set the mode selection dial to the “ ” posi-
Push the switch, and the air conditioning tion and set the air selection lever to the out-
compressor will turn on. The air conditioning side air position.
indicator light (A) will come on. Turn the temperature control dial clockwise
or counterclockwise to the desired tempera- 7
ture. Select the desired blower speed to fit
your needs.
position.
position.
3. Push the air conditioning switch.
4. Change the temperature by turning the
control dial clockwise or counterclock-
wise.
Push the switch again and the air condition- 5. Set the desired blower speed.
ing compressor will stop and the indicator
light (A) goes off. CAUTION
 The engine speed may increase when the air
NOTE conditioning (cooler or heater) is operating.
 For quick heating, set the blower speed at the
cle will creep to a greater degree than with a
3rd position.

NOTE Combination of unheated air and Defrosting or defogging (wind-

 If the outside air is dusty or contaminated in heated air shield, door windows)
some way, set the air selection lever to the N00731301292 N00731401596
recirculation position. Let in some outside Set the mode selection dial to the positions
air from time to time for good ventilation. shown in the illustration and set the air selec- CAUTION
 To cool the leg areas, set the mode selection tion lever to the outside air position.  For safety, make sure you have a clear view
dial to the “ ” position. through all the windows.
The air flow will be directed to the leg area
and the upper part of the passenger compart-
Set the mode selection dial (between “ ”
ment. Set the desired blower speed.
Warm air flows to the leg area and unheated and “ ”) to remove frost or mist from the
7 or slightly warm air (depending upon the windshield and door window.
position of the temperature control dial) flows For ordinary defrosting
to the upper part of the passenger compart- Use this setting to keep the windshield and
ment. door windows clear of mist, and to keep the
leg area heated (when driving in rain or
snow).

position.


position.
NOTE
 When defrosting, do not set the temperature
3. Select your desired blower speed by turn-
control dial near the maximum cool position.
ing the blower speed selection dial.
This would blow cool air on the window
4. Select your desired temperature by turn- glass and fog it up.
ing the temperature control dial.
For quick defrosting

position.
position.
3. Set your blower to the maximum speed.
4. Set the temperature to the highest posi-
tion.
NOTE
 To defog quickly, direct the air flow from the

Automatic air conditioning (if so equipped)

N00731501353
The air conditioning can only be used while the engine is running.
Control panel
N00711801624
Type 1
Type 2
1- Temperature control switch 9- OFF switch

10- Temperature display
NOTE
2- Air conditioning switch  There is an interior air temperature sensor
3- MODE switch 11- Mode selection display
(A) in the illustrated position.
4- Air selection switch 12- Air selection indicator Never place anything over the sensor, since
5- Blower speed selection switch 13- Air conditioning indicator doing so will prevent it from functioning
6- Defogger switch 14- AUTO indicator properly.
7- AUTO switch 15- Blower speed display
8- Electric rear window defogger switch
 P.5-84

NOTE NOTE
 The temperature value of air conditioning is
switched in conjunction with outside temper-
ature display unit of the multi information
display.
Refer to “Changing the temperature unit” on
page 5-74.
 While the engine coolant temperature is low,
the temperature of the air from the heater
will be cool/cold until the engine warms up,
 A sound will be made every time you push even if you have selected warm air with the
1- Increase
any of the switches.
2- Decrease
switch. 7
To prevent the windshield and windows from
fogging up, the vent mode will be changed to
Blower speed selection switch
“ ” and the blower speed will be reduced.
N00736900179
Temperature control switch  When the temperature is set to the highest or
Press of the blower speed selection N00737001406 the lowest setting under the AUTO opera-
switch to increase the blower speed. Press or of the temperature control tion, the air selection and the air conditioning
Press of the blower speed selection switch to the desired temperature. will be automatically changed as follows.
switch to decrease the blower speed. The selected temperature will be shown in the • Quick Heating (When the temperature is set
to the highest setting)
The selected blower speed will be shown in display (A).
Outside air will be introduced and the air
the display (A). conditioning will stop.
If the air selection and the air conditioning
are operated manually after an automatic
changeover, manual operation will be
selected.
• Quick Cooling (When the temperature is set
to the lowest setting)
Inside air will be recirculated and the air
conditioning will operate.


The above indicates the factory settings. You
can personalize the air selection switch and
NOTE
 When the defogger switch is pressed, the air
air conditioning switch to match your per-
conditioning system automatically operates
sonal preferences.
and outside air (as opposed to recirculated
Contact your Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a air) is selected.
repair facility of your choice for assistance. Refer to “Defrosting or defogging (wind-
Refer to “Personalizing the air conditioning shield, door windows)” on page 7-17.
switch (Changing the function setting)” on
page7-16.
Refer to “Personalizing the air selection Air selection switch
(Changing the function setting)” on N00737200368
7 page7-15.
Normally, use the outside air position to keep
Defogger switch the windshield and side windows clear and to
MODE switch N00703400015 quickly remove fog or frost from the wind-
N00737101247
When this switch is pressed, the mode shield.
To change air flow direction, press the changes to the “ ” mode. The indicator
MODE switch. Each time the MODE switch To change the air selection, simply press the
light (A) will come on. The selected mode is air selection switch.
is pressed, the mode changes to the next one shown in the display (B). Refer to “Changing The selected position will be shown in the
in the following sequence: “ ”  “ ”  the mode selection” on page 7-2. display (A).
“ ”  “ ”  “ ”. The selected mode
is shown in the display (A). Refer to “Chang-
 Outside air: “ ” indicator is ON
ing the mode selection” on page 7-2.
Outside air is introduced into the passen-
ger compartment.
 Recirculated air: “ ” indicator is ON
Air is recirculated inside the passenger
compartment.


the system will beep three times and the
NOTE indicator will flash three times.
 If you press the AUTO switch to select auto-
• When the setting has changed from dis-
matic control after manual operation, the air
abled to enabled,
selection switch will also be automatically
controlled. the system will beep two times and the
indicator will flash three times.
Personalizing the air selection NOTE

(Changing the function setting)  The factory setting is “Enable automatic air
N00760000089 control”.
 When the defogger switch is pressed, the air
When the air conditioning turns on, the air You can change the following functions to
selection will automatically change to the 7
selection is controlled automatically. When match your preference.
outside air position, even if the system is set
the air conditioning turns off, the air selection  Enable automatic air control:
to “Disable automatic air control”, in order
automatically goes back to the outside air to prevent windows from fogging up.
When the AUTO switch is pressed, the air
position. selection switch will also be automatically
If high cooling performance is desired, or if controlled.
the outside air is dusty or contaminated in
some way, use the recirculation position.  Disable automatic air control:
Switch to the outside air position every now Even when the AUTO switch is pressed,
and then to keep the windows from fogging the air selection switch will not be auto-
up. matically controlled.
CAUTION  Changing the settings

Press the air selection switch for about 10
 Using recirculated air for a long time may
cause the windows to fog up.
seconds or longer.
When the setting has changed, the system
will beep and the “ ” indicator will
flash.
• When the setting has changed from
enabled to disabled,


When the AUTO switch is pressed, or
Air conditioning switch NOTE
when the temperature control switch has
N00737301409  When the defogger switch is pressed, the air
been set to the minimum temperature, the
Push the switch, and the air conditioning conditioning will run automatically, even if
air conditioning switch is automatically
compressor will turn on. The “ ” indicator the system is set to “Disable automatic air
controlled. conditioning control”, in order to prevent
will be shown in the display (A).
windows from fogging up.
 Disable automatic air conditioning con-
trol:
The air conditioning switch is not auto- AUTO switch
matically controlled, unless the air condi- N00703500016
tioning switch is used. When the AUTO switch is pressed, the mode
7  Changing the settings
selection, blower speed adjustment, recircu-
lated/outside air selection, temperature
Press the air conditioning switch for about adjustment, and air conditioner ON/OFF sta-
10 seconds or longer. tus are all controlled automatically.
When the setting has changed, the system The “AUTO” indicator will be shown in the
will beep and the “ ” indicator will display (A).
Push the switch again and the air condition- flash.
ing compressor will stop and the indicator • When the setting has changed from
goes off. enabled to disabled,
the system will beep three times and the
indicator will flash three times.
Personalizing the air conditioning • When the setting has changed from dis-
switch (Changing the function set- abled to enabled,
ting) the system will beep two times and the
N00759800090 indicator will flash three times.
You can change the following functions to
match your preference. NOTE
 The factory setting is “Enable automatic air
 Enable automatic air conditioning control: conditioning control”.


In normal conditions, use the system in the
OFF switch Operating the air conditioning
AUTO mode and follow these procedures:
N00703600017
system (manual mode)
Push the switch to turn off the air condition- 1. Push the AUTO switch. N00731801141
ing system. 2. Set the temperature control switch to the Blower speed and vent mode may be con-
desired temperature. The temperature can trolled manually by setting the blower speed
be set within a range of around 61 to 89 selection switch and the MODE switch to the
(Type 1) or 17 to 31 (Type 2). desired positions. To return to automatic
operation, press the AUTO switch.
The vents, recirculation/outside air, blower
speed, temperature adjustment and ON/OFF
CAUTION
of air conditioning will be controlled auto-
matically.  The engine speed may increase when the air
7
conditioning (cooler or heater) is operating.
CAUTION cle will creep to a greater degree than with a
 The engine speed may increase when the air lower engine speed. Fully depress the brake
conditioning (cooler or heater) is operating. pedal to prevent the vehicle from creeping.
Operating the air conditioning cle will creep to a greater degree than with a
system (automatic mode) Defrosting or defogging (wind-
N00731701528 shield, door windows)
N00732401522
NOTE CAUTION
 Set the temperature at about 75 (Type 1) or
 For safety, make sure you have a clear view
24 (Type 2) under normal conditions.
through all the windows.
To remove frost or mist from the windshield

and door windows, use the MODE switch or
defogger switch (“ ” or “ ”).

Important air conditioning operating tips

For ordinary defrosting For quick defrosting
Use this setting to keep the windshield and Important air conditioning
door windows clear of mist, and to keep the operating tips
leg area heated (when driving in rain or N00733700336
snow). 1. Park the vehicle in the shade whenever

possible. Parking in the hot sun makes the
vehicle interior extremely hot which then
requires more time to cool. If it is neces-
sary to park in the sun, open the windows
for the first few minutes of air condition-
ing to expel the hot air.
7 2. Afterwards, keep the windows closed
1. Push the defogger switch to change to the when the air conditioning is in use. The
“ ” position. entry of outside air through open windows
2. Set your blower to the maximum speed. will reduce cooling efficiency.
3. Set the temperature to the highest posi- 3. When running the air conditioning, make
tion. sure the air intake, which is located in
1. Set the MODE switch to the “ ” posi-
front of the windshield, is free of obstruc-
tion.
2. Set the air selection switch to the outside NOTE tions such as leaves. Leaves collected in
 While the mode selection is set “ ” posi-
the air-intake chamber may reduce air
air position.
tion, the air conditioning compressor will run flow and plug the water drains.
3. Select your desired blower speed by
pressing the blower speed selection automatically. The outside air position will
also be selected automatically. Air conditioning system refrig-
switch.
 If the mode selection is set “ ” position,
4. Select your desired temperature by press-
you cannot turn the air conditioning off or
erant and lubricant recommen-
ing the temperature control switch.
select the recirculation position. This pre- dations
vents the windows from fogging up.
 To defog quickly, direct the air flow from the If the air conditioning seems less effective
than usual, the cause might be a refrigerant
 When defrosting, do not set the temperature
leak.
to the maximum cool position. This will
blow cool air on the window glass and fog it
up.

Air purifier (if so equipped)

Have the system inspected by your authorized
Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facility Air purifier (if so equipped) NOTE
 To listen to the audio system while the
of your choice. N00733800180
engine is not running, turn the ignition
The air conditioning system is equipped with switch to the “ACC” position or put the oper-
CAUTION an air filter to remove pollen and dust. ation mode in ACC.
 The air conditioning system in your vehicle The air filter’s ability to collect pollen and For vehicles equipped with the F.A.S.T.-key,
must be charged with the refrigerant HFC- dirt is reduced as it becomes dirty, so replace if the operation mode is left in ACC, the
134a and the lubricant ZXL 200PG. it periodically. For the maintenance interval, accessory power will automatically turn off
Use of any other refrigerant or lubricant will after a certain period of time and you will no
refer to the “WARRANTY AND MAINTE-
cause severe damage and may require replac- longer be able to use the audio system. The
NANCE MANUAL”. accessory power comes on again if the
ing your vehicle’s entire air conditioning
system. engine switch is operated with it in the 7
The release of refrigerant into the atmo- NOTE “ACC” position. Refer to “ACC power auto-
sphere is not recommended.  Operation in certain conditions such as driv- cutout function” on page 5-14.
The new refrigerant HFC-134a in your vehi- ing on a dusty road and frequent use of the  If a cellular phone is used inside the vehicle,
cle is designed not to harm the earth’s ozone air conditioning can lead to reduction of ser- it may create noise in the audio equipment.
layer. However, it may contribute slightly to vice life of the filter. When you feel that the This does not mean that anything is wrong
global warming. air flow is lower than normal or when the with your audio equipment. In such a case,
It is recommended that the old refrigerant be windshield or windows start to fog up easily, use the cellular phone at a place as far away
saved and recycled for future use. replace the air filter. as possible from the audio equipment.
Contact your Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a  If foreign objects or water get into the audio
repair facility of your choice for assistance. equipment, or if smoke or a strange odor
comes from it, immediately turn off the
During a long period of disuse audio system and have it checked at an
The air conditioning should be operated for at AM/FM electronically tuned repair facility of your choice. Never try to
least five minutes each week, even in cold radio with CD player (if so repair it yourself. Avoid using the audio sys-
weather. This includes the quick defrosting tem until it is inspected by a qualified per-
equipped) son.
mode. Operating the air condition system
weekly maintains lubrication of the compres- N00734302131  If the audio system is damaged by foreign
sor internal parts to keep the air conditioning objects, water, or fire, have the system
The audio system can only be used when the checked by a qualified Mitsubishi Motors
in the best operating condition. ignition switch or the operation mode is in technician.
ON or ACC.

AM/FM electronically tuned radio with CD player (if so equipped)
Volume and tone control panel To adjust the tone NOTE

N00711901742 N00712101712  When the SEL switch is rotated, the SEL
1. Press the /MENU button to select indicator will appear on the display.
BASS  TREBLE  FADER  BAL-  When set to “0”, it will beep.
ANCE  Sound control mode off.  This mode will be canceled if any of the fol-
2. Turn the SEL switch either clockwise or lowing occurs.
counterclockwise to change the tone/bal- • The button is pressed.
ance setting. • Another mode is selected.
The status will be shown in the display. • No adjustment is performed within 10 sec-
onds.
7 BASS (Bass tone control)

 In a two-speakers vehicle, keep the FADER
setting in the middle position. Since no rear
speakers are connected, adjusting the
1- PWR (On-Off)/VOL (Volume con- To select the desired bass level. FADER setting toward the “R” (rear) side
trol)/SEL (Select) switch will result in a loss of sound output.
2- Display
3-
TREBLE (Treble tone control)
/MENU (Mode change) button
4- SEL (Select) indicator Radio control panel and display
5- To select the desired treble level.
(Return) button N00734901925
FADER (Front/Rear balance con-

To adjust the volume trol)
N00712001434
Turn the VOL switch clockwise to increase To balance the volume from the F (front) and
the volume; counterclockwise to decrease the the R (rear) speakers.
volume.
The status will be shown in the display. BALANCE (Left/Right balance
control)
1- RADIO (AM/FM selection) button
To balance the volume from the L (left) and
2- PWR (On-Off) switch
the R (right) speakers.


3- Display Automatic tuning CD control panel and display
4- Seek (Down-seek) button
N00735301766
5- Seek (Up-seek) button After keeping the seek button depressed until
6- Memory select buttons it beeps, release the button, and the selected
station reception will start.
To listen to the radio
N00735001936 To enter frequencies into the mem-
1. Press the PWR switch or the RADIO but- ory
ton to turn on the radio.
Press and hold the PWR switch for 2 sec-
As many as 6 AM and 12 FM stations can be
onds or longer to turn off the radio.
2. Press the RADIO button to select the
entered into the memory. 7
desired band (AM/FM1/FM2). To store a frequency in the memory, follow
3. Press the seek button to tune to a station, 1- MEDIA button
these steps: 2- RADIO button
or press one of the memory select buttons
to tune in to a station memorized for that 1. Press the seek button to tune to the fre- 3- INFO button
button. quency you wish to keep in the memory. 4- CD eject button
Refer to “Automatic tuning”, “Manual 2. Press and hold one of the memory select 5- CD indicator
tuning” or “To enter frequencies into the buttons until it beeps. 6- Disc-loading slot
memory”. The sound will be momentarily inter- 7- FOLDER indicator
rupted while the frequency is being 8- TRACK indicator
entered into the memory. The number of 9- Display
To tune the radio 10- RPT (Repeat)/F-RPT (Folder repeat
the button matching the entry in memory
as well as the frequency is displayed. mode) indicator
Manual tuning 3. The preset memory setting is retrieved by 11- RDM (Random mode)/F-RDM (Folder
pressing the button and then releasing it random mode) indicator
The frequency changes every time the seek 12- SEL (Select) indicator
within 1 second.
button is pressed. Press the button to select 13- PAGE (Title scroll) button
the desired station. 14- (Fast-reverse/Track down) button
15- (Fast-forward/Track up) button
16- (Return) button
17- PWR (On-Off)/SEL (Select) switch

18- RPT (Repeat) button on page 7-24.
To eject a disc
19- RDM (Random) button
1. Insert a disc containing MP3 files into the
When the CD eject button is pressed, the disc slot.
To listen to a CD automatically stops and is ejected. 2. Press the MEDIA button if a disc is
N00735502127
already in the CD player.
NOTE The display shows “READING”, then
To load a disc  If you do not remove the disc before 15 sec- playback will begin.
onds have elapsed, the CD player will auto-
1. Insert the disc with the label facing up.
matically reload the disc and stop. NOTE
When a disc is inserted, the CD indicator
will come on and the CD player will begin  While listening to a disc on which CD-DA
7 playing even if the radio is being used. (CD-Digital Audio) and MP3 files have both
The CD player will also start playback
To listen to a music CD been recorded, you can switch between read-
ing of the CD-DA, reading of the MP3 files,
when the MEDIA button is pressed with a
Press the MEDIA button if a disc is already in and the external audio input mode by press-
disc in the player or with a disc set in the
the CD player. The CD player will start playing the MEDIA button for 2 seconds or lon-
Disc-loading slot, even if the radio is ger (until you hear a beep).
being used. back. The track number and the playing time
For information on the external audio input,
2. To stop the CD, turn off the power by will appear on the display. The tracks in the refer to “To use the external audio input
pressing the PWR switch for 2 seconds or disc will be played continuously. function” on page 7-28.
longer, or change over to the radio mode  With a disc that contains both CD-DA and
by pressing the RADIO button, or eject To listen to an MP3 CD MP3 files, the CD-DA files are automati-
the disc by pressing the eject button. cally played first.
 The playback sound quality differs depend-
This CD player allows you to play MP3
ing on the encoding software and the bit rate.
NOTE (MPEG Audio Layer-3) files recorded on For details, refer to the user manual of your
 For information on adjusting the volume and CD-ROMs, CD-Rs (recordable CDs), and encoding software.
tone, refer to “To adjust the volume” on page CD-RWs (rewritable CDs) in ISO9660 Level  Depending on file/folder configurations on a
7-20 and “To adjust the tone” on page 7-20. 1/Level 2, Joliet, and Romeo formats. Each disc, it may take some time before playback
 3 inch (8 cm) compact discs cannot be disc can hold up to 255 files in up to 100 fold- starts.
played on this CD player. ers, up to a maximum of 16 levels. The ID3  MP3 encode software and writing software
 For information concerning the handling of tag information can be displayed during MP3 are not supplied with this unit.
compact discs, refer to “Handling of com- playback. For information concerning ID3
pact discs” on page 7-42. tags, refer to “CD text and MP3 title display”

Folder selection order/MP3 file playback
NOTE order (Example)
Fast-reverse
 You may encounter trouble in playing an
MP3 or displaying the information of MP3 The disc is fast-reversed while the button
Root folder (Root directory)
files recorded with certain writing software is held down.
or CD recorders (CD-R/RW drivers). Playback will begin once the button is
 If you record too many folders or files other released.
than MP3 onto a disc, it may take some time
before playback starts.
 This unit does not record MP3 files.
To select a desired track
 For information on CD-Rs/RWs, refer to
“Notes on CD-Rs/RWs” on page 7-43. Track up
7
The disc will skip as many songs as the num-
CAUTION ber of times the button is pressed.
 Attempting to play a file not in the MP3 for- Level 1 Level 2 Level 3 Level 4 The display window will show the track num-
mat which has the “.mp3” file name may ber of the track selected.
produce noise from the speakers and speaker
damage, and can damage your hearing. Folder selection
in the order Track down
File selection The disc will skip as many songs as the num-
in the order ber of times the button is pressed.
The display window will show the track num-
ber of the track selected.
To fast-forward/reverse the disc
To find a file (MP3 CDs only)
Fast-forward
Operate the SEL switch to select desired file.
The disc is fast-forwarded while the but- When this mode is activated by pressing the
ton is held down. SEL switch, the SEL indicator will be appear
Playback will begin once the button is on the display.
released.


Press the SEL switch :To start this mode or To repeat songs in the same folder (MP3 Random playback for a folder (MP3 CDs
to select the folder or CDs only) only)
file.
Turn the SEL switch :To show the folder or While a song is playing, press the RPT button If the RDM button is pressed, the F-RDM
file. for 2 seconds or longer (until you hear a indicator will come on and the tracks are
beep). The F-RPT indicator will come on and played at random from the folder that is cur-
the disc will repeat all the songs in the folder rently selected.
NOTE that contains the song currently playing. To exit this mode, press the button again.
 To cancel the selection, press the button To exit this mode, press the button again.
to return to the previous step. Random playback for all folders on a
7
 If no operation is performed for 10 seconds NOTE disc (MP3 CDs only)
or more or another button is operated after  With a disc that contains both CD-DA and
the SEL switch has been turned, searching MP3 files, the repeat mode causes only files Press the RDM button for 2 seconds or longer
for the desired file is canceled. of the same format (CD-DA only or MP3 (until you hear a beep). The RDM indicator
 If no operation is performed for 5 seconds or files only) to be repeated. will come on and the tracks are played at ran-
more after the file is displayed, playback dom from all folders on the disc currently
starts. selected.
 When the SEL indicator is not shown on the To exit this mode, press the button again.
To change the order of tracks for
display and the SEL switch is operated, the
volume adjustment is activated. playback
NOTE
 With a disc that contains both CD-DA and
Random playback for a disc (music CDs MP3 files, the random mode causes only
To repeat tracks only) files of the same format (CD-DA only or
MP3 files only) to be played in a random
If the RDM button is pressed, the RDM indi- sequence.
To repeat a track
cator will come on and the tracks are played
Press the RPT button to repeat the same track. at random.
To exit this mode, press the button again.
If the RPT button is pressed, the RPT indica- CD text and MP3 title display
tor will come on. N00752101192
To exit this mode, press the button again. This CD player can display CD text and MP3
titles, including ID3 tag information.


1. Press the INFO button for 2 seconds or
CD text
longer to switch to the ID3 tag informa- Example
tion. CD player mode Clock mode
The CD player can display disc and track
titles. Press the INFO button repeatedly to 2. Press the INFO button repeatedly to make
make selections in the following sequence: selections in the following sequence:
disc name  track name  normal display album TAG  track TAG  artist TAG
mode.  normal display mode.
NOTE NOTE
 The display can show up to 11 characters. If  To return from ID3 tag information to the
a disc name or track name has more than 11 folder name, press the INFO button again for
characters, press the PAGE button to view 2 seconds or longer.
A- (Clock) button 7
the next 11 characters.  When there is no title information to be dis-
 When there is no title information to be displayed, the display shows “NO TITLE”.
NOTE
played, the display shows “NO TITLE”.  The display can show up to 11 characters. If
 While the clock mode is selected, the display
 Characters that the CD player cannot display a folder name, track name, or item of ID3 tag
will switch to the applicable operation dis-
are shown as “•”. information has more than 11 characters,
play whenever the CD player, external audio
press the PAGE button to view the next 11
input mode or radio, etc. is operated. Then, if
MP3 titles characters.
no entries are made for 7 seconds, the dis-
 Characters that the CD player cannot display
play will automatically return to the clock
The CD player can display folder and file are shown as “•”.
mode.
titles. Press the INFO button repeatedly to
make selections in the following sequence:
folder name  file name  normal display To display the clock
mode. N00702600010
Press the button to switch the clock mode.

ID3 tag information
To exit the clock mode, press the button.
The CD player can display ID3 tag informa-
tion for files that have been recorded with
ID3 tag information.

To adjust the clock NOTE To confirm the version number

N00702701047  When the SEL switch is rotated, the SEL of the Gracenote DB (vehicles
with a Bluetooth® 2.0 interface)
indicator will appear on the display.
 This mode will be canceled if any of the fol-
N00702801048
lowing occurs.
• The button is pressed until you hear a
beep.
• The button is pressed.
• Another mode is selected.
 Reset the time after the battery terminals are
7 disconnected and reconnected.
 Seconds do not appear in the clock display,
but after adjusting the “minutes” setting, the
A- (Clock) button clock begins to operate from 0 seconds.
B- SEL (Select) switch
C- SEL (Select) indicator A- /MENU button
D- (Return) button B- SEL (Select) switch
C- SEL (Select) indicator
1. Press and hold the button and the clock D- (Return) button
display flashes.
2. Turn the SEL switch to adjust the “hours”
digit. 1. Press and hold the /MENU button for 2
3. When the “hours” digit is adjusted, press seconds or longer.
2. Turn the SEL switch or press the
the button to flash the “minutes” digit.
Turn the SEL switch to adjust the “min- /MENU button several times to select
utes” digit. “Gracenote DB” and then press the SEL
4. When the desired time is displayed, press switch.
3. Turn the SEL switch to select “DB Ver-
the button to complete the procedure.
sion” and then press the SEL switch to
determine the Gracenote DB version.


NOTE To change the position of the
D- (Return) button
 When the SEL switch is rotated, the SEL speaker of the output sound
(vehicles with Bluetooth® 2.0
indicator will appear on the display.
 This mode will be canceled if any of the fol- 1. Press and hold the /MENU button for 2
lowing occurs. seconds or longer. interface)
2. Turn the SEL switch or press the N00755400030
• The button is pressed.
• Any operation is not performed for more /MENU button several times to select It is possible to change the position of the
than 10 seconds. “PHONE SET” and then press the SEL speaker of the output sound during cellular
• The “EXIT ”MENU” ” is selected. switch. phone voice cut-in.
3. Turn the SEL switch to select “LAN-
GUAGE” and then press the SEL switch.
4. Turn the SEL switch to select “LangChg 7
To change the language (vehi-
YES” and then press the SEL switch.
cles with Bluetooth® 2.0 inter- 5. Turn the SEL switch to select language
face) and then press the SEL switch.
N00702901049 6. Turn the SEL switch to select “LangSet
It is possible to set the language used for YES” and then press the SEL switch.
voice control.
NOTE
 When the SEL switch is rotated, the SEL
indicator will appear on the display. A- /MENU button
 This mode will be canceled if any of the fol- B- SEL (Select) swicth
lowing occurs.
• The button is pressed. D- (Return) button
• Any operation is not performed for more
than 10 seconds.
• The “EXIT ”MENU” ” is selected. 1. Press and hold the /MENU button for 2
seconds or longer.
A- /MENU button
B- SEL (Select) switch


2. Turn the SEL switch or press the
To use the external audio input To activate the external audio
/MENU button several times to select input mode
“PHONE SET” and then press the SEL function
N00703001021
switch. 1. Connect the headphone port of the porta-
3. Turn the SEL switch to select “ ble audio system to the auxiliary audio
PHONE IN ” and then press the SEL connector using a commercially available
switch. connection cord.
4. Turn the SEL switch to select “IN-L” 2. Press the MEDIA button several times to
(output sound from the left side speaker) switch to the AUX mode. The display will
or “IN-R” (output sound from the right show “AUX” and then the external audio
side speaker) and then press the SEL input mode will be activated.
7 switch. 3. To deactivate the external audio input
mode, press the MEDIA button to switch
NOTE to another mode.
 When the SEL switch is rotated, the SEL
A- Auxiliary Audio connector (Mini-jack)
indicator will appear on the display. B- MEDIA button CAUTION
 This mode will be canceled if any of the fol- C- Display  Do not operate the connected audio equip-
lowing occurs. ment while driving.
This could distract you and an accident
• The button is pressed. You can listen to commercially available
might occur.
• Any operation is not performed for more audio equipment, such as a portable audio
than 10 seconds. system, from your vehicle’s speakers, by con-
• The “EXIT ”MENU” ” is selected. necting the audio equipment to the auxiliary NOTE
audio connector.  The connected audio equipment cannot be
adjusted using the vehicle’s audio system.
NOTE  Depending on the connected audio equip-
 Use a stereo mini-jack connector to connect ment, it may produce noise from the speak-
the audio equipment to the auxiliary audio ers.
connector.

To play tracks from USB device (if so equipped)
NOTE NOTE NOTE

 Use the connected audio equipment’s own  For information on how to connect and oper-  A file protected by copyright might not be
power source, such as its battery. ate the commercially available audio equip- able to playback.
Noise may be produced from the speakers if ment, refer to the owner’s manual for the  It is recommended to adjust the equalizer of
the connected audio equipment is used while commercially available audio equipment. the connected device to 0 db or neutral.
charging it using the accessory socket of the
vehicle.
 Do not activate the external audio input To play tracks from USB
iPod control panel and display
mode when no audio equipment is con- device (if so equipped) N00762301070
nected.
N00762200056
Otherwise, noise may be produced from the
speakers. You can connect your iPod or USB memory 7
 Connect audio equipment when the external device to the USB input terminal and play
audio input mode is deactivated or lower the music files stored in the iPod or USB mem-
vehicle’s speaker volume before connecting
ory device.
it.
See the following section for the types of
Noise may be produced from the speakers if
audio equipment is connected after the exter- connectable devices and supported files.
nal audio input mode is activated. Refer to “Types of connectable devices and
 Compared to the CD player mode and radio supported file specifications” on page 5-108.
mode, the vehicle’s speaker volume will be See the following sections for the connecting
lower in the external audio input mode. methods, “How to connect an iPod” on page 1- MEDIA button
Therefore, be careful when switching from 5-107 and “How to connect a USB memory 2- RADIO button
the external audio input mode to the CD device” on page 5-106. 3- INFO button
player mode or radio mode since the speaker
If your vehicle is equipped with a Bluetooth® 4- (USB device active) indicator
volume will be higher.
2.0 interface, you can play music files in your 5- iPod indicator
 Do not use excessive force on the connection
cord. Otherwise, the cord and connectors
iPod or USB memory device via voice opera- 6- Display
may be damaged. tion. 7- TRACK indicator
 If the connection cord alone is left connected Refer to “To play iPod tracks via voice opera- 8- RPT (Repeat mode) indicator
to the auxiliary audio connector, noise may tion” on page 7-31 and “To play USB mem- 9- RDM (Random mode)/F-RDM (Folder
be produced from the speakers. ory device tracks via voice operation” on random mode) indicator
page 7-37. 10- SEL (Select) indicator
11- PAGE (Title scroll) button


12- (Fast-reverse/Track down) button To select a desired track
NOTE
13- (Fast-forward/Track up) button  Depending on the condition of your iPod, it N00762600034
14- (Return) button may take a longer time before the playback
Track up
15- PWR (On-Off)/SEL (Select) switch starts.
16- RPT (Repeat) button Press the button repeatedly until the
17- RDM (Random) button 5. To stop the playback, press the RADIO desired track number appears on the display.
button or MEDIA button to switch to a
To play from an iPod different mode. Track down
N00762401101
1. Press the PWR switch to turn on the audio NOTE Press the button repeatedly until the
7 system. The system turns on in the last  Buttons on the iPod are disabled while the desired track number appears on the display.
mode used. iPod is connected to the audio system.
2. Connect your iPod to the USB input ter-  To adjust the volume and tone, refer to “To
adjust the volume” on page 7-20 and “To
NOTE
minal.
adjust the tone” on page 7-20.  Pressing the button once during the song
Refer to “How to connect an iPod” on
will cause the audio system to restart play-
page 5-107. back from the beginning of the song.
3. Press the MEDIA button several times to
switch to the iPod mode. The input mode To fast-forward/reverse the track
changes as follows every time the N00762501043
To find a track from the iPod
MEDIA button is pressed: CD mode  To fast-forward/reverse the current track,
menu
iPod mode Bluetooth® mode (if so press the button or button.
N00762701090
equipped)  AUX mode  CD mode.
The iPod indicator is illuminated and then Fast-forward You can select desired tracks from the “Playl-
the iPod mode will be activated. ists”, “Artists”, “Albums”, “Songs” or
To fast-forward the current track, press and
4. Once the device is selected, playback “Genre” (vehicles with Bluetooth® 2.0 inter-
hold the button. face) menus on your iPod.
starts and indicator appears on the dis-
play.
Fast-reverse Operate the SEL switch to select desired
tracks.
To fast-reverse the current track, press and The selected menu or category or track is
hold the button. shown in the display.


When this mode is activated by pressing the
To play tracks in random order NOTE
SEL switch, the SEL indicator will be appear
N00762901034  Up to 11 characters are shown in the display
on the display.
Press the RDM button to show “RDM” in the at once. If the title is cut off in the middle,
display. press the PAGE button. The next characters
Press the SEL switch :To start this mode or
The iPod randomly selects and plays tracks are displayed every time this button is
to select the menu or pressed.
category or track. from the current category.
 If no title is stored, “NO TITLE” is shown in
Turn the SEL switch :To show the menu or To exit this mode, press the button again.
the display.
category or track.  Characters that cannot be displayed are sub-
To play tracks in each album in stituted by
random order “•”.
NOTE N00763001045 7
 To cancel the selection, press the button Press and hold the RDM button until you hear
to return to the previous step. a beep to show “F-RDM” in the display. To play iPod tracks via voice
 If no operation is performed for 10 seconds The iPod randomly selects and plays tracks in operation (vehicles with Blue-
or more or another button is operated after
the SEL switch has been pressed, searching
the album from the current category. tooth® 2.0 interface)
of the desired tracks is canceled. N00763200040
 If no operation is performed for 5 seconds or Desired tracks can be selected and played
more after the track is displayed, playback To switch the display from your iPod by “Artist”, “Album”, “Playl-
starts. N00763101059 ist” and “Genre” using voice commands.
 When the SEL indicator is not shown on the You can display the track titles, artist names, For information concerning the voice recog-
display and the SEL switch is operated, the nition function or speaker registration func-
genre and album titles recorded in the iPod.
volume adjustment is activated.
The display changes as follows every time tion, refer to “Bluetooth® 2.0 interface” on
the INFO button is pressed during playback: page 5-85.
Album title  Track name  Artist name  The following explains how to prepare for
To play the same track repeatedly
N00762800023
Genre (vehicles with Bluetooth® 2.0 inter- voice operation and play the tracks.
face)  Normal display.
Press the RPT button during playback to
show “RPT” in the display. Preparation for voice operation
To exit this mode, press the button again. N00763300067
To use the voice operation, press the

SPEECH button (A) first.

3. After the voice guide says “What Artist
would you like to play?,” say the artist
NOTE
 If the confirmation function is active, the
name.
voice guide confirms if the artist name is
4. If there is only one match, the system pro-
correct. If the artist name is correct, say
ceeds to step 6. “Yes”. If not, say “No”. After the voice guide
5. If there are two or more matches, the says “Artist not found, please try again,” the
voice guide will say “More than one system returns to step 2.
match was found, would you like to play
<artist name>?” If you say “Yes,” the sys-
tem proceeds to step 6. 7. The system exits the voice recognition
If you say “No,” the next matching artist mode and starts playback.
7 is spoken by the system.
To search by album title
To search by artist name NOTE N00763501082
N00763401081
 If you say “No” to three or all artist names 1. Say “Play” on the main menu.
1. Say “Play” on the main menu.
offered, the voice guide will say “Artist not
found, please try again” and the system NOTE
NOTE returns to step 2.
 The Bluetooth® 2.0 interface starts recogniz-
 The Bluetooth® 2.0 interface starts recogniz-  Search time depends on the number of songs ing the connected device.
ing the connected device. on your connected device. Devices contain- If the connected device cannot be recognized
If the connected device cannot be recognized ing a large number of songs may take longer
or a connection error occurs, the Bluetooth®
or a connection error occurs, the Bluetooth® to return search results.
2.0 interface starts an appropriate voice
2.0 interface starts an appropriate voice guide. Follow the voice guide.
guide. Follow the voice guide.
6. After the voice guide says “Playing <artist
name>,” the system creates a playlist
2. After the voice guide says “Would you
2. After the voice guide says “Would you index for the artist.
like to play by Artist, Album, Playlist or
like to play by Artist, Album, Playlist or
Genre?,” say “Album”.
Genre?,” say “Artist”.
NOTE
NOTE  If you say “Album <title>,” you can skip
 If you say “Artist <name>,” you can skip step 3.
step 3.


3. After the voice guide says “What Album 7. The system exits the voice recognition 5. If there are two or more matches, the
would you like to play?” say the album mode and starts playback. voice guide will say “More than one
title. match was found, would you like to play
4. If there is only one match, the system pro- To search by playlist <playlist>?” If you say “Yes,” the system
ceeds to step 6. N00763601041
proceeds to step 6.
5. If there are two or more matches, the 1. Say “Play” on the main menu. If you say “No,” the next matching playl-
voice guide will say “More than one ist name is spoken by the system.
match was found, would you like to play NOTE
<album title>?” If you say “Yes,” the sys- NOTE
 The Bluetooth® 2.0 interface starts recogniz-
tem proceeds to step 6.  If you say “No” to three or all playlist names
ing the connected device.
If you say “No,” the name of the next offered, the voice guide will say “Playlist not
If the connected device cannot be recognized
matching album is spoken by the system.
found, please try again” and the system 7
returns to step 2.
NOTE guide. Follow the voice guide.
 If you say “No” to three or all album titles 6. After the voice guide says “Playing
offered, the voice guide will say “Album not <playlist>,” the system creates an index
found, please try again” and the system 2. After the voice guide says “Would you
for the playlist.
returns to step 2. like to play by Artist, Album, Playlist or
Genre?,” say “Playlist”.
NOTE
6. After the voice guide says “Playing  If the confirmation function is active, the
<album title>,” the system creates a playl-
NOTE voice guide confirms if the playlist name is
 If you say “Playlist <playlist>,” you can skip correct. If the playlist name is correct, say
ist index for the album title.
step 3. “Yes”. If not, say “No”. After the voice guide
If the device has no playlist, the voice guide
NOTE will say “There are no playlists stored on
says “Playlist not found, please try again,”
the system returns to step 2. Refer to “Con-
 If the confirmation function is active, the device” and the system returns to step 2. firmation function setting” on page 5-89.
voice guide confirms if the album title is cor-
rect. If the album title is correct, say “Yes”.
If not, say “No”. After the voice guide says 3. After the voice guide says “What Playlist 7. The system exits the voice recognition
“Album not found, please try again,” the sys- would you like to play?,” say the playlist mode and starts playback.
tem returns to step 2. name.
4. If there is only one match, the system pro-
ceeds to step 6.


If you say “No,” the next matching genre
To search by genre USB control panel and display
is spoken by the system.
N00763701042 N00763901073
1. Say “Play” on the main menu.
NOTE
NOTE  If you say “No” to three or all genres offered,
the voice guide will say “Genre not found,
 The Bluetooth® 2.0 interface starts recogniz- please try again” and the system returns to
ing the connected device. step 2.
If the connected device cannot be recognized
6. After the voice guide says “Playing
guide. Follow the voice guide.
<genre>,” the system creates an index for
7 the genre.
2. After the voice guide says “Would you NOTE 1- MEDIA button
like to play by Artist, Album, Playlist or  If the confirmation function is active, the 2- RADIO button
Genre?,” say “Genre”. voice guide confirms if the genre is correct. 3- INFO button
If the genre is correct, say “Yes”. If not, say 4- (USB device active) indicator
NOTE “No”. After the voice guide says “Genre not
5- USB indicator
 If you say “Genre <type>,” you can skip step found, please try again,” the system returns
to step 2. Refer to “Confirmation function 6- Display
3.
setting” on page 5-89. 7- TRACK indicator
8- RPT (Repeat mode)/F-RPT (Folder
3. After the voice guide says “What Genre repeat mode) indicator
would you like to play?,” say the music 7. The system exits the voice recognition 9- RDM (Random mode)/F-RDM (Folder
type. mode and starts playback. random mode) indicator
4. If there is only one match, the system pro- 10- SEL (Select) indicator
ceeds to step 6. 11- PAGE (Title scroll) button
5. If there are two or more matches, the 12- (Fast-reverse/Track down) button
voice guide will say “More than one 13- (Fast-forward/Track up) button
match was found, would you like to play 14- PWR (On-Off)/SEL (Select) switch
<genre>?” If you say “Yes,” the system 15- RPT (Repeat) button
proceeds to step 6. 16- RDM (Random) button

To play from a USB memory NOTE

device  To adjust the volume and tone, refer to “To Root folder (Root directory)
N00764001101
adjust the volume” on page 7-20 and “To
adjust the tone” on page 7-20.
1. Press the PWR switch to turn on the audio
system. The system turns on in the last
mode used.
2. Connect your USB memory device to the Supported compressed music files
USB input terminal. N00764100105
Refer to “How to connect a USB memory This audio can play MP3, WMA and AAC
device” on page 5-106. files recorded in a USB memory device. This
3. Press the MEDIA button several times to audio supports up to 65,535 files in 700 fold- 7
switch to the USB mode. The input mode ers on 8 levels.
Level 1 Level 2 Level 3 Level 4
changes as follows every time the
MEDIA button is pressed: CD mode  Folder selection order/file playback
order (example) Folder selection
USB mode Bluetooth® mode (if so
In the order
equipped)  AUX mode  CD mode. The folder and file hierarchy in the USB
The USB indicator is illuminated and then memory device is shown below. File selection
the USB mode will be activated. In the order
4. Once the device is selected, playback
starts and indicator appears on the dis-
play.
NOTE
 If a file protected by copyrights is played, the
file will be skipped.
NOTE
 Depending on the condition of your USB
device, it may take a longer time before the
playback starts. To fast-forward/reverse the track
N00764201044
5. To stop the playback, press the RADIO To fast-forward/reverse the current track,
button or MEDIA button to switch to a press the button or button.
different mode.

Fast-forward To find a file To play the same file repeatedly

N00703101035 N00764500024
Operate the SEL switch to select desired file. Press the RPT button to show “RPT” in the
hold the button. When this mode is activated by pressing the display. To cancel this mode, press the button
SEL switch, the SEL indicator will be appear again.
Fast-reverse on the display.
To fast-reverse the current track, press and To play the files in the same folder
Press the SEL switch :To start this mode or
hold the button. to select the folder or repeatedly
N00764600038
file.
Turn the SEL switch :To show the folder or Press and hold the RPT button until you hear
7 To select a file
file. a beep to show “F-RPT” in the display.
N00764300035
All tracks in the current folder are played
Track up repeatedly.
NOTE To exit this mode, press the button again.
Press the button repeatedly until the
desired file number appears on the display.  To cancel the selection, press the button
to return to the previous step. To play a folder in random order
 If no operation is performed for 10 seconds N00764701049
Track down or more or another button is operated after Press the RDM button to show “F-RDM” in
the SEL switch has been turned, searching of the display.
Press the button repeatedly until the the desired file is canceled.
desired file number appears on the display. The audio randomly selects and plays tracks
 If no operation is performed for 5 seconds or
from the current folder.
more after the file is displayed, playback
NOTE starts.
 When the SEL indicator is not shown on the
 Pressing the button once during the song display and the SEL switch is operated, the To play all folders in random
will cause the audio system to restart play- volume adjustment is activated.
back from the beginning of the file. order
N00764801040
Press and hold the RDM button until you hear

a beep to show “RDM” in the display.
The audio randomly selects and plays tracks
from all folders.
To play tracks from a Bluetooth® device (vehicles with Bluetooth® 2.0 interface)
NOTE
 If no title is stored, “NO TITLE” is shown in
To switch the display the display.
N00765101053  Characters that cannot be displayed are sub-
You can displays titles with tag information. stituted by
“•”.
Folder title
The display changes as follows every time To play USB memory device
the INFO button is pressed during playback: tracks via voice operation (vehi-
Folder name  File name  Normal display. cles with Bluetooth® 2.0 inter-
face) 7
Tag information N00765200073 To play tracks from a Blue-
1. Press and hold the INFO button until you Desired tracks can be selected and played tooth® device (vehicles with
from your USB memory device by “Artist”,
hear a beep.
2. The display changes as follows every time “Album”, “Playlist” and “Genre” using voice Bluetooth® 2.0 interface)
the INFO button is pressed briefly: Album commands. N00765301114
TAG  Track TAG  Artist TAG  For information concerning the voice recog- You can wirelessly connect a digital audio
nition function or speaker registration func- player or cellular phone supporting Blue-
Genre TAG (vehicles with Bluetooth® 2.0
interface)  Normal display. tion, refer to “Bluetooth® 2.0 interface” on tooth® to listen to the tracks on the connected
page 5-85. device.
NOTE The playback sequence of tracks is the same Refer to “Bluetooth® 2.0 interface” for the
 Press and hold the INFO button again until as when an iPod is connected. Refer to the connecting method, etc. on page 5-85.
you hear a beep, and the tag information dis- “To play iPod tracks via voice operation” on
play returns to the folder title display. page 7-31. The following explains the basic playback
 Up to 11 characters are shown in the display method.
at once. If the title is cut off in the middle,
press the PAGE button. The next characters Preparation for voice operation
are displayed every time this button is
pressed. To use the voice operation, press the
SPEECH button (A) first.

4- TRACK indicator 4. Playback starts automatically.
NOTE 5- Display
 Depending on the connected device, opera-
6- PAGE (Title scroll) button NOTE
tion of the connected device is limited to its
available functions. 7- (Fast-reverse/Track down) button  Depending on the connected device, the
 Depending on the connected device, the 8- (Fast-forward/Track up) button playback may not start automatically.
device may not operate correctly. 9- INFO button In this case, operate the connected device to
 A file protected by copyright might not be 10- Play/Pause button start the playback.
able to playback. 11- Stop button
 It is recommended to adjust the equalizer of 12- RPT (Repeat) button
the connected device to 0 db or neutral. 13- RDM (Random) button To stop the playback (if supported
 The voice operation is not available to access by the device)
7 music files on the connected Bluetooth®
device.
To listen to tracks from a device N00765600035
connected via Bluetooth® To stop the playback, press the Stop button.
N00765501103
To restart the playback, press the Play/Pause
button.
Bluetooth® device control panel 1. Press the PWR switch to turn on the audio
system. The system turns on in the last
and display mode used. To pause the playback (if sup-
N00765401072
2. Press the MEDIA button several times to ported by the device)
switch to the BT-A (Bluetooth®) mode. N00765700036
The input mode changes as follows every To pause the playback, press and hold the
time the MEDIA button is pressed: CD Play/Pause button until you hear a beep.
mode  iPod mode  Bluetooth® mode To restart the playback, press the Play/Pause
(if so equipped)  AUX mode  CD button.
mode.
The BT indicator is illuminated and then To fast-forward/reverse the track
the BT-A mode will be activated.
(if supported by the device)
3. Connect your Bluetooth® device. N00703201023
1- MEDIA button Refer to “Connecting the Bluetooth® 2.0 To fast-forward/reverse the current track,
2- PWR (On-Off) switch interface and Bluetooth® device” on page press the button or button.
3- BT (Bluetooth®) indicator 5-91.

Fast-forward To play the same track repeatedly To play tracks in random order (if
(if supported by the device) supported by the device)
N00765900038 N00766001033
hold the button.
Press the RPT button several times to switch Press the RDM button to show “RDM” in the
to show “RPT” in the display. display.
Fast-reverse The mode changes as follows every time the The system randomly selects and plays tracks
RPT button is pressed: from the Bluetooth® device.
To fast-reverse the current track, press and
No display (not repeat)  RPT (repeat same To exit this mode, press the button again.
hold the button. track)  F-RPT (repeat all tracks)  No dis-
play
To switch the display (if supported
To select a track (if supported by To exit this mode, press the button again.
by the device)
7
the device)
N00766201051
N00765800037 To play all tracks repeatedly (if
The system can display tag information.
Track up supported by the device)
N00703301024
1. Press the INFO button.
Press the button repeatedly until the Press the RPT button several times to switch 2. The display changes as follows every time
desired file number appears on the display. to show “F-RPT” in the display. the INFO button is pressed:
The mode changes as follows every time the Album title  Title name  Artist name
Track down RPT button is pressed:  Genre  Normal display
No display (no repeat)  RPT (repeat same
Press the button repeatedly until the track)  F-RPT (repeat all tracks)  No dis-
desired file number appears on the display. play (no repeat)
NOTE
 Up to 11 characters are shown in the display
All tracks in the Bluetooth® device are played at once. If the title is cut off in the middle,
NOTE repeatedly. press the PAGE button. The next characters
 Pressing the button once during the song To exit this mode, press the button again. are displayed every time this button is
will cause the audio system to restart play- pressed.
back from the beginning of the file.  If no title is stored, “NO TITLE” is shown in
the display.
 Characters that cannot be displayed are sub-
stituted by “•”.

Steering wheel audio remote control switches (if so equipped)

3- MODE key
Steering wheel audio remote Hold down to turn the audio function
control switches (if so equipped) ON/OFF. Additionally, each time this
N00714801494 is pressed, switches the audio source.
The order of switching is shown below.
The remote control switches are located on
the left side of the steering wheel.
These switches can be used when the ignition
switch or the operation mode is in ON or
ACC.
*1: An iPod cable (available separately) is

required.
*2: Requires a separately-purchased Blue-
tooth-capable audio device (vehicles
with a Bluetooth® 2.0 interface).
1- Vol + key, - key
Adjust audio functions and the mobile
phone function volume.
2- CH key, key
Select CD and other audio source
tracks and radio stations.
Hold down to skip up and down
through tracks.

Error codes
Error codes
N00736101790
If an error code appears in the display, take action in accordance with the table below.
Audio system
Error display Item Repair

Disc is not loaded correctly, or condensation on Insert disc with label facing up.
CHECK DISC
disc. Remove moisture from disc.
Disc is dirty, scratched, or deformed; or exces-
7
DISC ERROR Clean or replace disc. Retry when vibrations stop.
sive vehicle vibration.
Eject disc and reload. If disc will not eject, bring your vehicle
INTERNAL E Loading or eject error. Pick-up is out of position. to your authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facil-
ity of your choice for repair.
HEAT ERROR Internal protection against high temperatures. Allow radio to cool by waiting about 30 minutes.
Bring your vehicle to your authorized Mitsubishi Motors
ERROR DC Foreign material is inside of radio or amplifier.
dealer or a repair facility of your choice for repair.
iPod (if so equipped)

NO SONG There are no playable music files. Record music files in the iPod.
VER ERROR The iPod or its software cannot be recognized. Connect a supported iPod.

Handling of compact discs
USB memory device (if so equipped)

The file is protected by copyrights, etc. An error is displayed
FILE ERROR The file cannot be played. for several seconds, and then the next playable file is played
automatically.
UNSUPPORTED (first) 
The USB memory device cannot be recognized. Remove the USB memory device.
DEVICE (after)
UNSUPPORTED (first)  The USB memory device format cannot be rec-
7 FORMAT (after) ognized.
Remove the USB memory device.
Remove the USB memory device.

An overcurrent or other power-supply error has
USB BUS PWR Have the vehicle inspected at an authorized Mitsubishi
occurred.
Motors dealer or a repair facility of your choice.
Have the vehicle inspected at an authorized Mitsubishi
LSI ERROR Internal device errors
Motors dealer or a repair facility of your choice.
 The use of special shaped, damaged com-

Handling of compact discs pact discs (like cracked discs) or low-
N00734101350
quality compact discs (like warped discs
 Use only the type of compact discs that or burrs on the discs) such as those shown
have the mark shown in the illustration will damage the CD player.
below. (Playback of CD-R or CD-RW
discs may cause problems.)

Handling of compact discs

 When the CD player is subjected to vio-
lent vibrations, such as during off-road
Notes on CD-Rs/RWs
N00751900066
driving, the tracking may not work.
 You may have trouble playing back some
 When storing compact discs, always store
CD-R/RW discs recorded on CD record-
them in their separate cases. Never place
ers (CD-R/RW drives), either due to their
compact discs in direct sunlight, or any-
recording characteristics or dirt, finger-
where the temperature or humidity is
prints, scratches, etc. on the disc surface.
high.
 CD-R/RW discs are less resistant to high
 Never touch the flat surface of the disc
temperatures and high humidity than ordi-
where there isn’t a label. This will damage
nary music CDs and can therefore be
the disc surface and could affect the sound
damaged and rendered unplayable if left
quality. When handling a compact disc,
inside your vehicle for a long time.
7
always hold it by the outer edge and the
 Depending on the combination of the
center hole.
writing software, the CD recorder (CD-
 To clean a disc, use a soft, clean, dry
R/RW drive), and the disc used to create a
cloth. Wipe directly from the center hole
CD-R/RW, the disc might not play suc-
toward the outer edge. Do not wipe in a
cessfully.
circle. Never use any chemicals such as
 This player cannot play the CD-R/RW
benzine, paint thinner, a disc spray
discs if the session is not closed.
cleaner, or an anti-static agent on the disc.
 This player cannot play CD-R/RW discs
 Do not use a ball point pen, felt pen, pen-
 In the following circumstances, moisture which contain data other than CD-DA or
cil, etc. to write on the label surface of the
can form on compact discs and inside the MP3 data (Video CD, etc.).
disc.
audio system, preventing normal opera-  Be sure to observe the handling instruc-
 Do not put additional labels or stickers on
tion. tions for the CD-R/RW disc.
compact discs. Also, do not use any com-
• When there is high humidity (for exam- pact disc on which a label or sticker has
ple, when it is raining). started to peel off or any compact disc that
• When the temperature suddenly rises, has stickiness or other contamination left
such as right after the heater is turned on by a peeled-off label or sticker. If you use
in cold weather. such a compact disc, the CD player may
stop working properly and you may not be
In this case, wait until the moisture has
able to eject the compact disc.
had time to dry out.

Antenna
WARNING To install Signal transmission

 Operating the CD player in a manner
other than specifically instructed herein FM signals do not follow the earth surface
Screw the pole (A) clockwise into the base
may result in hazardous radiation expo- nor are they reflected by the upper atmo-
(B) until it is securely retained.
sure. Do not remove the cover and attempt sphere. For this reason, FM broadcasts cannot
to repair the CD player by yourself. There be received over long distances. AM signals
are no user serviceable parts inside. In NOTE follow the earth’s surface and are reflected by
case of malfunction, contact an authorized  Be sure to remove the roof antenna in the the upper atmosphere. For this reason, AM
Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facil- following cases: broadcasts can be received over longer dis-
ity of your choice. • When using an automatic car wash tances.
• When covering your vehicle with a car
7 cover
Antenna • When driving into a structure that has a low FM AM
N00734201511
ceiling.
To remove
General information about
Turn the pole (A) counterclockwise. your radio
N00733901524
25 to 40 mile radius 100 mile radius
Your vehicle’s radio receives both AM and (40 to 64 km) (160 km)
FM stations.
The quality of your reception is affected by
distance, obstacles, and signal interference.
Weak reception (fading)
Because of the limited range of FM signals

and the way FM waves transmit, you may
experience weak or fading FM reception.
When the broadcast is blocked by mountains
or similar obstructions, reception can be dis-
turbed.

General information about your radio

those without an electronic noise suppression
Reflection Cross modulation device. The disturbance is even greater if the
If one listens to a weak station and is in the station is weak or poorly tuned.
The reason why one can hear FM but not AM FM reception is not as sensitive to electrical
vicinity of another strong station, both sta-
in parking garages, under bridges etc., is that disturbances as AM. AM reception is sensi-
tions might be received simultaneously.
FM signals, unlike AM signals, are reflected tive to electrical disturbances such as power
by solid objects such as buildings, etc. lines, lightning and other types of similar
Because FM signals are easily reflected by electrical phenomena.
buildings, this can also cause reception dis-
turbances.
The direct signal from the broadcast station
reaches the antenna slightly before the 7
reflected signal. This time difference may
cause some reception disturbance or flutter.
This problem occurs primarily in urban areas.
FM stereo reception
Stereo reception requires a high quality

broadcast signal. This means that types of
disturbances mentioned previously become
more marked and the reception range is
somewhat diminished during stereo recep-
tion.
Causes of disturbances
FM reception is affected by the electrical sys-

tems of vehicles in the vicinity, especially

For emergencies
If the vehicle breaks down ...............................................................8-2

Jump-starting the engine ..................................................................8-2
Engine overheating ..........................................................................8-4
Jack and tools ...................................................................................8-5
How to change a tire ........................................................................8-6
Towing ...........................................................................................8-12
Operation under adverse driving conditions ..................................8-13
Fuel Pump Shut-off System ...........................................................8-15 8
If the vehicle breaks down
If the vehicle breaks down Jump-starting the engine CAUTION

N00836300233 N00836401837  Check the other vehicle. It must have a 12-
volt battery. If the other system isn’t 12-volt,
If your vehicle breaks down on the road, If the engine cannot be started because the
both systems can be damaged.
move to the shoulder and turn on the hazard battery is weak or dead, you can start it with
warning flashers. If there is no shoulder, or the battery from another vehicle using jumper
the shoulder is not safe, drive in the right lane cables. 3. You could be injured if the vehicles move.
slowly with the hazard lights flashing until Set the parking brake firmly on each vehi-
you come to a safe stopping place. Keep the cle. Put an automatic transaxle or CVT in
WARNING “P” (PARK) or a manual transaxle in “N”
flashers flashing.  To reduce the risk of igniting flammable (Neutral).
gas that may be emitted from the battery,
If the engine stops/fails carefully read this section before jump-
starting the vehicle.
8  Do not try to start your vehicle by pushing
OFF.
If the engine stops, there will be no power or towing. This can cause an accident
assist to the steering and brakes, making these resulting in serious injury or death and NOTE
difficult to use. can damage the vehicle.  Turn off all lights, heater, and other electrical
loads. This will avoid sparks and help save
 The brake booster will not work, so the both batteries.
brakes will not grip well. The brake pedal NOTE
will be harder to press than usual.  Do not use jumper cables if they have dam- 5. Make sure your battery electrolyte is at
 Since there is no power steering assist, the age or corrosion. the proper level. (Refer to “Battery” on
steering wheel will be hard to turn. page 9-10.)
1. Take off any metal jewelry such as watch
When the engine fails at the bands or bracelets that might create an WARNING
intersection accidental electrical contact.  If the electrolyte fluid is not visible, or
2. Position the vehicles close enough looks frozen, DO NOT ATTEMPT JUMP
together so that the jumper cables can STARTING!!
Get help from your passengers, bystanders, The battery might split open or explode if
reach, but be sure the vehicles aren’t
etc. to push the vehicle and move it to a safe the temperature is below the freezing
touching each other.
area. point or if it is not filled to the proper
level.
8-2 For emergencies

Jump-starting the engine

6. Connect one end of one jumper cable 8. Start the engine in the vehicle providing
NOTE the boost. Let the engine idle a few min-
to the positive (+) terminal of the dis-
 Use the proper cables suitable for the battery
charged battery (A), and then connect the utes, then start the engine in the vehicle
size.
other end to the positive (+) terminal with the discharged battery.
Otherwise heat damage to the cables could
of the booster battery (B). result. 9. After the engine is started, disconnect the
cables in the reverse order from the way
7. Connect one end of the other jumper cable you connected them.
to the negative (-) terminal of the
booster battery (B), and then connect the Charging the battery by using
other end to the designated ground
location of the vehicle with the discharged
an external battery charger
battery (A) at the point farthest from the
battery. WARNING 8
 Always remove the battery from your
WARNING vehicle when the battery is charged by an
 Be sure to follow the proper order when external battery charger.
connecting the batteries, of:  Keep sparks, cigarettes, and flames away
WARNING    from the battery because the battery could
 Make sure that the jumper cables and  Make sure that the connection is made explode.
your clothing are clear of the cooling fans to the correct designated location (as  Keep your work area well vented when
and drive belts. Entanglement with the shown in the illustration) properly. If the charging or using the battery in an
fans or belts can cause serious personal connection is directly made to the negative enclosed space.
injury. (-) terminal of the battery, the flammable  Remove all the caps before charging the
gases from inside the battery might catch battery.
fire and explode, causing personal injury.  Electrolyte (battery acid) is made of corro-
NOTE  When connecting the jumper cable, do not sive diluted sulfuric acid. If electrolyte
 Open the terminal cover before connecting connect the positive (+) cable to the nega- comes in contact with your hands, eyes,
the jumper cable to the positive terminal of tive (-) terminal. Sparks can make the bat- clothes, or the painted surface of your
the battery. tery explode. vehicle, thoroughly flush with water. If
(Refer to “Battery: Disconnection and con- electrolyte gets in your eyes, flush them
nection” on page 9-11.) immediately and thoroughly with water,
and get prompt medical attention.
For emergencies 8-3

Engine overheating
3. Check that the cooling fan is running. If 6. When you do not see any more steam or
WARNING the fan is not turning, stop the engine spray, open the hood. Look for obvious
 Always wear protective clothing and gog-
immediately and contact an authorized leaks, such as a split radiator hose. Be
gles when working near the battery.
Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facil- careful as components will be hot. Any
 Keep the battery out of the reach of chil-
ity of your choice for assistance. leak source must be repaired.
dren.
7. If there is no obvious leak source, check
WARNING the coolant level in the engine coolant
As your vehicle has anti-lock  To avoid personal injury, keep hands, hair, reserve tank. If there is none, or if it is too
brakes jewelry and clothes away from the cooling low, slowly add coolant.
fan. The cooling fan can start at any time. 8. If the engine coolant reserve tank needs
coolant, you will probably also need to
If you drive your vehicle with a low battery
4. If you see steam or spray coming from add coolant to the radiator. Do not loosen
charge after the engine has been started by
under the hood, turn off the engine. or remove the radiator cap until the engine
8 using jumper cables, the engine may misfire.
This can cause the anti-lock braking system 5. If you do not see steam or spray coming has cooled down.
warning light to blink on and off. This is only from under the hood, leave the engine on
due to the low battery voltage. It is not a until the high coolant temperature warn- WARNING
problem with the brake system. If this hap- ing light goes off. After the high coolant  Removing the radiator cap could scald
temperature warning light has gone off, you with escaping hot water or steam.
pens, fully charge the battery and ensure the
you can start driving again. If the high When checking the radiator level, cover
charging system is operating properly. the cap with a cloth before trying to
coolant temperature warning light stays
remove it. Turn it slowly counterclock-
on, turn off the engine.
Engine overheating wise, without pressing down, to the first
notch. The pressure in the system will then
N00836501391 WARNING be let out. When the pressure is COM-
If the high coolant temperature warning light  Before raising the engine hood, check to PLETELY LET OUT, press down and
illuminates while the engine is running, the see if there is steam or spray coming from keep turning the cap counterclockwise
engine may be overheating. If this happens: under the hood. Steam or spray coming until it comes off.
from an overheated engine could seriously
1. Stop the vehicle in a safe place. Turn on scald you.
Do not open the hood until there is no 9. Start the engine, and slowly add coolant,
the hazard warning flashers. up to the bottom of the filler neck. Use
steam or spray.
2. With the engine still running, carefully plain water if you have to (and replace it
raise the engine hood to vent the engine with the right coolant as soon as possible).
compartment.
8-4 For emergencies

Jack and tools

10. Replace the radiator cap and tighten it
fully. Check the coolant temperature Jack and tools Tools
warning light. You can start driving again N00836601422
when the high coolant temperature warn-

ing light does not come on. Storage
11. Have the system inspected by your autho-
rized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair The tools are stored beneath the floor board
facility of your choice. of the cargo area. The jack is stored under the
driver’s seat.
1- Tools bag 8
2- Wheel nut wrench
3- Jack bar
4- Towing hook
Jack
Move the driver’s seat fully forward to access

the jack from the rear seat area.
(Refer to “Front seat” on page 4-3.)
1- Tools
2- Jack
CAUTION
 Never access, remove or store the jack from
the front of the driver’s seat. Doing so could
damage electrical wires under the driver’s
seat.
For emergencies 8-5

How to change a tire

On vehicles equipped with continuously
To remove WARNING variable transmission (CVT), move the
 After storing the jack in place, make sure
selector lever to the “P” (PARK) position,
Turn the shaft end of the jack in the direction the jack is securely fixed in the holder.
and stop the engine.
(1) until the jack fully retracts and remove the If the jack is not fixed securely, it may
move and hit an occupant in an accident 4. Turn on the hazard flashers and set up a
jack from the holder (A). warning triangle, flashing signal light,
resulting in serious injury or death. Also
the jack may move forward during driv- etc., at an adequate distance from the
To store ing and could interfere with driver’s pedal vehicle, and have all your passengers exit
operation causing an accident. the vehicle.
Put the jack in the holder (A) and turn the 5. To prevent the vehicle from rolling when
shaft end of the jack in the direction (2) by it is raised on the jack, place chocks or
hand until the jack is firmly secured.
How to change a tire blocks (A) at the tire that is diagonally
opposite from the tire (B) you are chang-
8 N00836901887
ing.
WARNING
 The jack should not be used for any pur-
pose other than to change a tire.
 Never get under the vehicle or put any
portion of your body under the vehicle
while it is supported by the jack.
Before changing a tire, first stop your vehicle

in a safe, flat location.
1. Park the vehicle on level and stable

ground.
2. Set the parking brake firmly. WARNING
3. On vehicles equipped with manual trans-  Be sure to apply chocks or blocks to the
axle, stop the engine and move the gear- correct tire when jacking up the vehicle. If
shift lever to the “R” (Reverse) position. the vehicle moves while jacked up, the
jack could slip out of position, leading to
an accident.
8-6 For emergencies

NOTE CAUTION CAUTION

 The chocks shown in the illustration do not  While the compact spare tire is stowed, the  Because the compact spare tire is designed
come with your vehicle. It is recommended inflation pressure should be checked at least only for your vehicle, do not use it on any
that you purchase chocks or blocks and keep once a month to assure that it remains at the other vehicle.
them in the vehicle for use if needed. recommended inflation pressure. See the tire  Do not put the compact spare tire on a differ-
 If chocks or blocks are not available, use and loading information placard attached to ent wheel, and do not put standard tires,
stones or any other objects that are large the driver’s door sill. Refer to “Tire and load- snow tires, wheel covers or trim rings on the
enough to hold the wheel in position. ing information placard” on page 11-3. compact spare wheel. Otherwise, you could
 Driving with an improperly inflated tire can damage these parts or other parts on your
cause an accident. If you have no choice but vehicle.
6. Get the jack, bar and wheel nut wrench to drive with an under-inflated tire, keep  Do not use tire chains with your compact
ready. your speed down and avoid sudden steering spare tire. Using a chain could cause damage
(Refer to “Jack and tools” on page 8-5.) or braking, if possible. Inflate the tire to the to your vehicle and loss of the chains.
correct pressure as soon as possible. Refer to 8
“Tire inflation pressures” on page 9-15.
Spare tire information  The compact spare tire should be used only To remove compact spare tire
N00849600344
temporarily. While the compact spare tire is N00849701371
being used, the tire pressure monitoring sys- 1. Lift up the floor board of the cargo area.
Compact spare tire tem will not function properly. Have the tire 2. To remove the compact spare tire, remove
replaced or repaired at an authorized the installation clamp (A) by turning it
Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facility counterclockwise.
The compact spare tire is stowed beneath the
of your choice as soon as possible.
floor board of the cargo area. It is designed to
 Do not go over 50 mph (80 km/h) when driv-
save space in the cargo area. Its lighter weight ing with the compact spare tire.
makes it easier to use if a flat tire occurs.  Avoid sudden starting and braking when
driving with the compact spare tire.
WARNING  Do not drive through automatic car washes
 Tires, including spare tire, degrade over and over obstacles that could possibly dam-
time with age even when they are not age the underside of your vehicle. Because
being used. It is recommended that tires the compact spare tire is smaller than the
over 6 years generally be replaced even if original tire, there is less clearance between
damage is not obvious. the ground and your vehicle.
For emergencies 8-7


2. Place the jack under one of the jacking
NOTE points (A) shown in the illustration. Use
NOTE
 The flat tire with a normal size wheel cannot  Put the spare wheel under the vehicle body
the jacking point closest to the tire you
be stored beneath the floor board. Store the near the jack. This makes it safer if the jack
wish to change.
flat tire in the cargo area. slips out of position.
To change a tire
N00849801529
1. On vehicles with wheel covers, first

remove the covers (refer to “Wheel cov-
ers” on page 8-11). Then, loosen the
wheel nuts with the wheel nut wrench. Do
8 not remove the wheel nuts yet.
WARNING
 Set the jack only at the positions shown 3. Rotate the jack by hand until the flange
here. If the jack is set at a wrong position, portion (B) fits in the groove (C) at the top
it could dent your vehicle or the jack of the jack.
might fall over and cause personal injury.
 Do not use the jack on a tilted or soft sur-
face.
Otherwise, the jack might slip and cause
personal injury. Always use the jack on a
flat, hard surface. Before setting the jack,
make sure there are no sand or pebbles
under the jack base.
8-8 For emergencies


4. Insert the bar (D) into the wheel nut
wrench (E). Then put the end of the bar
WARNING WARNING
 No one should be in your vehicle when  Mount the spare wheel with the valve stem
into the shaft’s jack end, as shown in the
using the jack. (I) facing outward. If you cannot see the
illustration.
 Do not start or run the engine while your valve stem (I), you have installed the
Slowly rotate the wheel nut wrench until wheel backwards.
vehicle is on the jack.
the tire is raised slightly off the ground Operating the vehicle with the spare wheel
 Do not turn the raised wheel. The tires
surface. that are still on the ground could turn and installed backwards can cause vehicle
make your vehicle fall off the jack. damage and result in an accident.
5. Remove the wheel nuts with the wheel nut

wrench, then take the wheel off.
CAUTION
 Handle the wheel carefully when changing 8
the tire, to avoid scratching the wheel sur-
face.
6. Clean out any mud, etc. on the hub sur-

face (F), hub bolts (G) or in the installa-
WARNING tion holes (H) in the wheel, and then
 Stop jacking up the vehicle as soon as the mount the spare tire.
tire is raised off the ground. It is danger-
ous to raise the vehicle any higher.
 Do not get under your vehicle while using
the jack.
 Do not bump the raised vehicle or leave it
sitting on the jack for a long time. Both
are very dangerous.
 Do not use a jack except the one that came
with your vehicle.
 The jack should not be used for any pur-
pose other than to change a tire.
For emergencies 8-9


7. Install the wheel nuts with their tapered 9. Tighten the nuts in the order shown in the 11. Check the tire inflation pressure. The rec-
ends facing inward, then tighten by hand illustration until each nut has been tight- ommended tire pressure for your vehicle
until the wheel is no longer loose. ened to the torque listed here. is listed on the tire and loading informa-
65 to 80 ft-lb (88 to 108 N•m) tion placard attached to the driver’s door
sill as shown in the illustration. Refer to
Steel wheel
Aluminum wheel
8
CAUTION
 Never apply oil to either the wheel bolts or CAUTION
the nuts or they will tighten too much.  Never use your foot or a pipe extension to
apply added force to the wheel nut wrench CAUTION
8. Lower the vehicle slowly until the tire when tightening the wheel nuts. If you do so,  Driving with an improperly inflated tire can
you can over-tighten the wheel nuts and cause an accident. If you have no choice but
touches the ground, by rotating the wheel
damage the wheel, wheel nuts and hub bolts. to drive with an under-inflated tire, keep
nut wrench counterclockwise.
your speed down and avoid sudden steering
10. Lower the jack all the way and remove it. or braking, if possible. Inflate the tire to the
correct pressure as soon as possible. Refer to
 After changing the tire and driving the vehi-
cle about 620 miles (1,000 km), retighten the
wheel nuts to make sure that they have not
come loose.
8-10 For emergencies

CAUTION Wheel cover (if so equipped) CAUTION

 If the steering wheel vibrates when driving N00849401248  Trying to remove the wheel cover with only
after changing the tire, have the tire checked your bare hands can seriously injure your
for balance at an authorized Mitsubishi To remove fingers.
choice. Wrap the tip of the bar with a cloth, insert it
 Do not mix one type of tire with another or into the notch provided in the wheel cover, To install
use a different size from the one listed. This and pry the cover away from the wheel.
would cause early wear and poor handling.
Using the same procedure at the other wheel
cover notches, work the wheel cover away CAUTION
To store the flat tire or spare from the wheel to remove it completely.  Before installing the wheel cover to the
wheel, make sure that the tabs (A) on the
tire, jack, bar and wheel nut back of the wheel cover correctly engage the
wrench ring (B) to prevent the wheel cover from 8
N00850000175 coming off. Do not install a wheel cover that
has broken tabs.
Store the flat tire in the cargo area.
Reverse the removing procedure when stor-
ing the spare tire, jack, bar and wheel nut
wrench.
Refer to “To remove the spare tire” on page
8-7 and “Jack and tools” on page 8-5.
NOTE
 The wheel cover is made of plastic. Be care-
ful when prying it off.
For emergencies 8-11

Towing
1. Align the tire air valve (C) and the wheel 4. Gently tap around the circumference of
cover notch (D). the wheel cover at the top (H), then push
CAUTION
 Do not attempt to be towed by another vehi-
the wheel cover into place.
cle with a rope.
NOTE
 Do not use the tie-down hooks for towing.
These hooks are provided only for the pur-
pose of transporting the vehicle itself.
 Your vehicle cannot tow any other vehicle.
There may be local regulations concerning

8 towing in your area.
NOTE Obey the regulations of the area where you
 Full wheel covers have a symbol mark (E) are driving your vehicle.
provided on the reverse side to show the air
Towing
N00837001960
valve location.
Before installing the wheel cover to the
wheel, make sure that the opening with the If your vehicle needs to be
symbol mark is correctly aligned with the air
valve.
towed
If towing is necessary, we recommend you to

2. Push the bottom (F) of the wheel cover have it done by a commercial tow truck ser-
into the wheel. vice.
3. Gently push in both sides (G) of the wheel When towing is required, transport the vehi-
cover and hold them in place with both cle using a tow truck.
knees.
Incorrect towing equipment could damage
your vehicle.

Operation under adverse driving conditions
CAUTION Towing with rear wheels off the

 Do not tow continuously variable transmis- ground (Type B - M/T vehicles
sion (CVT) vehicles with the driving wheels only)
on the ground (Type B) as illustrated. If the
vehicle is towed like this, the continuously
Towing with rear wheels off the ground. variable transmission (CVT) fluid may not Set the gearshift lever to the “N” (Neutral)
Do not tow CVT vehicles with this style. reach all parts of the transmission, thus dam- position.
aging it. Secure the steering wheel in a straight-ahead
If you tow CVT vehicles, use Type C, D or E position with a rope or tie-down strap.
equipment.
 If the manual transaxle is malfunctioning or
Towing with front wheels off the ground.
damaged, transport the vehicle with the driv-
Towing with front wheels off the
ing wheels on a carriage (Type C, D or E) as ground (Type C)
illustrated. 8
 If the vehicle is towed with the ignition Release the parking brake.
switch in the “ON” position or the operation Place the gearshift lever in the “N” (Neutral)
mode in ON and only the front wheels or
position (manual transaxle) or the selector
only the rear wheels raised off the ground
lever in the “N” (NEUTRAL) position
(Type B or C), the Active Stability Control
(ASC) may operate, resulting in an accident. (CVT).
When towing the vehicle with the rear
wheels raised, turn the ignition switch to the
“ACC” position or put the operation mode in
Operation under adverse
ACC. When towing the vehicle with the driving conditions
front wheels raised, keep the ignition switch N00837200750
Towing the vehicle by a tow or the operation mode as follows.
truck [Except for vehicles equipped with the
If your vehicle becomes stuck in
F.A.S.T.-key]
The ignition switch is in “OFF” or “ACC” sand, mud or snow
CAUTION position.
 This vehicle must not be towed by a tow If your vehicle becomes stuck in snow, sand,
The operation mode is in OFF or ACC.
truck using sling lift type equipment (Type or mud, it can often be moved by a rocking
A) as illustrated. Using a sling lift will dam- motion. Rock your vehicle back and forth to
age the bumper and front end. free it.

Operation under adverse driving conditions

Do not rev the engine or spin the wheels.  Your vehicle is equipped with an anti-lock
Constant efforts to free a stuck vehicle can
CAUTION braking system (ABS). Hold the brake
 When driving in rain, a layer of water may
cause overheating and transaxle failure. Let pedal down firmly and keep it depressed.
form between the tires and the road surface
the engine idle for a few minutes to cool the Do not pump the brake pedal which will
(hydroplaning). This loosens your tires’ grip
transaxle before trying again. on the road, making it difficult to steer or result in reduced braking performance.
If your vehicle is still stuck after several rock- brake properly. When driving on a wet road:  After parking on snowy or icy roads, it
ing attempts, call for a commercial tow truck • Drive your vehicle at a safe speed. may be difficult to move your vehicle due
service. • Do not drive on worn tires. to the brake being frozen. Depress the
• Always keep the tires at the correct infla- accelerator pedal little by little to move
WARNING tion pressures. the vehicle when safe to do so.
 When trying to rock your vehicle out of a
CAUTION
stuck position, make sure that there are no On snowy or icy roads  Do not depress the accelerator pedal rapidly.
people nearby. The rocking motion can
8 make your vehicle suddenly lurch forward  When driving on a road covered with
The vehicle could start moving when it
or backward, and injure any bystanders. breaks free from the ice, possibly resulting in
snow or ice, use snow tires. Tire chains an accident.
cannot be used on your vehicle. There
may be state or local regulations about
On wet roads using snow tires. Always check the regu-
lations in your local area before using
On a bumpy or rutted road
them. Refer to “Snow tires” on page 9-18
CAUTION and “Tire chains” on page 9-18.
 Drive as slow as possible when driving on
 Avoid flooded roads. Water is often deeper bumpy, rutted roads or over potholes etc.
 Drive slowly. Do not make sudden starts
than it looks, and you could be seriously hurt
or stops, sharp turns, or slam on the
by driving into flood water. CAUTION
brakes.
 When driving in rain, on water-covered
 Allow extra distance between your vehi-  Driving on bumpy, rutted roads or over pot-
roads, or through a car wash, water could get
cle and the vehicle in front of you, and holes can damage the tires and wheels.
into the brake discs and make them fail tem-
avoid sudden braking. Wheels with low-profiles tires or under-
porarily. In such cases, lightly press the
inflated tires are especially at risk for dam-
brake pedal to see if they are working prop-  If a skid occurs when the accelerator
age.
erly. If they are not, press the pedal lightly pedal is depressed, take your foot off the
 The vehicle’s body, bumper, muffler and
several times while driving to dry the brake pedal. Steer gently in the direction of the
other parts may be damaged if the vehicle is:
pads or linings, then check them again. skid.

Fuel Pump Shut-off System
CAUTION
• driven over a step (for example, at the
entrance or exit of a parking lot);
• parked too closely against a curb or parking
block, or by the side of a road with curb-
stones;
• driven on a steep slope.
Fuel Pump Shut-off System

N00860600031
WARNING
 Before attempting to restart the engine 8
after a collision, always inspect the ground
under the vehicle for leaking fuel. If a fuel
leak is found or a fuel odor is detected, do
not restart the engine.
 Mitsubishi Motors recommends that your
vehicle be inspected by an authorized Mit-
subishi Motors dealer after any collision.
In the event of a collision causing frontal air-

bag deployment, the fuel pump shut-off sys-
tem will activate to stop fuel supply to the
engine.

Vehicle care and maintenance
Service precautions ..........................................................................9-2

Catalytic converter ...........................................................................9-3
Engine hood .....................................................................................9-4
View of the engine compartment .....................................................9-5
Engine oil and oil filter ....................................................................9-5
Engine coolant .................................................................................9-7
Air cleaner filter ...............................................................................9-8
Manual transaxle oil (if so equipped) ...............................................9-9
Continuously variable transmission (CVT) fluid
(if so equipped) ...........................................................................9-9 9
Washer fluid .....................................................................................9-9
Brake fluid .....................................................................................9-10
Battery ............................................................................................9-10
Tires ...............................................................................................9-12
Clutch pedal free play (if so equipped)...........................................9-18
Brake pedal free play .....................................................................9-18
Parking brake .................................................................................9-19
Wiper blades ..................................................................................9-19
Emission-control system maintenance ..........................................9-19
General maintenance .....................................................................9-20
For cold and snowy weather ..........................................................9-22
Fusible links ...................................................................................9-22
Fuses ..............................................................................................9-22
Replacement of light bulbs ............................................................9-26
Vehicle care precautions ................................................................9-32
Cleaning the inside of your vehicle ...............................................9-32
Cleaning the outside of your vehicle .............................................9-33
Service precautions
Service precautions WARNING

N00937301485  After performing the maintenance work,
make sure that no tools or cloths are left
Taking regular care of your vehicle will pre-
behind in the engine compartment.
serve its value and appearance as long as pos- If they are left behind, a fire or damage to
sible. the vehicle may occur.
 The fan can turn on automatically even if
You can do some of the maintenance work
the engine is not running. Turn the igni-
yourself, and the rest should only be per- tion switch to the “OFF” position or put
formed by an authorized Mitsubishi Motors the operation mode in OFF to be safe
dealer or a repair facility of your choice. while you work in the engine compart-
If you discover a malfunction or other prob- ment.
lem, have it corrected by an authorized  Do not smoke or allow open flames around
Have you purchased the Mitsubishi Motors
Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facility fuel or the battery. The fumes are flamma-
Diamond Care Protection Plan? The Plan
of your choice. ble.
9 This section describes the maintenance  Be extremely careful when working
supplements your new vehicle warranties.
around the battery. It contains poisonous See your authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer
inspections that you can do yourself, if you so
and corrosive sulfuric acid. for details.
desire. Follow the instructions and precau-
tions for each procedure.  Do not get under your vehicle while it is on
a jack.
Always use properly rated automotive
WARNING jack stands.
 When checking or servicing the inside of  Handling your vehicle’s parts and materi-
the engine compartment, be sure the als in the wrong way can injure you. Ask
engine is stopped and has had a chance to an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer
cool down. or a repair facility of your choice if you
 If you need to work in the engine compart- have questions.
ment with the engine running, be espe-
cially careful that your clothing, hair, etc.
does not get caught in the fan, drive belts,
or other moving parts.
9-2 Vehicle care and maintenance

Catalytic converter
If your vehicle is raised with a WARNING WARNING

garage jack  Do not use the jack on a tilted or soft sur-  Do not park or run your vehicle in areas
face. where combustible materials such as dry
Only use the designated positions shown in Otherwise, the jack might slip and cause grass or leaves can come in contact with a
the illustration. personal injury. Always use the jack on a hot exhaust, since a fire could occur.
flat, hard surface. Before setting the jack,  Do not put undercoat paint on the cata-
make sure there are no sand or pebbles lytic converter.
under the jack base.
Never use the rear To reduce the possibility of catalytic con-
suspensions as a jack- Catalytic converter verter damage:
ing point.
N00937400450
 Use UNLEADED GASOLINE ONLY of
The catalytic converter requires you to use the type of recommended in the “Fuel
unleaded fuel only. Leaded gasoline will selection”.
destroy the emission-control effectiveness of
the converter.
 Do not drive with an extremely low fuel 9
level. Running out of gas could damage
the catalytic converter.
Normally, the catalytic converter does not
 Do not try to start the engine by pushing
require maintenance. However, it is important
or towing the vehicle. If the battery is
to keep the engine properly tuned for the con-
verter to continue to work properly. weak or run down, use jumper cables to
*- Front of the vehicle properly start the engine.
 Do not idle the engine with any spark plug
CAUTION wires disconnected or removed, such as
 Damage to the catalytic converter can result
WARNING if your vehicle is not kept in proper operating
when performing diagnostic tests.
 Set a garage jack only at the position  Do not idle the engine for a long time if it
condition. If the engine malfunctions or mis-
shown here. If the garage jack is set a is idling roughly or otherwise obviously
fires, or if your vehicle performance suffers,
wrong position, it could damage your malfunctioning.
have it serviced promptly. Running your
vehicle and/or your vehicle might fall vehicle when it is overheated may result in  To prevent the catalytic converter from
from the jack causing injury or death. damage to the converter and vehicle. being damaged from unburned gas, do not
race the engine when stopping the engine.
Vehicle care and maintenance 9-3

Engine hood
 Stop driving the vehicle if you think the Pull the lever toward you to release the
performance is noticeably low, or the engine hood latch.
NOTE
 To prevent damage to the engine hood and
engine has a malfunction such as with the
wipers, make sure the wipers are at resting
ignition, etc. If you are not able to stop
position when you open the engine hood.
driving immediately, slow down and drive
for only a short time. Have your vehicle Support the engine hood with the hood prop.
checked at an authorized Mitsubishi Insert the hood prop securely in the opening
Motors dealer or a repair facility of your under the hood marked with an arrow.
choice as soon as possible.
 In unusual situations involving major
engine problems, a burning odor may
indicate severe and abnormal catalytic
converter overheating. If this occurs, stop
in a safe place, shut the engine off and let
the vehicle cool. Once the engine is cool,
9 immediately take your vehicle to a dealer
WARNING
 Never use the release lever to unlatch the
or a repair facility of your choice for ser-
engine hood while the vehicle is in motion.
vice.
 Do not drive your vehicle unless the
engine hood is locked.
Engine hood Release the lever and lift the engine hood.
N00937501647 CAUTION
 Always insert the support prop into the hole
To open specially made for it. Propping the engine
hood at any other place could cause the prop
to slip out and lead to an accident.
Use the engine hood release lever (located  The hood prop can fall out if the hood is
under the instrument panel near the driver’s lifted by a strong wind.
door) to unlock the engine hood.

View of the engine compartment
To close NOTE Engine oil and oil filter

 If this does not close the engine hood prop- N00937702011
Unlatch the prop from the engine hood and erly, drop it again from a slightly higher
put it back in its retainer. position.
 Do not push down strongly on the engine
To check and refill engine oil
hood. Depending on how strongly or where
you push down, you could create a dent in It is normal for an engine to use oil. You may
the vehicle body. need to add oil between the recommended oil
change intervals. Before starting the engine,
check the engine oil level. Refill if necessary.
View of the engine compart- To check the oil level, remove the dipstick,
ment wipe it off, and gently reinsert it all the way.
N00937601781 Slowly pull the dipstick straight out and
check the oil level by checking the upper sur-
face of the dipstick. The oil level must not go
9
Slowly lower the engine hood approximately above the line on the dipstick.
8 inches (20 cm), then let it drop from its own
weight.
NOTE
 If it is difficult to verify the oil level, wipe
CAUTION off the dipstick and reinsert it. Wait a
 Be careful not to trap your hands or fingers moment and then recheck the oil level by
when closing the engine hood. checking the upper surface of the dipstick.
 Make sure the engine hood is firmly closed
before driving. 1- Engine oil level dipstick If the level does not reach the line which
If you drive without the engine hood com-
2- Air cleaner filter shows the minimum amount of oil required,
pletely closed, it could open up while driv-
3- Battery remove the oil filler cap on the engine valve
ing.
4- Brake fluid cover, and fill to within the “Good” range.
5- Windshield washer fluid reservoir
6- Engine oil filler cap
7- Radiator cap
8- Engine coolant reservoir

Engine oil and oil filter

This mark appears on the top of the oil con-
NOTE tainer and tells you two important things
 The engine oil will deteriorate rapidly if the
about the oil.
Good vehicle is subjected to severe conditions (for
example, repeated operation on rough roads, API service symbol
in mountainous regions, on roads with many
uphill and downhill gradients, or over short
distances). Consequently, the oil will require
earlier replacement in accordance with the
schedule in the “WARRANTY AND MAIN-
TENANCE MANUAL”.
Engine oil identification mark

CAUTION
 Overfilling will cause oil aeration and loss of
oil pressure, which could damage the engine. Mitsubishi Motors recommends using only 1- The upper part indicates the quality of
9 engine oils with the ILSAC certification sym- the oil.
bol on the front of the container. 2- The center part indicates the SAE grade
WARNING of the oil viscosity.
 Used engine oil is poisonous, and can dam- ILSAC certification symbol
age your skin. Prolonged and repeated
contact may cause serious skin disorders, Recommended engine oil vis-
including dermatitis and cancer. Do not let
used oil touch your skin and wash thor-
cosity
oughly after working with it.
 Keep used oil out of the reach of children. Use engine oil with the proper thickness for
the outdoor temperatures where you will be
driving.
NOTE
 Engine oil consumption is greatly influenced
by payload, engine speed, etc. If you cannot find oils with the ILSAC certi-
fication symbol, use an API classification SN
or higher oil with the following label.

Engine coolant
require that the filter can withstand a pressure
of 256 psi (1.8 MPa). A Genuine Mitsubishi
To add coolant
oil filter is the best replacement filter.
Follow the installation instructions printed on Use “Mitsubishi Motors Genuine Super Long
the filter. Life Coolant Premium” or equivalent*.
*: similar high quality ethylene glycol
based non-silicate, non-amine, non-
Engine coolant nitrate and non-borate coolant with long
N00937801637
life hybrid organic acid technology
To check the coolant level

Mitsubishi Motors Genuine Coolant provides
Mitsubishi Motors Genuine 0W-20 Synthetic
The engine coolant reservoir (A) lets you excellent protection against corrosion and
Engine Oil is recommended for optimum fuel
quickly see when you need to add coolant. rust formation on all metals, including alumi-
economy and cold weather starting.
When the engine is cold, the level of the cool- num, and prevents clogs in some parts of the
If Mitsubishi Motors Genuine 0W-20 Syn-
ant in the reservoir should be between the “F” engine. 9
thetic Engine Oil is not available, 5W-20
(FULL) and “L” (LOW) marks. The radiator If you need to add coolant often, or if the
grade oils displaying the ILSAC certification
usually stays full so there is no reason to level in the reservoir does not drop when the
can be used.
remove the radiator cap (B) except when you engine cools, the cooling system should be
However, Mitsubishi Motors Genuine 0W-20
check the coolant freeze point or replace the pressure-tested for leaks. Take your vehicle to
Synthetic Engine Oil should be used at the
antifreeze coolant. an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a
next oil change to maintain optimum fuel
repair facility of your choice for testing.
economy and cold weather starting.
CAUTION
To replace the oil filter  Do not use alcohol or methanol antifreeze or
any engine coolants that contain them. Using
FULL
The oil filter should be replaced at the time or the wrong antifreeze can corrode aluminum
mileage specified in the “WARRANTY AND parts.
MAINTENANCE MANUAL”. LOW
Only use high quality replacement filters on
this vehicle. The manufacturer’s specifica-
tions for Genuine Mitsubishi oil filters

Air cleaner filter

 Check the coolant freeze point in the radi-
CAUTION WARNING ator with the proper gauge, and only when
 The required concentration of anti-freeze dif-  Wait for the engine to cool down before
it is safe. If you add antifreeze, the con-
fers depending on the expected ambient tem- opening the radiator cap. Otherwise hot
tents of the reservoir must be protected
perature. steam or boiling coolant could spray up
Above -31 °F (-35 °C) : 50 % concentration from the filler port and scald you. against freezing.
of anti-freeze  Keep the front of the radiator and con-
Below -31 °F (-35 °C) : 60 % concentration denser clean.
of anti-freeze  If the engine coolant temperature does not
You can check the concentration level with a rise after the engine is warmed-up, take
gauge from an automotive supply store, or your vehicle to an authorized Mitsubishi
your authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or Motors dealer or a repair facility of your
service station can check it for you. choice to have the thermostat checked,
 Do not use water to adjust the concentration and replaced if necessary.
of coolant.
 Do not top off the reservoir with plain water
9 only. Water by itself boils at a lower temper- Air cleaner filter
ature and does not stop rust or freezing. If the N00937900413
water freezes, it will damage your cooling
system. Do not use tapwater. It can cause
The air cleaner filter will get dirty and dusty
corrosion and rust. from use and not filter properly. Replace it
with a new filter using the schedule in the
“WARRANTY AND MAINTENANCE
Radiator cap Points to remember MANUAL”.
The radiator cap must be sealed tight to pre-  Do not overfill the reservoir. 1. Unclamp the cover. Open up the top of the
vent losing coolant, which may result in  Your vehicle uses a special radiator cap cover and take out the air cleaner filter.
engine damage. Only use a Genuine that stays sealed and lets the coolant flow
Mitsubishi Parts radiator cap, or an approved from the reservoir back to the radiator
equivalent. when the engine cools down. If you need
to change the cap, use the exact same
kind.

Manual transaxle oil (if so equipped)

tant that the transmission fluid is kept at the
Manual transaxle oil (if so correct level.
equipped)
N00938200181
Fluid type
Whenever the manual transaxle oil level is
checked, add oil to maintain the proper level, Use only “Mitsubishi Motors Genuine
if necessary. CVTF-J4” transmission fluid to ensure opti-
Refill or change with the oil according to the mum transmission performance.
table below.
CAUTION
2. Replacing the air cleaner filter and put the Oil type  Using the improper transaxle fluid may dam-
cover back on in its original position. age the transaxle.
Mitsubishi Motors
NOTE Genuine NEW 9
 Genuine Mitsubishi Motors Parts are recom- Special additives
Lubricant MULTI GEAR OIL
mended when replacing the air cleaner filter.
ECO API Classifica-
 Make sure that the connector is properly Do not use any fluid additives to the trans-
reconnected. tion GL-4
mission.
 After replacing the air cleaner filter, make Viscosity range SAE 75W-80
sure that the hinges at the bottom of cover
are firmly set. Washer fluid
Continuously variable N00938601371
CAUTION
transmission (CVT) fluid (if The windshield washer fluid reservoir is in
so equipped) the engine compartment.
 Take care not to scratch the engine air flow
sensor when removing the air cleaner cover. N00938101129
The continuously variable transmission

(CVT) should be maintained and serviced by
an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a
repair facility of your choice to obtain the
best performance and longest life. It is impor-

Brake fluid
Check the washer fluid level at regular inter- If this occurs, have the vehicle checked by an
vals and add washer fluid to reservoir if nec- Brake fluid authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a
essary. N00938701297
Open the reservoir cap and check the level of
washer fluid. To check the fluid level Fluid type
Full level is approximately 2 inches (5 cm)
below from the upper surface of the reservoir. The fluid level must be between the “MAX”
Use the brake fluid conforming to DOT 3 or
and “MIN” marks on the reservoir.
DOT 4. The reservoir cap must be tightly
sealed to keep dirt and water out.
Upper surface CAUTION

MAX
 Do not let any petroleum-based fluid touch,
mix with, or get into the brake fluid. This
Full will damage the seals.
9  Be careful when handling brake fluid. It can
MIN
damage painted surfaces.
 Use only the listed brake fluid. Different
brands of brake fluid have different addi-
When freezing weather is anticipated, flush tives, and these can cause a chemical reac-
out the water in the reservoir by operating the tion. Do not mix brands of brake fluid.
pump. Fill the reservoir with windshield anti- The fluid level falls slightly with wear of the  Keep the reservoir cap closed to keep the
freeze (not radiator antifreeze), and operate brake pads, but this does not indicate any brake fluid from evaporating.
the system for a few seconds to flush out the abnormality.
residual water.
The fluid in the master cylinder should be
checked when doing other work under the Battery
engine hood. The brake system should also be N00939100943
checked for leaks at the same time. The condition of the battery is very important
If the fluid level falls noticeably in a short for quick starting and to keep the vehicle’s
length of time, it indicates leaks from the electrical system working properly. Check the
brake system. battery regularly.

Battery
Checking battery electrolyte WARNING NOTE

level  If any of the caps has a loose fit, replace  Open the terminal cover (A) before discon-
N00901500072
the battery. necting or connecting the positive (+) termi-
nal of the battery.
The electrolyte level must be between the  Loosen the nut (B) and then disconnect the
limits shown on the outside of the battery. Fill During cold weather battery cable from the positive (+) terminal.
it with distilled water as needed. The inside of N00901600060
the battery is divided into several compart- The battery is weaker in cold temperatures.
ments. Take the cap off of each compartment This has to do with its chemical and physical
and fill to the mark. properties and is why a very cold battery,
Do not fill above the top line because a spill especially one with a low charge, will have a
during driving could cause damage. hard time starting your vehicle.
It is recommended that you have your battery
and charging system checked by an autho-
rized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair 9
facility of your choice before the start of cold
weather. If necessary, have it charged. This WARNING
will provide more reliable starting, and longer  Never disconnect the battery while the
battery life. engine is running, or you could damage
the vehicle’s electrical parts.
Disconnection and connection  Never short-circuit the battery. This could
cause it to overheat and be damaged.
N00901701169
 Keep sparks, cigarettes, and flames away
To disconnect the battery cable, stop the from the battery because the battery could
engine. Disconnect the negative (-) terminal explode.
WARNING first, then the positive (+) terminal. To recon-  Electrolyte (battery acid) is made of corro-
 If the battery goes flat, be sure to check nect the battery, first connect the positive (+) sive diluted sulfuric acid. If it spills on
the battery electrolyte level before con- terminal and then the negative (-) terminal, nearby parts, it can crack, stain, or dis-
necting booster cables. color them. And if it gets on your skin or
before starting the vehicle.
 After checking the battery electrolyte in your eyes, it can cause burns or blind-
level, make sure the caps are fitted ness. Please observe the following han-
securely. dling instructions:

Tires
 Cold tire pressure:
WARNING NOTE • The measured pressure after the vehicle
• If electrolyte gets on plastic parts or  Check to see that the battery is securely
has been parked for at least three hours,
other nearby parts, wipe it off with a soft installed and cannot be moved. Also check
or
cloth or chamois soaked in a solution of each terminal for tightness.
water and neutral detergent then imme- • The measured pressure when the vehicle
 If you will not be driving your vehicle for a
diately rinse the affected parts with long period of time, remove the battery and is driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km) after
plenty of water. store it in a place where the battery fluid will having been parked for three hours.
• If electrolyte gets on your hands or not freeze. The battery only should be stored  Maximum pressure: the maximum per-
clothes, rinse thoroughly with water. If with a full charge. missible cold tire inflation pressure for
electrolyte gets in your eyes, flush them  Before cleaning the battery, tighten all the this tire.
with water immediately and get immedi- filler port caps to keep dirt and moisture out.  Recommended inflation pressure: the
ate medical attention. inflation pressure for optimum tire perfor-
 Open doors and windows in any closed mance.
space where you may be charging or Tires  Intended outboard sidewall:
working with the battery. N00939201635
• The sidewall that contains a whitewall,
9  Always wear protective clothing and gog-
bears white lettering or bears manufac-
gles when working with the battery, or WARNING
turer, brand, and/or model name molding
have a skilled automobile technician do it.  Driving with tires that are worn, damaged
or improperly inflated is dangerous. that is higher or deeper than the same
 If you are quick-charging your battery,
first disconnect the battery cables. These type tire conditions will adversely molding on the other sidewall of the tire,
 In order to prevent a short-circuit, be sure affect vehicle performance. or
to disconnect the negative (-) terminal These type tire conditions can also cause a • The outward facing sidewall of an asym-
first, and reconnect it last. tread separation or blowout which may metrical tire that has a particular side
 Battery posts, terminals and related acces- result in an accident causing serious that must always face outward when
sories contain lead and lead compounds. injury or death. mounted on a vehicle.
Wash hands after handling.  Tires, including spare tire, degrade over  Passenger car tire: a tire intended for use
time with age even when they are not on passenger cars, multipurpose passen-
being used.
ger vehicles, and trucks that have a gross
NOTE It is recommended that tires over 6 years
vehicle weight rating (GVWR) of 10,000
generally be replaced even if damage is
 Check each battery terminal for corrosion.
not obvious.
pounds or less.
You can stop more corrosion by washing
with a solution of baking soda and water.
Grease the posts and clamps after cleaning or It is important to familiarize yourself with the
tightening them. following terms:

Tires
 Light truck (LT) tire: a tire designated by  Groove: the space between two adjacent 215 Section width in millimeters (mm)
its manufacturer as primarily intended for tread ribs.
use on lightweight trucks or multipurpose Aspect ratio in percent (%)
65 Ratio of section height to section
passenger vehicles.
Tire Markings width of tire.
 Tread: portion of a tire that comes into
contact with the road. Construction code
 Tread rib: a tread section running circum- • “R” means radial construction.
R
ferentially around a tire. • “D” means diagonal or bias con-
 Tread separation: pulling away of the struction.
tread from the tire carcass. 15 Rim diameter in inches (in)
 Carcass: the tire structure, except tread
and sidewall rubber which, when inflated,
bears the load. NOTE
 Sidewall: portion of a tire between the  European/Japanese metric tire sizing is based
tread and bead. on European/Japanese design standards.
 Section width: the linear distance between Tires designed to these standards have the 9
1- Size Designation tire size molded into the sidewall beginning
the exteriors of the sidewalls of an
2- Service Description with the section width. The letter “P” is
inflated tire, excluding elevations due to
absent from this tire size designation.
labeling, decoration, or protective bands. 3- Maximum Load
Example: 215/65R15 96H.
 Bead: the part of the tire that is made of 4- Maximum Pressure
 LT (Light Truck) -metric tire sizing is based
steel wires, wrapped or reinforced by ply 5- U.S. DOT Safety Standards Code on U.S.A. design standards. The size desig-
cords and that is shaped to fit the rim. (TIN) nation for LT-metric tires is the same as for
 Ply: a layer of rubber-coated parallel 6- Treadwear, Traction and Temperature P-metric tires except for the letters “LT” that
cords. Grades are molded into the sidewall preceding the
 Cord: the strands forming the plies in the size designation.
tire. Example: LT235/85R16.
 Rim: a metal support for a tire or a tire Size Designation  Temporary spare tires are high pressure com-
and tube assembly upon which the tire pact spares designed for temporary emer-
gency use only. Tires designed to this
beads are seated. EXAMPLE: P215/65R15 standard have the letter “T” molded into the
 Rim diameter: nominal diameter of the Passenger car tire size based on sidewall preceding the size designation.
bead seat. P
U.S.A. design standards Example: T145/80D18 103M.

Tires
Service Description WARNING Code representing the tire manu-

MA
 Overloading of your tire is dangerous.
facturing location. (2 digits)
EXAMPLE: 95H Overloading can cause tire failure, affect Code representing the tire size. (2
vehicle handling, and increase your stop- L9 digits)
Load index ping distance. Use tires of the recom- ABCD Code used by tire manufacturer. (1
95 A numerical code associated with mended load capacity for your vehicle. to 4 digits)
the maximum load a tire can carry. Never overload them.
Number representing the week in
Speed symbol
15 which the tire was manufactured.
A symbol indicating the range of
Maximum Pressure (2 digits)
speeds at which a tire can carry a
load corresponding to its load Number representing the year in
index under certain operating con- Maximum Pressure indicates the maximum 04 which the tire was manufactured.
ditions. permissible cold tire inflation pressure for (2 digits)
H
The maximum speed correspond- this tire.
9 ing to the speed symbol should Treadwear, Traction and Temper-
only be achieved under specified
Tire Identification Number (TIN) ature Grades
operating conditions. (i.e. tire pres-
sure, vehicle loading, road condi-
tions and posted speed limits) The TIN may be found on one or both sides Treadwear
of the tire but the date code may only be on
one side. Look for the TIN on the outboard The treadwear grade is a comparative rating
Maximum Load side of tires as mounted on the vehicle. If the based on the wear rate of the tire when tested
TIN is not found on the outboard side then under controlled conditions on a specified
Maximum load indicates the maximum load you will find it on the inboard side of the tire. government test course. For example, a tire
this tire is designed to carry. graded 150 would wear one and one-half
EXAMPLE: DOT MA L9 ABCD 1504
(11/2) times as well on the government course
Department of Transportation as a tire graded 100. The relative performance
This symbol certifies that the tire is of tires depends upon the actual conditions of
in compliance with the U.S. their use, however, and may depart signifi-
DOT
Department of Transportation tire cantly from the norm due to variations in
safety standards, and is approved driving habits, service practices and differ-
for highway use. ences in road characteristics and climate.

Tires
vehicle. The wrong tire pressure will cause The recommended inflation pressures under
Traction
problems in three major areas: normal driving conditions should be used for
The traction grades, from highest to lowest, the tires listed below.
 Safety
are AA, A, B and C. Those grades represent
Too little pressure increases flexing in the Item Tire size Front Rear
the tire’s ability to stop on wet pavement as
measured under controlled conditions on tire and can cause tire failure. Too much
240 240
specified government test surfaces of asphalt pressure can cause a tire to lose its ability
to cushion shock. Objects on the road and 165/65R14 kPa, kPa,
and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor 35 psi 35 psi
potholes could then cause tire damage that Normal tire
traction performance.
may result in tire failure. 220 220
 Economy 175/55R15 kPa, kPa,
Temperature The wrong tire pressure can cause uneven 32 psi 32 psi
The temperature grades are A (the highest), B wear patterns in the tire tread. These Compact
abnormal wear patterns will reduce the T115/70D14 420 kPa, 60 psi
and C, representing the tire’s resistance to the spare wheel
tread life, and the tire will have to be
generation of heat and its ability to dissipate
heat when tested under controlled conditions replaced sooner. 9
Tire pressures should be checked, and
on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel. Too little pressure also makes it harder for
adjusted if necessary, at least once a month.
Sustained high temperature can cause the the tire to roll, and this uses up more fuel.
Pressures should be checked more often
material of the tire to degenerate and reduce  Ride comfort and vehicle stability
whenever weather temperatures change
tire life, and excessive temperature can lead The superior riding experience built into
severely, because tire pressures change with
to sudden tire failure. The grade C corre- your vehicle partly depends on the correct
outdoor temperatures. The pressures listed
sponds to a level of performance which all tire pressure. Too much pressure gives an
are always “cold inflation pressure”.
passenger car tires must meet under the Fed- uncomfortable and jarring ride. Too little
Cold inflation pressure is measured after the
eral Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109. pressure feels as if your vehicle is slow to
vehicle has been parked for at least three
Grades B and A represent higher levels of respond.
hours or is driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km)
performance on the laboratory test wheel than Unequal tire pressures can make steering
after having been parked for three hours.
the minimum required by law. your vehicle uneven and unpredictable.
Cold inflation pressure must not go above the
The tire pressure for your vehicle under nor- maximum values molded into the tire side-
Tire inflation pressures mal driving conditions is listed on the placard wall. After driving several miles, your tire
N00939301984 attached to the driver’s door sill. inflation pressure may increase 2 to 6 psi (14
(Refer to “Tire and loading information plac- to 41 kPa) from the cold inflation pressure.
Proper tire inflation pressure is essential for
ard” on page 11-3.) Do not let air out of the tires to get back to the
the safe and satisfactory operation of your
Tires
specified cold pressure, or your tires will be
too low.
CAUTION Tread wear indicator
 If your vehicle is equipped with a tire pres- N00939801240
Check your tires each time you refuel. If one
sure monitoring system, only Mitsubishi
tire looks lower than the others, check the
Motors genuine wheels should be used.
pressure for all of them. Use of another type of wheel risks air leaks
You should also take the following safety pre- and sensor damage, as it will not be possible
cautions: to install the tire pressure sensor properly.
 Keep your tires inflated to the recom-

mended pressures. (See the tire and load- Tire maintenance
ing information placard attached to the N00939701193
driver’s door sill.) The following maintenance steps are recom-

 Stay within the recommended load limits. mended:
 Make sure that the weight of any load in 1- Location of the tread wear indicator
your vehicle is evenly distributed.  Check tire pressures regularly.
9  Drive at safe speeds.  Have regular maintenance done on the
2- Tread wear indicator
 After filling your tires to the correct pres- wheel balance and front and rear suspen-
sure, check them for damage and air sion alignment. Tread wear indicators are built into the origi-
leaks. Be sure to reinstall the caps on the  Rotate your tires regularly as described in nal equipment tires on your vehicle to help
valve stems. the “Tire rotation” section on page 9-17. you know when your tires should be replaced.
Many states have laws requiring that you
replace your tires at this point.
Replacing tires and wheels These indicators are molded into the bottom
N00939601453
of the tread grooves and will appear when the
tire tread is worn down to 1/16 inch (1.6
CAUTION mm).
 Avoid using different size tires from the one
When the bands appear next to one another in
listed and the combined use of different
two or more places, replace your tires.
types of tires, as this can affect driving
safety.
Refer to “Tires and wheels” on page 11-5. NOTE
 Tire wear indicators can have different marks
and locations depending on the tire manufac-
turer.

Tires
Tire rotation Tires that do not have arrows showing rotation CAUTION
N00939901557 direction  If the tires have arrows (A) indicating the
To even out the wear on your tires and make correct direction of rotation, swap the front
Front and rear tires on the left-hand side of the
them last longer, Mitsubishi Motors Corpora-
vehicle and the front and rear tires on the
tion recommends that you rotate your tires at
right-hand side of the vehicle separately.
the mileage listed in the “WARRANTY AND Tires that have arrows showing rotation direc- Keep each tire on its original side of the
MAINTENANCE MANUAL”. tion vehicle. When installing the tires, make sure
However, the timing for tire rotation may the arrows point in the direction in which the
vary according to your vehicle condition, wheels will turn when the vehicle moves for-
road surface conditions, and your own per- Front ward. Any tire whose arrow points in the
sonal driving habits. Any time you notice wrong direction will not perform to its full
unusual wear, rotate your tires as soon as pos- potential.
sible.
When rotating tires, check for uneven wear, 9

damage, and wheel alignment. Abnormal CAUTION Front
wear is usually caused by a wrong tire pres-  A compact spare tire can be installed tempo-
sure, wheels that are not aligned properly, rarily in place of a tire that has been removed
wheels that are out-of-balance, or severe during the tire rotation. However, it must not
be included in the regular tire rotation
braking.
sequence.
Check with an authorized Mitsubishi Motors
dealer or a repair facility of your choice to
find out the reason for uneven tread wear.
The first tire rotation is the most important

one. It will allow all your tires to wear evenly. CAUTION
 Avoid the combined use of different types of
tires. Using different types of tires can affect
vehicle performance and safety.

Clutch pedal free play (if so equipped)
Snow tires Clutch pedal free play (if so Brake pedal free play
N00940001428
equipped) N00940300336
In some areas of the country, snow tires are To check the brake pedal free play (A), turn
N00940200090
required for winter driving. If snow tires are off the engine and press the brake pedal sev-
required in your area, you must choose snow To check the clutch pedal free play (A), turn eral times with your foot. Then press the
tires of the same size and type as the original off the engine and press the pedal until you pedal down with your fingers until you first
tires provided with your vehicle. Snow tires feel resistance. feel resistance.
should also be installed on all four wheels.
Otherwise your safety and vehicle handling Clutch pedal free play: Brake pedal free play:
can be reduced. .4 to .6 inch (11 to 16 mm) .1 to .3 inch (3 to 8 mm)
Even where laws may permit it, snow tires
should not be operated at sustained speeds
over 75 mph (120 km/h).
9 CAUTION
 If your vehicle is equipped with a tire pres-
sure monitoring system, only Mitsubishi
Motors genuine wheels should be used.
Use of another type of wheel risks air leaks
and sensor damage, as it will not be possible
to install the tire pressure sensor properly.
If the free play is not within these limits, take
If the free play is not within these limits, take
your vehicle to an authorized Mitsubishi
your vehicle to an authorized Mitsubishi
Tire chains Motors dealer or a repair facility of your
N00940100116 choice for adjustment.
choice for adjustment.
CAUTION
 Tire chains cannot be used on your vehicle.
The clearance between the chains and the
body is not sufficient to allow proper clear-
ance, and the vehicle body might be dam-
aged.

Parking brake
Parking brake WARNING Emission-control system

N00940400252  Continued operation of the vehicle with
the parking brake lever out of adjustment
maintenance
N00940800328
may result in the vehicle moving when
Parking brake lever stroke unattended. Your vehicle is equipped with an emission-
control system that meets all the requirements
Check the parking brake lever travel occa-
of the U.S. Environmental Protection Agency
sionally. To check this, pull the lever up
slowly and count the number of clicks of the Wiper blades and Environment Canada. The emission-con-
trol system is made of:
ratchet. N00940701223
Check the wiper blades occasionally. Clean  a positive crankcase ventilation system
Parking brake lever stroke: them regularly to remove deposits of salt and  an evaporative emission-control system
7 to 9 notches (clicks) road film. Use a sponge or cloth and a mild  an exhaust emission-control system
(Parking brake adjustment when pulled with detergent or non-abrasive cleaner to clean the
the force of 200 N) blades and glass areas. To be sure the emission-control system works
Replace the blades if they continue to streak properly, have your vehicle inspected and
9
Also check to see if the lever stays gripped by
the ratchet after pulling. or smear. maintained by an authorized Mitsubishi
NOTE choice. This should be done at the time or
 Do not run the wipers on dry glass for a long mileage specified in the “WARRANTY AND
time. This wears out the rubber and can MAINTENANCE MANUAL”.
scratch the glass. These, and all the other “general” mainte-
nance services listed in this manual, need to
be performed to keep your vehicle running
During cold weather properly and reliably.
You should also have an inspection and ser-
vice any time you suspect a malfunction.
If the blades are frozen to the windshield, do
not operate the wipers until the ice has melted
and the blades are freed, otherwise the wiper
motor may be damaged.

General maintenance
high heat sources such as the exhaust mani-
NOTE Fuel hoses fold.
 To meet government regulations and pro- N00941000040
mote cleaner air, your vehicle is equipped Check the hose surfaces for any heat and
with an onboard diagnostic system (OBD).
mechanical damage, hard and brittle rubber,
WARNING
The engine electronic control module that  If you see a fuel leak or if you smell fuel,
cracking, tears, cuts and abrasions. Pay spe-
controls OBD functions stores various data do not run the engine. Any spark (includ-
(especially about the exhaust emissions). cial attention to the hoses closest to high heat ing from the ignition), flame or smoking
This data will be erased if the battery cable is sources such as the exhaust manifold. Check material could cause an explosion or fire.
disconnected, which could make a rapid all the hose connections, such as clamps and Call an authorized Mitsubishi Motors
diagnosis difficult. Do not disconnect the couplings, to make sure they are secure and dealer or a repair facility of your choice
battery cable when the engine malfunction that there are no leaks. If you see any wear or for assistance.
indicator (“SERVICE ENGINE SOON” or damage, replace the hoses immediately.
“Check engine light”) is ON.
Intake valve clearance Evaporative emission control

9 Spark plugs N00950100050 system (except evaporative
N00940900228
Have the valve clearance checked at an emission canister)
authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer at the N00941400187
Spark plugs must fire properly for good
mileage specified in the “WARRANTY AND If the fuel-vapor vent line is clogged or dam-
engine performance and emission-control.
MAINTENANCE MANUAL”. aged, the fuel-vapor mixture will escape, pol-
Do not reuse them by cleaning or regapping.
If the engine sounds abnormally loud, have luting the air.
Change them at the mileage listed in the
adjustments made by an authorized Have the system checked at an authorized
“WARRANTY AND MAINTENANCE
Mitsubishi Motors dealer. Mitsubishi Motors dealer at the mileage spec-
MANUAL”.
ified in the “WARRANTY AND MAINTE-
NOTE Fuel system (tank, pipe line and NANCE MANUAL”.
 Use the spark plugs listed under “Engine connection, and fuel tank filler
specifications” on page 11-4 or plugs that are cap) General maintenance
exactly the same. Other plugs could cause N00941300173 N00941500292
engine damage, performance problems or
radio noise. Check these regularly for damage or leaks in The next pages list the maintenance service
the fuel lines and connections. Check the fuel recommended by Mitsubishi Motors Corpo-
tank filler cap for damage or looseness. Pay ration. In addition to the general maintenance
special attention to the fuel lines closest to that needs to be performed at the times listed,
General maintenance
there are other parts which do not usually  The underside or rear of the vehicle is
need regular maintenance.
Ball joint, steering linkage seals damaged
But, if any of these parts stops working prop- and drive shaft boots
erly, your vehicle performance could suffer. N00941800077 Also check the exhaust system each time the
Have these items checked if you notice a Check the following parts for damage and vehicle is raised for lubrication, oil changes,
problem with them. grease leaks: or required service. Any open seams or loose
connections could let dangerous exhaust
If you have any questions, see your autho-  Ball joint boots of the front suspension fumes seep into the luggage and passenger
rized Mitsubishi Motors dealer for assistance. and steering linkage compartments.
 Bellows on both ends of the drive shaft
Disc brake pads Check for any of the following
N00941600059 Exhaust system conditions:
Good brakes are essential for safe driving. N00942200111
Check the brake pads for wear. For good  Check for holes or exhaust gas leaks
braking performance, replace the brake pads WARNING caused by corrosion or damage. 9
with the same type pads as the originals.  Carbon monoxide gas from your vehicle’s  Check the joints and connections for
exhaust is poisonous. Breathing these looseness or exhaust gas leaks.
fumes can cause unconsciousness or death.  Check the rubber hangers and brackets for
Brake hoses damage.
N00941700076
The best way to keep carbon monoxide gas
Brake hoses and tubing should be checked from entering inside your vehicle is to have Hood lock release mechanism
for: the engine exhaust system properly serviced.
Have a competent mechanic inspect the com- and safety catch
 Severe surface cracking, scuffing or worn plete exhaust system and nearby body areas N00942500127
spots. If the fabric casing of the hose is for broken, damaged, deteriorated, or mispo- The hood lock release mechanism and hood
showing through any cracks or worn spots sitioned parts if you notice any of the follow- safety catch should be checked, cleaned, and
in the rubber hose cover, the hose should ing: oiled when needed for easy movement and to
be replaced. The brakes can fail if the prevent rust and wear. Use Multipurpose
hose wears through.  A change in the sound of the exhaust sys- Grease NLGI Grade 2 sparingly for all sliding
 Improper installation may cause twisting, tem parts of the hood latch and release lever.
or wheel, tire or chassis interference.  The smell of exhaust fumes inside the Work the grease into the hood lock mecha-
vehicle

For cold and snowy weather

nism until all the movable surfaces are cov- snow off the vehicle and a plastic scraper for individual circuit is equipped with a fuse. The
ered. the windshield, side and rear window are also fuse blocks are located in the passenger com-
Also, put a light coat of the same grease on useful. partment and in the engine compartment.
the safety catch wherever moving parts touch.
Fusible links Passenger compartment
For cold and snowy weather N00942700305
N00942600102
The fusible links will melt to prevent a fire if The fuse block in the passenger compartment
a large current attempts to flow through cer- is located in front of the driver’s seat at the
Ventilation slots tain electrical systems. position shown in the illustration.
In case of a melted fusible link, see your
The ventilation slots in front of the wind- authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a
shield should be brushed clear after a heavy repair facility of your choice for inspection
snowfall so that the operation of the heating and replacement.
For the fusible links, please refer to “Fuse
9 and ventilation systems will not be impaired.
load capacities” on page 9-23.
Weatherstripping
WARNING
 Fusible links must not be replaced by any
To prevent freezing of the weatherstripping other device. Failing to fit the correct fus-
on the doors, engine hood, etc., they should ible link may result in fire in the vehicle,
be treated with silicone grease. property destruction and serious or fatal
injuries at any time.
Additional equipment (For Engine compartment
regions where snow is encoun-
Fuses In the engine compartment, the fuse block is
tered) N00942800902 located as shown in the illustration.
While pressing the tab (A or B), pull up the
It is a good idea to carry a shovel or a short- Fuse block location cover.
handled spade in the vehicle during the win-
ter so that you can clear away snow if you get
stranded. A small hand-brush for sweeping To prevent damage to the electrical system
from short-circuiting or overloading, each
Fuses
Passenger compartment fuse loca- Sym- Capac-

No. Electrical system
tion table bol ity
Type A
11 Rear fog light 10 A
12 Door lock 15 A
Interior light (Dome
Type B 13 15 A
light)
14 Rear window wiper 15 A
15 Gauges 7.5 A
16 Relay 7.5 A
17 Heated seats 20 A
18 Option 10 A
Sym- Capac- 9
No. Electrical system Heated outside rear-
Fuse load capacities bol ity 19 7.5 A
view mirrors
N00954801342 1 Tail light (left) 7.5 A
20 Windshield wiper 20 A
This fuse list shows the names of the electri- 2 Cigarette lighter 15 A
cal systems and their fuse capacities. 21 Back-up light 7.5 A
There are spare fuses in the fuse block in the 3 Ignition coil 10 A
22 Defogger 30 A
engine compartment. Always replace a blown 4 Starter motor 7.5 A
fuse with one of the same capacity as the 23 Heater 30 A
original. 5 — — —
24 — — —
6 — — —
25 Radio 10 A
7 Tail light (right) 7.5 A
Electronic con-
Outside rearview 26 15 A
8 7.5 A trolled unit
mirrors
9 Engine control unit 7.5 A  Some fuses may not be installed on your
vehicle, depending on the vehicle model
10 Control unit 7.5 A or specifications.

Fuses
 The table above shows the main equip- Sym- Capac- Sym- Capac-
ment corresponding to each fuse. No. Electrical system No. Electrical system
bol ity bol ity
BF1 DC-DC (P/T) 30 A F15 Alternator 7.5 A
Engine compartment fuse location
BF2 DC-DC (AUDIO) 30 A Hazard warning
table F16 10 A
flasher
Headlight (low
F1 10 A Automatic trans-
Type A beam) (left) F17 15 A
axle
Headlight (low
F2 10 A F18 Air conditioning 10 A
beam) (right)
Headlight (high F19 ETV 15 A
F3 10 A
beam) (left)
F20 Starter 7.5 A
Headlight (high
F4 10 A F21 CVT oil/pump 15 A
beam) (right)
9 F5 Horn 10 A F22 Fuel pump 15 A
F6 Front fog lights 15 A F23 Engine 20 A

Daytime running Automatic trans-
F7 10 A F24 7.5 A
lights axle
F8 — — — #1 — Spare fuse 20 A
Sym- Capac- F9 — — — #2 — Spare fuse 30 A
No. Electrical system
bol ity
Battery current
SBF1 Radiator fan motor 40 A* F10 7.5 A *: Fusible link
sensor
Anti-lock braking F11 — — —  Some fuses may not be installed on your
SBF2 30 A* vehicle, depending on the vehicle model
system Stop lights (Brake
F12 15 A or specifications.
SBF3 Ignition switch 40 A* lights)
 The table above shows the main equip-
Power window F13 Ignition coil 7.5 A ment corresponding to each fuse.
SBF4 40 A*
control F14 Engine control 7.5 A

Fuses
15 A: Cigarette lighter
Type B
When using a substitute fuse, replace with a
fuse of the correct capacity as soon as possi-
ble.
Identification of fuse
Capacity Color
7.5 A Brown
10 A Red
Sym- Capac- 3. Clamp it on the fuse you wish to remove,
No. Electrical system 15 A Blue and pull the fuse straight out from the fuse
bol ity
20 A Yellow block.
SBF1 PTC heater 40 A*
30 A
Green (fuse type) /Pink (fusible 9
SBF2 PTC heater 40 A* link type)
SBF3 PTC heater 40 A* 40 A Green (fusible link type)
*: Fusible link Fuse replacement

N00954900131
 Some fuses may not be installed on your
vehicle, depending on the vehicle model 1. Before replacing a fuse, always turn off
or specifications. the electrical item concerned to the fuse
 The table above shows the main equip- and turn the ignition switch to the “OFF”
ment corresponding to each fuse. position or put the operation mode in
OFF. 4. Use the fuse location diagrams and the
2. There is a fuse remover (A) in the engine matching tables, to check the fuse that is
The fuse block does not contain spare 7.5 A,
compartment fuse block. related to the problem. If the fuse is not
10 A or 15 A fuses. If one of these fuses
blown, something else must be causing
burns out, substitute with the following fuse.
the problem. Have the system inspected
7.5 A: Outside rearview mirrors
by your authorized Mitsubishi Motors
10 A: Option
dealer or a repair facility of your choice.

Replacement of light bulbs

N00942901362
Before replacing the bulb, be sure the light is

off. Do not touch the glass part of the new
bulb with your bare fingers; the oil from your
skin will stay on the glass and dim or destroy
the bulb when it gets hot.
CAUTION
B- Fuse is OK  Bulbs are extremely hot immediately after
being turned off.
C- Blown fuse
When replacing the bulb, wait for it to cool
CAUTION
sufficiently before touching it. You could  Do not install commercially available LED-
5. Insert a new fuse of the same capacity type bulbs.
9 securely into the appropriate slot.
otherwise be burned.
 Handle halogen light bulb with care. The gas
Commercially available LED-type bulbs
could adversely affect the operation of the
inside halogen light bulb is highly pressur-
vehicle, such as by preventing the lights and
ized, so dropping, knocking, or scratching a
CAUTION halogen light bulb can cause it to shatter.
other vehicle equipment from operating
 Never use a fuse with a capacity greater than properly.
 Never hold the halogen light bulb with a bare
the one listed or any substitute, such as wire, hand, dirty glove, etc.
foil etc. This would cause the circuit wiring The oil from your hand could cause the bulb
to heat up and could cause a fire. to break the next time the headlights are NOTE
 If the replacement fuse blows again after a used.  If you are unsure of how to carry out the
short time, have the electrical system If the glass surface is dirty, clean it with work as required, it is recommended that
checked by an authorized Mitsubishi Motors alcohol and let it dry completely before these procedures be carried out by an autho-
dealer or a repair facility of your choice to installing the bulb. rized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair
find and correct the cause. facility of your choice.
 Be careful not to scratch the vehicle body
when removing a light and lens.

NOTE ANSI NOTE

 When it rains, or when the vehicle has been
Watt- Trade No.  The side turn signal light (on outside rear-
Description
washed, the inside of the lens sometimes age or Bulb view mirror) uses an LED rather than the
becomes temporarily foggy. This is the same type bulb. For repair and replacement, contact an
phenomenon as when window glass mists up Front turn signal authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a
on a humid day, and does not indicate a func- 1 32/3 cp #1157NA repair facility of your choice.
light/Parking light
tional problem.
When the light is switched on, the heat will Headlight/Day-
9007 Rear
remove the fog. However, if water gathers 2 time running light —
HB5
inside the light, please have it checked by an (if so equipped)
Front fog light (if
repair facility of your choice. 3 55 W H11
so equipped)
Front side-marker
Bulb capacity 4
light
5W W5W
N00943000132
Side turn signal 9
The bulb should only be replaced with a new
5 light (on fender, if 5W —
bulb with the same rating and type. The type
so equipped)
and rating are listed on the base of the bulb.
Side turn signal ANSI
light (on outside trade No.
Outside 6
rearview mirror, if
— — Item Wattage
or bulb
N00950302043
so equipped) type
Front High-mounted
1 — —
stop light
NOTE
 It is not possible to repair or replace only the License plate
2 5W W5W
bulb for the side turn signal light (on fender). light
Check with an authorized Mitsubishi Motors 3 Back-up light 21 W P21W
dealer or a repair facility of your choice
when the light needs to be repaired or Rear turn signal
4 21 W PY21W
replaced. light


ANSI Inside Headlights/Daytime running
trade No.
Item Wattage
or bulb
N00950401715
lights (if so equipped)
type N00901801203
1. While pressing the tab (A), pull out the

Tail and stop
5 21/5 W P21/5W connector (B).
light
Rear side-marker
6 5W W5W
light
NOTE
 The high-mounted stop light uses an LED
rather than the bulbs. For repair and replace-
ment, contact an authorized Mitsubishi
9 Motors dealer or a repair facility of your
choice.
*- Front of the vehicle
2. Remove the locking cap (C) by turning it

counterclockwise, and then pull the bulb
(D).
Item Wattage
1 Dome light 8W
2 Trunk room light 5W


3. To install the bulb, perform the removal 2. Pull the bulb out of the socket. 2. Remove the bulb from the socket by turn-
steps in reverse. ing it counterclockwise while pressing in.
Headlight aim adjustment

N00943200352
The alignment of the headlights should be

checked by an authorized Mitsubishi Motors
dealer or a repair facility of your choice.
Front side-marker lights

N00917301681
1. Turn the socket (A) counterclockwise to 3. To install the bulb, perform the removal 3. To install the bulb, perform the removal
remove it. steps in reverse. steps in reverse.
9
Front turn signal lights/Parking Front fog lights (if so equipped)
lights N00943601904
N00943401478 1. Insert a straight blade (or minus) screw-

1. Turn the socket (A) counterclockwise to driver with a cloth over its tip at the edge
remove it. of the cover (A) and pry gently to remove
the cover.


2. Remove the 3 screws (B) and remove the 3. Depress the tab (D) on the harness con-
light unit. nector and pull the harness connector (E)
Rear combination lights
N00943701572
to remove it.
1. Open the trunk lid.
2. Remove the screws (A) that hold the light
unit.
NOTE 4. Turn the bulb (F) counterclockwise to

9  When unfastening the screw of the fog light, remove it.
be careful not to mistakenly move the beam
position adjustment screw (C). 3. Move the light unit toward the rear of the
vehicle to unfix the notch (B) and pin (C).
5. To install the bulb, perform the removal

steps in reverse.


4. Turn the socket counterclockwise to
remove it. Type 1 Type 2 License plate lights
N00944001439
1. Turn the socket counterclockwise to

remove it, and then pull the bulb out of
the socket.

D- Back-up light steps in reverse.
E- Rear turn signal light
F- Tail and stop light NOTE 9
G- Rear side-marker light  When mounting the light unit, align the
notch (H) and pin (I) on the light unit with
the clip (J) and hole (K) in the body.
5. Remove the bulb from the socket as fol-
lows.
• Type 1: Rear side-marker light bulb
Pull the bulb out.
• Type 2: Other light bulb
Turn the bulb counterclockwise while
pressing in.

steps in reverse.

Vehicle care precautions
Vehicle care precautions CAUTION Plastic, vinyl leather, fabric and

N00945100166 • Nail Polish Remover flocked parts
In order to maintain the value of your vehicle, These can all be dangerous, and they all can N00945300142
perform regular maintenance using the proper damage your vehicle. 1. Lightly wipe these off with a soft cloth
materials and procedures. Be sure to use only soaked in a 3% solution of gentle soap
those materials and procedures that meet your and water.
local environmental pollution control regula- Cleaning the inside of your 2. To rinse, dip the cloth in fresh water,
tions. Choose the materials you will use care- vehicle wring it out well, and wipe off all the
fully, to be sure that they do not contain N00945200095
soap.
corrosives. If you are not sure, contact an
After washing the inside of your vehicle with
authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer for help NOTE
any cleaner, wipe it dry in a shady, well venti-
in choosing these materials.
lated area.  Do not use cleaners, conditioners, and pro-
tectants containing silicones or wax.
9 CAUTION CAUTION Such products, when applied to the instru-
 Cleaning products can be dangerous. Some ment panels or other parts, may cause reflec-
 Do not use organic substances (solvents, tions on the windshield and obscure vision.
are poisonous and others are highly flamma-
benzine, kerosene, alcohol, gasoline, etc.) or Also, if such products get on the switches of
ble. Some are dangerous if you breathe their
alkaline or acidic solutions. the electrical accessories, it may lead to fail-
fumes in a closed space. When you use any-
These chemicals can cause discoloring, ure of these accessories.
thing in a container to clean your vehicle, be
staining or cracking of the surface.
sure to follow the instructions. Always open
If you use cleaners or polishing agents, make
your vehicle doors or windows when you’re
sure their ingredients do not include the sub-
cleaning the inside. Never use the following
stances mentioned above. Upholstery
chemicals to clean your vehicle: N00945500128
• Gasoline 1. To maintain the value of your new vehi-
• Carbon Tetrachloride
• Benzine
NOTE cle, maintain the upholstery carefully and
 Always read the instructions on the cleaner keep the interior clean.
• Kerosene
label.
• Naphtha
• Acetone
• Turpentine
• Paint Thinner
• Lacquer Thinner

Cleaning the outside of your vehicle

Use a vacuum cleaner and brush to clean
the seats. If stained, vinyl and synthetic
NOTE Foreign material
 If genuine leather is wet with water, wipe it N00945800033
leather should be cleaned with an appro-
with a dry, soft cloth. If left damp, mildew Industrial pollution, road tar, bird droppings,
priate cleaner. Cloth fabrics can be
may grow.
cleaned with either upholstery cleaner or a tree sap, insect remains, sea water and other
 The genuine leather surface can be damaged
3% solution of gentle soap in lukewarm foreign matters can damage the finish on your
if brushed with a nylon or synthetic fiber
water. vehicle.
brush.
2. Clean the carpeting with a vacuum Generally, the longer any foreign material
 Organic solvents such as benzine, kerosene,
cleaner and remove any stains with carpet alcohol, gasoline, or acid or alkaline solvents stays on the finish, the worse the damage.
cleaner. Oil and grease can be removed by can discolor the genuine leather surface and Wash your vehicle as soon as possible when-
lightly dabbing with a clean white cloth should not be used. ever the finish gets soiled.
and spot remover.  Genuine leather can mildew if not kept
clean. Clean up any oil stains immediately.
Washing
 The genuine leather surface may harden and
NOTE shrink if it is exposed to the direct sunlight
N00945901666
 If fuzzing is difficult to remove from the seat for long hours. When your vehicle is parked, Chemicals contained in the dirt and dust 9
upholstery, draw a suitable defuzzing brush place it in the shade as much as possible. picked up from air, rain, snow, or road sur-
over the surface in one direction.  When the temperature of the vehicle interior faces can damage the paint and body of your
rises in summer, vinyl products left on the vehicle if left on.
genuine leather seat may deteriorate and Frequent washing and waxing is the best way
Genuine leather (if so equipped) stick to the seat. to protect your vehicle from this damage.
N00945600187 Do not wash the vehicle in direct sunlight.
1. To clean, lightly wipe the leather with a Park the vehicle in the shade and spray it with
soft cloth soaked in a 5% solution of gen- Cleaning the outside of your water to remove dust. Next, using plenty of
clean water and a car washing mitt or sponge,
tle soap and water. vehicle wash the vehicle from top to bottom.
2. To rinse, dip the cloth in fresh water, N00945700058
wring it out well, and wipe off all the Use a mild car washing soap if necessary.
To protect your vehicle’s finish, wash it often Rinse thoroughly and wipe dry with a cham-
soap.
and thoroughly. If desired, you may wax your ois or soft cloth. After washing the vehicle,
3. To preserve and protect, use a leather pro-
vehicle using a nonabrasive automobile wax. carefully clean the joints and flanges of the
tecting agent on the genuine leather sur-
face. doors, hood, etc., where dirt is likely to
remain.


Use a soft cloth to put a small amount of wax
CAUTION During cold weather
on the painted surfaces. After the wax has
 When washing the underside of your vehicle
dried, polish with a dry soft cloth.
or the wheels, wear a pair of gloves to pro- Salt and other chemicals spread on winter Do not wax your vehicle in direct sunlight.
tect your hands. roads in some geographical areas can have a You should wax when the painted surfaces
 Never spray or splash water on the electrical detrimental effect on the vehicle underbody.
parts in the engine compartment. This may are cool.
You should flush the underbody with a high
damage them. Be careful also when washing
pressure hose every time you wash the out-
the underbody to ensure that water does not
side of your vehicle. CAUTION
enter the engine compartment.  Waxes containing high abrasive compounds
 Avoid automatic car washers that use rotat-
Take special care to remove mud or other
should not be used. These waxes remove rust
ing brushes. These brushes may scratch the debris which could trap and hold salt and
and stain effectively from the paintwork, but
paint surface and make it dull. moisture.
are harmful to the finish of the paint, because
Scratches are more noticeable on darker col- After washing your vehicle, wipe off all they also remove paint/clearcoat.
ored vehicles. waterdrops from the rubber parts around the They are also harmful to other glossy sur-
 Some hot water washing equipment uses doors to prevent the doors from freezing. faces such as the grille, trim, moldings, etc.
9 high pressure and heat to clean your vehicle.  Do not use gasoline, benzine, kerosene or
Because hot water can damage plastics parts
and seep inside your vehicle, make sure you
NOTE paint thinners to remove road tar or other dirt
from the vehicle surface.
do the following when using such equip-  When the door is frozen, opening it by force
may tear off or crack the rubber gasket  Do not put wax on the areas having black
ment: matte coating because it can cause uneven
installed around the door. Pour warm water
• Keep the washing nozzle at least 28 inches discoloration, patches, blurs, etc. If these get
to melt the ice. Be sure to thoroughly wipe
(70 cm) away from the vehicle body. wax on them, wipe the wax off right away
off the water after opening the door. To pre-
• When washing around the door glass, hold with a soft cloth and warm water.
vent freezing of the weatherstripping on the
the nozzle at a distance of more than 28
doors, hood, etc., treat with silicone lubri-
inches (70 cm) and at a right angle to the
cant.
glass surface.
 Make sure to do the following when using an
Polishing
N00946100046
automatic car wash, with help from either
this manual or the car wash operator, to Waxing If painted surfaces have been severely dam-
avoid damaging your vehicle: N00946000234 aged and lost their original luster and color
• Fold the outside rearview mirrors. Wax your vehicle once or twice a year, or tone, polish the surface lightly with a fine
• Remove the antenna. when water does not bead up on the paint. polishing compound. Avoid limiting your
polishing to the damaged surface only; polish
a somewhat wider area, moving the polishing

cloth in one direction. After polishing, flush
the compound from the surface and apply a
CAUTION CAUTION
 Do not use wax containing compounds (pol-  Do not use a brush or other hard implement
coat of wax to regain a beautiful luster.
ishing powder) which may damage the plas- on the wheels.
tic surface.  Do not use any cleaner that contains an abra-
Damaged paint  Do not let plastic parts get soiled with gaso- sive substance or is acidic or alkaline. Doing
N00946200092 line, oil, brake fluids, engine oils, greases, so could cause the coating on the wheels to
paint thinner, and sulfuric acid (battery elec- peel or become discolored or stained.
Small cracks and scratches in the paint coat
trolyte), as such substances will cause stains,  Do not directly apply hot water using a steam
should be touched up as soon as possible with cracks, or discoloration. cleaner or by any other means.
touch-up paint to prevent corrosion. If any of these get on a plastic part, wipe  Contact with seawater or road salt used for
Check body areas facing the road or the tires them up with a soft cloth or chamois and a de-icing can cause corrosion. Rinse off such
carefully for damage to the paint caused by mild solution of soap and water. Then rinse substances as soon as possible.
flying stones, etc. The paint code number for them immediately with water.
your vehicle can be found on the vehicle
information code plate on the front passenger
Chrome parts Window glass 9
door sill.
N00946400052 N00946600054
To prevent spots and corrosion of chrome The window glass can usually be cleaned
Cleaning plastic parts parts, wash with water, dry thoroughly, and using only a sponge and water. Glass cleaner
N00946300194 apply a nonabrasive automotive wax. If the can be used to remove wax, oil, grease, dead
Use a sponge or chamois to clean these parts. chrome is severely damaged or pitted, use a insects, etc. After washing the glass, wipe it
If a vehicle wax sticks to a gray or black commercially available chrome polish. dry with a clean, dry, soft cloth.
rough surface of the bumper, molding or
lights, the surface may appear white in color.
Aluminum wheels (if so equipped) Wiper blades
In this case, wipe it off using lukewarm water
N00946500183 N00946700084
and a soft cloth or chamois.
1. Remove dirt using a wet sponge. Use a soft cloth and glass cleaner to remove
2. Use a mild detergent on any dirt that can- grease, dead insects, etc., from the wiper
CAUTION not be removed easily with water. blades.
 Do not use a scrubbing brush or other rough Rinse off the detergent after washing the Replace the wiper blades when they no longer
scrubber as these may damage the plastic
wheel. clean the windshield properly.
surface.
3. Dry the wheel thoroughly using a chamois
leather or a soft cloth.

Engine compartment
N00947000071
Never spray or splash water on the electrical

accessories in the engine compartment. This
puts the engine at risk of being damaged.
Do not bring the circumferential parts, the
plastic parts and so on into contact with sulfu-
ric acid (battery electrolyte) which may
crack, stain or discolor them.
If they are in contact, wipe off with soft cloth,
chamois or the like and an aqueous solution
of neutral detergent then immediately rinse
the affected parts with plenty of water.

Customer assistance/Reporting Safety Defects
Consumer information (For vehicles sold in U.S.A.) ....................10-2

Reporting Safety Defects ...............................................................10-2
Important facts to know in case of an accident ..............................10-3
10
Consumer information (For vehicles sold in U.S.A.)

their use, however, and may depart signifi- material of the tire to degenerate and reduce
Consumer information (For cantly from the norm due to variations in tire life, and excessive temperature can lead
vehicles sold in U.S.A.) driving habits, service practices and differ- to sudden tire failure. The grade C corre-
N01047101208 ences in road characteristics and climate. sponds to a level of performance which all
This information is provided in compliance passenger car tires must meet under the Fed-
eral Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109.
with the requirements of the National High- Traction AA, A, B, C
way Traffic Safety Administration, Depart- Grades B and A represent higher levels of
ment of Transportation. It provides the performance on the laboratory test wheel than
The traction grades, from highest to lowest, the minimum required by law.
purchasers and/or prospective purchasers are AA, A, B and C. Those grades represent
with information on reporting safety defects. the tire’s ability to stop on wet pavement as
measured under controlled conditions on WARNING
 The temperature grade for this tire is
Uniform tire quality grading specified government test surfaces of asphalt
established for a tire that is properly
and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor
inflated and not overloaded. Excessive
DOT quality grades - All passenger vehicle traction performance. speed, underinflation, or excessive load-
tires must conform to Federal Safety Require- ing, either separately or in combination,
10 ments in addition to these grades. The spe- WARNING can cause heat buildup and possible tire
failure.
cific grade rating in each grade category is  The traction grade assigned to this tire is
shown on the side wall of the tires on your based on straight-ahead braking traction
vehicle. tests, and does not include acceleration,
cornering, hydroplaning, or peak traction Reporting Safety Defects
characteristics.
Treadwear N01047201544
If you believe that your vehicle has a

The treadwear grade is a comparative rating Temperature A, B, C defect which could cause a crash or
based on the wear rate of the tire when tested could cause injury or death, you
under controlled conditions on a specified should immediately inform the
The temperature grades are A (the highest), B
government test course. For example, a tire
and C, representing the tire’s resistance to the National Highway Traffic Safety
graded 150 would wear one and one-half
generation of heat and its ability to dissipate Administration (NHTSA) in addi-
(11/2) times as well on the government course heat when tested under controlled conditions
tion to notifying Mitsubishi Motors
as a tire graded 100. The relative performance on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel.
of tires depends upon the actual conditions of Sustained high temperature can cause the North America, Inc.
10-2 Customer assistance/Reporting Safety Defects

Important facts to know in case of an accident

If NHTSA receives similar com- For vehicles sold in U.S.A. To contact Mitsubishi Motor Sales of
plaints, it may open an investigation, Canada, Inc. call 1-888-576-4878 or
and if it finds that a safety defect To contact Mitsubishi Motors North write to:
exists in a group of vehicles, it may America, Inc. call 1-888-648-7820 or
order a recall and remedy campaign. Mitsubishi Motor Sales of Can-
write to: ada, Inc.
However, NHTSA cannot become
involved in individual problems Mitsubishi Motors North Amer- Customer Relations Department
between you, your dealer, or Mit- ica, Inc. P.O. Box 41009
subishi Motors North America, Inc. Customer Relations Department 4141 Dixie Road
P.O. Box 6400 Mississauga, ON L4W 5C9
To contact NHTSA, you may call the
Cypress, CA 90630-0064
Vehicle Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-
888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424- Important facts to know in
9153); go to case of an accident
For vehicles sold in Canada
http://www.safercar.gov; or write to: N01047300232
10
If you live in Canada, and you We hope you will never be involved in an
NHTSA Headquarters
accident, but there is always that potential
1200 New Jersey Avenue, SE believe that your vehicle has a safety
danger. So, please be sure to buckle up and
West Building defect, you should immediately drive safely.
Washington, DC 20590 notify Transport Canada, in addition
to notifying Mitsubishi Motor Sales In the event of an accident
You can also obtain other informa- of Canada, Inc. You may write to:
tion about motor vehicle safety from  Remain calm.
http://www.safercar.gov. Transport Canada  Check for injuries. Report all injuries to
330 Sparks Street the police, and, if necessary, call for an
Tower C ambulance.
Ottawa, Ontario K1A 0N5
Customer assistance/Reporting Safety Defects 10-3

Important facts to know in case of an accident

 Record all the details of the accident. This ment. This important feature is possible
will provide you with accurate records of because high tensile steel is used in
Genuine Mitsubishi Motors
the accident for discussions with your Mitsubishi panels and structural parts, some- parts
insurance company and other persons thing that cannot be guaranteed by the manu-
who may be acting on your behalf. facturers of imitation parts. All Genuine Genuine Mitsubishi Motors parts are built
Mitsubishi body panels and support brackets with the high quality and durability standards
are designed and constructed as important you expect. Genuine Mitsubishi Motors
Key information to discuss with
protection features in the event of an acci- replacements parts are your guarantee that
your insurance company dent. By replacing body parts with non-Genu- your vehicle will have all the technological
ine Mitsubishi Motors parts, your vehicle advantages and maintain the style and protec-
 Understand your repair estimate before
may no longer meet original equipment spec- tion of a brand new Mitsubishi Motors.
approving repairs.
ifications. Remember to ask for genuine Mitsubishi
 Choosing the repair shop and the brands
Motors parts.
of parts that they use on your vehicle is
your decision. Consumer rights (For vehicles
 Ask for genuine Mitsubishi Motors parts. sold in U.S.A.)
Many times, to save money, your insur-
10 ance company will recommend imitation
As a consumer requesting repair on your
parts that do not meet the original specifi-
vehicle, you have consumer rights. Across the
cations of fit, finish, corrosion resistance
country, State Insurance Commissioners have
or workmanship.
begun considering rules on the use of non-
OEM parts. This could mean that repair shops
Mitsubishi Motors built-in pro- will have to disclose to the consumer when
tection they intend to use non-OEM parts. Since reg-
ulations are not consistent on this point,
remember you have a choice. So, if you want
The strength and integrity built into your
genuine Mitsubishi Motors parts, you may
Mitsubishi vehicle is the result of a specific
have to specifically request them. Make cer-
design referred to as “Energy Management”.
tain your insurance company understands
Individual body parts are designed to act as
imitations are not to be used in the repair of
one unit in the event of an accident. Shock
your vehicle. You deserve the best genuine
waves are absorbed by protective panels or
Mitsubishi Motors parts.
are channeled around the passenger compart-
10-4 Customer assistance/Reporting Safety Defects

Specifications
Vehicle labeling .............................................................................11-2

Vehicle dimensions ........................................................................11-3
Vehicle weights ..............................................................................11-4
Engine specifications .....................................................................11-4
Battery ............................................................................................11-5
Tires and wheels ............................................................................11-5
Capacity .........................................................................................11-5
11
Vehicle labeling
Vehicle labeling 2 - Vehicle identification num- Chassis number

N01147401837 ber plate
The chassis number is stamped on the bulk-
Keep a record of the chassis number and
head as shown in the illustration.
vehicle identification number. Such informa- The vehicle identification number is stamped
tion will assist police if your vehicle is stolen. on the plate riveted to the left front corner of
the vehicle body. It is visible from outside of
the vehicle through the windshield.
3 - Air conditioning label
The air conditioning label is affixed on the

inside panel of the engine hood.
11
1 - Vehicle emission control
information label
The vehicle emission control information

label is affixed on the underside of the engine
hood.
4 - Vehicle information code

plate
The vehicle information code plate is located

on the front passenger door sill.
11-2 Specifications
Vehicle dimensions
Engine model/serial number Certification label

N01148200242
The engine model and serial number are The certification label is located on the
stamped on the cylinder block as shown in driver’s door sill.
the illustration.

Vehicle dimensions 11
N01147501652
Tire and loading information Overall length 169.5 in (4,305 mm)

placard Overall width 65.7 in (1,670 mm)
N01148101639
Overall height 59.3 in (1,505 mm)
The tire and loading information placard is
located on the driver’s door sill. Wheel base 100.4 in (2,550 mm)
Specifications 11-3
Vehicle weights
Vehicle weights
N01147601985
Item Manual transaxle CVT

Gross vehicle weight rating (GVWR) 3,053 lb (1,385 kg) 3,108 lb (1,410 kg)
Gross axle weight rating Front 1,609 lb (730 kg)
(GAWR) Rear 1,521 lb (690 kg)
Vehicle capacity weight 827 lb (375 kg)
Seating capacity 5 persons
Maximum roof load 110 lb (50 kg)
NOTE
 Roof load is important because it affects the vehicle capacity weight. Refer to “Loading cargo on the roof” on page 6-10.
11 GVWR: maximum total weight (load) limit specified for the vehicle
GAWR: maximum weight (load) limit specified for the front or rear axle
Seating capacity: the maximum number of occupants
Engine specifications
N01147701579
Engine model 3A92

Engine displacement 72.8 CID (1,193 cm3)
No. of cylinders and cylinder arrangement Inline-3
Bore 2.95 in (75.0 mm)
Stroke 3.54 in (90.0 mm)
Compression ratio 10.5:1
11-4 Specifications
Battery
Thermostat valve opening temperature 189 °F (87 °C)
Spark plugs NGK LZFR5DI-11
Spark plug gap .040 to .043 in (1.0 to 1.1 mm)
Firing order 1-3-2
PCD: Pitch Circle Diameter (installation

Battery Tires and wheels holes)
N01147800296 N01147901858
55D23L (356CCA/99RC)
Tire
165/65R14 175/55R15 NOTE
79S 77V  Contact an authorized Mitsubishi Motors
Battery is a 12 volt type. Size 14 x 5 J 15 x 5 1/2J dealer for details on the combination used on
your vehicle.
Wheel PCD 3.93 in (100 mm)  These tires satisfy vehicle loading conditions
Offset 1.5 in (38 mm) described in this owner’s manual.
Capacity
N01148002228 11
Item Capacity Lubricants
Fuel
9.2 gal (35 L) Refer to “Fuel selection” on page 3-2
(approximate)
Oil pan 2.9 qt (2.8 L) Engine oils displaying the ILSAC certification mark (“star-
burst” symbol) on the container.
Engine oil
Oil filter .21 qt (0.2 L) If these oils are not available, an API classification SN or
higher can be used.
Mitsubishi Motors Genuine NEW MULTI GEAR OIL ECO
Manual transaxle 1.7 qt (1.6 L)
API classification GL-4 SAE 75W-80
Refer to “Continuously variable transmission (CVT) fluid” on
Continuously variable transmission (CVT) 7.4 qt (7.0 L)
page 9-9.
Specifications 11-5
Capacity
Item Capacity Lubricants
Brake As required Conforming to Brake fluid DOT3 or DOT4
Hood lock release mechanism and safety catch As required Multipurpose type grease NLGI Grade 2
Engine coolant Manual trans-
4.2 qt (4.0 L) Mitsubishi Motors Genuine Super Long Life Coolant Premium
{Includes .53 qt (0.5 L) in reserve axle
or equivalent*
tank} CVT 4.8 qt (4.6 L)
Washer fluid 2.6 qt (2.5 L) —
Refer to the “Air con-
Refrigerant (air conditioning) ditioning label” on HFC-134a
page 11-2.
*: similar high quality ethylene glycol based non-silicate, non-amine, non-nitrate and non-borate coolant with long life hybrid organic acid tech-
nology
11
11-6 Specifications
Alphabetical index
Ball joint, steering linkage seals and drive Capacities .......................................... 11-5
A shaft boots ....................................... 9-21 Card holder ...................................... 5-110
Accessory (installation) ......................... 3-5 Battery .............................................. 9-10 Cargo loads ........................................ 6-10
Active stability control (ASC) .............. 5-52 Charging system warning light ........ 5-78
Cargo room light
Checking battery electrolyte level .... 9-11
Air cleaner filter ................................... 9-8 Bulb capacity ................................. 9-28
Disconnection and connection ......... 9-11
Air conditioning During cold weather ....................... 9-11 Catalytic converter ................................ 9-3
Automatic air conditioning .............. 7-12 Specification.................................. 11-5 Certification label ............................... 11-3
Important air conditioning operating tips..
Bluetooth® 2.0 interface ..................... 5-85 Charging system warning light ............. 5-78
7-18
Manual air conditioning .................... 7-7 Bottle holders.................................... 5-118 Child restraint systems ........................ 4-13
Air purifier ......................................... 7-19 Brake Child safety locks for rear door ............ 5-26
Fluid ............................................. 11-5 Cleaning
Airbag ............................................... 4-21
Brake assist system............................. 5-49 Inside of your vehicle...................... 9-32
Aluminum wheels ............................... 9-35
Braking ............................................... 6-5 Outside of your vehicle ................... 9-33
Antenna ............................................. 7-44
Anti-lock braking system ................ 5-49 Clutch
Anti-lock braking system..................... 5-49 Hose ............................................. 9-21 Pedal free play................................ 9-18
Arm rest............................................... 4-5 Pad wear alarm .............................. 5-47 Consumer information......................... 10-2
Assist grip ........................................ 5-119 Parking brake................................. 5-32
Continuously variable transmission (CVT) ...
Audio
Pedal............................................. 5-46
5-42
12
Pedal free play ............................... 9-18
AM/FM electronically tuned radio with Power brakes ................................. 5-47 Fluid....................................... 9-9, 11-5
CD player .................................... 7-19 Service brake ................................. 5-46 Selector lever operation ................... 5-42
Error codes..................................... 7-41 Warning lights ............................... 5-76 Selector lever positions.................... 5-44
Handling of compact discs............... 7-42 Convenience hook............................. 5-118
Break-in recommendations.................... 5-2
Automatic air conditioning .................. 7-12 Coolant (engine) .......................... 9-7, 11-5
Bulb capacity ..................................... 9-27
Cruise control ..................................... 5-54
B
C Cup holders ...................................... 5-117
Back-up light
Bulb capacity ................................. 9-27 California Perchlorate Materials
Replacement .................................. 9-30 Requirements..................................... 3-7
12-1
Alphabetical index
Engine Bulb capacity ................................. 9-27
D Compartment................................... 9-5 Indicators....................................... 5-76
Daytime running lights Coolant ................................... 9-7, 11-5 Replacement .................................. 9-29
Bulb capacity ................................. 9-27 High coolant temperature warning light.... Switch ........................................... 5-82
Replacement .................................. 9-28 5-78 Front seat adjustment ............................ 4-2
Hood............................................... 9-4
Defogger (rear window) ...................... 5-84 Front side-marker lights
Model ............................................ 11-3
Defrosting or defogging (windshield, door Bulb capacity ................................. 9-27
Oil and oil filter ....................... 9-5, 11-5
windows) .......................... 7-6, 7-10, 7-17 Replacement .................................. 9-29
Overheating..................................... 8-4
Dimensions ........................................ 11-3 Serial number ................................. 11-3 Front turn signal lights
Specification................................... 11-4 Bulb capacity ................................. 9-27
Dimmer (high/low beam change) ......... 5-81
Replacement .................................. 9-29
Disc brake pads .................................. 9-21 Engine hood ........................................ 9-4
Fuel
Dome light Engine switch ..................................... 5-13
Filling the fuel tank........................... 3-3
Bulb capacity ................................. 9-28 Error codes ......................................... 7-41 Fuel economy................................... 6-2
Door-ajar warning buzzer .................... 5-78 Exhaust system ................................... 9-21 Fuel hoses...................................... 9-20
Door-ajar warning light ....................... 5-78 Fuel remaining warning display ....... 5-70
Fuel selection ................................... 3-2
Doors F Tank capacity................................. 11-5
Lock.............................................. 5-24 Floor mat............................................. 6-2
12 Power door locks ............................ 5-25
Fluid
Fuel Pump Shut-off System ................. 8-15
Driving during cold weather .................. 6-4 Fuel remaining display ........................ 5-70
Brake fluid ..................................... 11-5
Driving, alcohol and drugs..................... 6-2 Continuously variable transmission (CVT) Fuses ................................................. 9-22
fluid...................................... 9-9, 11-5 Fusible links....................................... 9-22
Engine coolant ......................... 9-7, 11-5
E Manual transaxle............................. 11-5
Electric power steering system (EPS) ... 5-51 Washer fluid ............................ 9-9, 11-5
G
Electric rear window defogger switch ... 5-84 General maintenance
Fluid capacities and lubricants.............. 11-5
Maintenance................................... 9-20
Electronic immobilizer (Anti-theft starting Free-hand advanced security transmitter
system) ..................................... 5-3, 5-19 General vehicle data............................ 11-3
(F.A.S.T.-key) ................................... 5-9
Emission-control system maintenance .. 9-19 Genuine parts ....................................... 3-6
Front fog lights
Glove compartment........................... 5-117
12-2
Alphabetical index
Important facts to know in case of an accident Loading information.............................. 6-6
H 10-3 Lubricants .......................................... 11-5
Hazard warning flasher switch ............. 5-82 Indicator and warning light package ..... 5-75
Hazard warning lights ......................... 5-76 Indicators .......................................... 5-76 M
Head restraints...................................... 4-5 Information display ............................ 5-67 Malfunction indicator light .................. 5-77
Headlights Inside emergency trunk lid release ....... 5-28 Manual air conditioning......................... 7-7
Bulb capacity ................................. 9-27 Inside rearview mirror......................... 5-34 Manual transaxle................................. 5-40
Dimmer ......................................... 5-81
Instrument panel light dimmer control .. 5-68 Oil.......................................... 9-9, 11-5
Headlight flasher ............................ 5-81
Interior lights .................................... 5-115 Shift points..................................... 5-40
Replacement .................................. 9-28
Switch ........................................... 5-79 Manual window control....................... 5-29
Heater without air conditioning function . 7-4 J Modifications to and racing of your vehicle ..
3-5
High beam indicator............................ 5-76 Jack
Garage jack up position..................... 9-3 Multi-information display ........... 5-64, 5-65
High coolant temperature warning light 5-78
Storage............................................ 8-5
High-mounted stop light
Bulb capacity ................................. 9-27 Jump-starting the engine ....................... 8-2 O
Hill start assist .................................... 5-47 Octane rating ........................................ 3-2
HomeLink® Wireless Control System 5-110 K Oil 12
Key slot............................................. 5-18 Engine oil ............................... 9-5, 11-5
Hood lock release mechanism and safety
Manual transaxle oil................. 9-9, 11-5
catch................................................ 9-21 Keyless entry system .................... 5-6, 5-21
Oil pressure warning light.................... 5-78
Hook Keys ................................................... 5-2
Convenience hook ........................ 5-118 Operation mode .................................. 5-13
Operation under adverse driving conditions..
Horn switch........................................ 5-85 L 8-13
Labeling ............................................ 11-2
I Outside rearview mirrors ..................... 5-36
License plate lights
Overheating.......................................... 8-4
If the vehicle breaks down ..................... 8-2 Bulb capacity ................................. 9-27
Ignition switch.................................... 5-37 Replacement .................................. 9-31
Link System....................................... 5-85
12-3
Alphabetical index
Replacement................................... 9-30 Service precautions ............................... 9-2
P Rear-view camera ............................... 5-62 Side turn signal lights
Parking ................................................ 6-5 Rearview mirror Bulb capacity ................................. 9-27
Parking brake lever stroke ............... 9-19 Inside rearview mirror ..................... 5-34 Snow tires .......................................... 9-18
Parking brake ............................ 5-32, 9-19 Outside rearview mirrors ................. 5-36 Spark plugs ........................................ 9-20
Parking lights Replacement of light bulbs................... 9-26 Starting the engine .............................. 5-38
Bulb capacity ................................. 9-27 Replacing tires and wheels ................... 9-16 Steering
Replacement .................................. 9-29
Reporting Safety Defects ..................... 10-2 Electric power steering system (EPS) 5-51
Polishing............................................ 9-34 Steering wheel height adjustment ..... 5-33
Power brakes...................................... 5-47
S Stop lights
Power outlet ..................................... 5-110 Bulb capacity ................................. 9-27
Safe driving techniques......................... 6-4
Power windows .................................. 5-29 Replacement .................................. 9-30
Seat belts............................................. 4-7
Puncture (Tire changing) ....................... 8-6 Storage spaces .................................. 5-116
Adjustable seat belt shoulder anchor . 4-11
Child restraint systems..................... 4-13 Sun visors ........................................ 5-109
R Front passenger seat belt warning light..... Supplemental Restraint System ............ 4-21
4-10 How the Supplemental Restraint System
Radio
Maintenance and inspection ............. 4-21 works .......................................... 4-24
AM/FM electronically tuned radio with
12 CD player .................................... 7-19
Seat belt extender............................ 4-12 Maintenance service ....................... 4-35
Seat belt force limitter system .......... 4-13
General information about your radio 7-44
Seat belt instructions ........................ 4-8
Rear combination lights Seat belt pre-tensioners.................... 4-12
T
Bulb capacity ................................. 9-27 Seat belt use during pregnancy ......... 4-12 Tail lights
Replacement .................................. 9-30 Bulb capacity ................................. 9-27
Seats ................................................... 4-2
Rear seat .............................................. 4-5 Replacement .................................. 9-30
Arm rest .......................................... 4-5
Rear side-marker lights Front seats ....................................... 4-2 Tank capacity ..................................... 11-5
Bulb capacity ................................. 9-27 Head restraints ................................. 4-5 Tire pressure monitoring system........... 5-58
Replacement .................................. 9-30 Heated seats..................................... 4-4 Tires.................................................. 9-12
Rear turn signal lights Seats and restraint systems ................ 4-2 Inflation pressures .......................... 9-15
Bulb capacity ................................. 9-27 Service brake ...................................... 5-46 Maintenance................................... 9-16
12-4
Alphabetical index
Quality grading............................... 10-2 Vehicle preparation before driving ......... 6-3
Replacing tires and wheels............... 9-16 Vehicle weights.................................. 11-4
Rotation ......................................... 9-17
Vents .................................................. 7-2
Size (tire and wheel) ....................... 11-5
Snow tires ...................................... 9-18
Tire and loading information placard 11-3 W
Tire chains ..................................... 9-18 Warning lights ................................... 5-76
To change a tire ................................ 8-6
Tread wear indicator ....................... 9-16 Washer
Fluid ....................................... 9-9, 11-5
Tools ................................................... 8-5 Switch................................... 5-82, 5-83
Storage ............................................ 8-5
Washing ............................................ 9-33
Towing .............................................. 8-12
Waxing ............................................. 9-34
Trailer towing..................................... 6-11
Weights ............................................. 11-4
Trunk lid............................................ 5-27
Wheel
Turn signal light Covers........................................... 8-11
Indicators....................................... 5-76 Specification.................................. 11-5
Lever ............................................. 5-81
Wiper
Switch........................................... 5-82
U Wiper blades.................................. 9-19 12
USB input terminal ........................... 5-105
How to connect a USB memory device ....
5-106
How to connect an iPod................. 5-107
V
Vanity mirror ................................... 5-109
Vehicle care precautions...................... 9-32
Vehicle dimensions............................. 11-3
Vehicle labeling.................................. 11-2
12-5
How to calculate your gasoline mileage

2017 Mitsubishi Mirage g4 97705

Transféré par

Informations du document

Copyright

Formats disponibles

Partager ce document

Partager ou intégrer le document

Options de partage

Avez-vous trouvé ce document utile ?

Ce contenu est-il inapproprié ?

Droits d'auteur :

Formats disponibles

2017 Mitsubishi Mirage g4 97705

Transféré par

Droits d'auteur :

Formats disponibles

Mirage G4

/ 2017 OWNER’S MANUAL

© Copyright 2016 Mitsubishi Motors North America, Inc

Instruments and controls

1 Instruments and controls

Instrument cluster P.5-64

Hazard warning flasher switch P.5-82

Wiper and washer switch P.5-82

Cruise control switches

Engine switch (if so equipped) P.5-13

Fuse box P.9-22 Supplemental restraint system-driver’s knee airbag

Instruments and controls

Automatic air conditioning (if so

Engine hood release lever Glove compartment

Cup holder (for the rear seat)

Power window lock switch P.5-30

Bottle holders P.5-118

Heated seats switches

Manual window control

Trunk room light P.9-28

Windshield wipers P.5-82

Fuel tank filler P.3-3

Engine hood P.9-4

F.A.S.T.-key (Free-hand Advanced

Tire pressure monitoring system

Trunk lid P.5-27

Rear side- marker lights P.5-79, 9-27, 9-30

Back-up light P.9-27, 9-30

If this warning light comes on or flashes while you’re driving...

If this warning light comes on or flashes while you’re driving...

Warning lights Do this Ref. Page

 Park your vehicle in a safe place and stop the engine.

 Park your vehicle in a safe place and stop the engine.

Quick index 2-1

If this warning light comes on or flashes while you’re driving...

 Park your vehicle in a safe place.

2-2 Quick index

If this warning light comes on or flashes while you’re driving...

SRS warning light

 Have your continuously variable transmission (CVT) checked at an authorized

Quick index 2-3

If this warning light comes on or flashes while you’re driving...

2-4 Quick index

If this problem occurs...

If this problem occurs...

Problem Do this Ref. Page

The engine does not start when

The F.A.S.T.-key does not oper-

Quick index 2-5

If this problem occurs...

The engine does not start.

The engine is overheated.

Steam comes out of the engine

2-6 Quick index

If this problem occurs...

Problem Do this Ref. Page

Quick index 2-7

Your vehicle is designed to operate on

3-2 General information

Filling the fuel tank

General information 3-3

Filling the fuel tank

Fuel tank capacity WARNING

6. When the nozzle stops automatically, do